2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC 2nd Edition - 9/12/12 Black plate (1,1)
2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Performance and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-26
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-43 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-46 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-37
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-46
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-59
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-18
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase, A French language manual can be
or due to changes subsequent to obtained from your dealer, at
the printing of this owner manual. www.helminc.com, or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name “General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for Attention: Customer Service
CAMARO, and the CAMARO Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
Emblem are trademarks and/or 47911 Halyard Drive
appears in this manual. Plymouth, MI 48170
service marks of General Motors
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, Keep this manual in the vehicle for
or licensors. quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20951304 B Second Printing 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart I : Cruise Control }: Power

Here are some additional symbols B : Engine Coolant Temperature /: Remote Vehicle Start
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more O : Exterior Lamps >: Safety Belt Reminders
information on the symbol, refer to # : Fog Lamps 7: Tire Pressure Monitor
the Index.
. : Fuel Gauge d: Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
9 : Airbag Readiness Light + : Fuses M: Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Air Conditioning 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) Changer
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls j : LATCH System Child
or OnStar Restraints
$ : Brake System Warning Light *: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
" : Charging System :: Oil Pressure
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Vehicle Features Performance and Maintenance

Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Traction Control
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Instrument Panel Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-14 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-17
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-14 Tire Sealant and
Initial Drive Information Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Driver Information Driving for Better Fuel
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-15 Roadside Assistance
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Universal Remote System . . . 1-16 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-7
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-7
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-8
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-10
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8‑3. 9. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out 17. Transmission Temperature
2. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. of View). See Malfunction Gauge (Except ZL1) on
See Turn and Lane-Change Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17. page 5‑13.
Signals on page 6‑4. 10. Exterior Lamp Controls on Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑14.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam page 6‑1. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
Changer on page 6‑2. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5 on page 5‑12.
Flash-to-Pass on page 6‑2. (If Equipped). Engine Oil Pressure Gauge on
Driver Information Center (DIC) Instrument Panel Illumination page 5‑11.
Buttons (If Equipped). See Control on page 6‑5. Boost Gauge (ZL1 Only) on
Driver Information Center (DIC) 11. Cruise Control on page 9‑44. page 5‑10.
on page 5‑25. 12. Steering Wheel Adjustment on 18. Traction Control System (TCS)
3. Driver Shift Controls (If page 5‑2. on page 9‑37.
Equipped). See Automatic 13. Horn on page 5‑3. Performance Traction
Transmission on page 9‑26. Management (PTM). See
14. Steering Wheel Controls on
4. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑7. page 5‑2. Competitive Driving Mode on
5. Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 9‑39 (ZL1 Model Only).
15. Head-Up Display (HUD) on
page 5‑3. page 5‑28 (If Equipped). 19. Shift Lever. See Automatic
6. Light Sensor. See Automatic Transmission on page 9‑26 or
16. Climate Control Systems on Manual Transmission on
Headlamp System on page 6‑3. page 8‑1. page 9‑32.
7. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
20. Power Outlets on page 5‑5.
8. Hood Release (Out of View).
See Hood on page 10‑5. 21. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑4.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Remote Keyless Entry Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle
Information (RKE) System Personalization on page 5‑43.
The RKE transmitter may work up to
This section provides a brief
20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle. Press and hold V to open the
overview about some of the trunk.
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle. Press and release 7 to initiate
vehicle locator.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be Press and hold 7 for at least
found later in this owner manual. three seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press 7 again to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Keys on page 2‑1 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
Press the key release button to
extend the key blade. The key can Remote Vehicle Start
be used for the ignition and all For vehicles with this feature, the
locks. engine may be started from up to
Press K to unlock the driver door or 60 m (195 ft) away outside the
all doors. vehicle.
Press Q to lock all doors.

In Brief 1-5
Starting the Vehicle

. Turn on the hazard warning Power Door Locks
flashers.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the .
If equipped, there is a power door
vehicle. Turn the vehicle on and then off. lock switch on the instrument panel
See Remote Vehicle Start on and on the front door panels.
2. Press and release Q. page 2‑4. Q: Press to lock the doors.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / for at Door Locks K: Press to unlock the doors.
least two seconds or until the To lock or unlock a door: See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.
turn signal lamps flash.
. To lock the door from the inside, Trunk Release
When the engine starts, the parking use the door lock knob on the
lamps will turn on and remain on as top of the door. The trunk may be opened by
long as the engine is running. The pressing the remote trunk release
doors will be locked and the climate
. To unlock the door from inside, button on the lower portion of the
control system may come on. pull the handle once. Pulling the
handle again unlatches the door. driver door or V on the Remote
The engine will continue to run for Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
. From the outside turn the key See Trunk on page 2‑8.
10-minute time extension. Remote clockwise or counterclockwise,
start can be extended only once. or press Q or K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Canceling a Remote Start See Door Locks on page 2‑6 or
To cancel a remote start, do one of Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
the following: System Operation on page 2‑3.
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
1-6 In Brief
Seat Adjustment Power Seats See Power Seat Adjustment on

page 3‑4.
Manual Seats To raise or recline the seatback, tilt
the vertical control forward or
rearward. See Reclining Seatbacks
on page 3‑4.
Heated Seats
To adjust the seat, if equipped:

1. Lift the handle under the seat to To adjust the seat, if equipped:
unlock it. . Move the seat forward or
2. Slide the seat and release the rearward by sliding the
handle. horizontal control forward or
3. Try to move the seat back and rearward. If available, press L or M to turn on
forth to be sure it is locked in . Raise or lower the front part of the heated seat. A light indicates
place. the seat cushion by moving the this feature is on.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3. front of the horizontal control up To operate, the engine must be
or down. running.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by Press the button once for the
moving the entire horizontal highest setting. With each press of
control up or down. the button, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
In Brief 1-7
and then the off setting. Two lights Safety Belts Passenger Sensing
indicate the highest setting, and one
light indicates the lowest.
System
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑6.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints United States
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary Refer to the following sections for
while keeping the seat and the head important information on how to use
restraint height in the proper safety belts properly: Canada and Mexico
position. . Safety Belts on page 3‑8. The passenger sensing system will
See Head Restraints on page 3‑2 turn off the right front passenger
. How to Wear Safety Belts
and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3. frontal airbag under certain
Properly on page 3‑9.
conditions. The driver airbag and
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑10. roof‐rail airbags, if equipped, are not
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for affected by the passenger sensing
Children (LATCH System) on system.
page 3‑37. The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the
overhead console when the vehicle
1-8 In Brief
is started. See Passenger Sensing 2. Press one of the four sides on Cleaning the Mirror
System on page 3‑24 for more the h (control pad) to adjust the To avoid accidental OnStar calls (if
information. mirror. equipped), clean the mirror with the
3. Adjust each outside mirror so ignition off.
Mirror Adjustment that a little of the vehicle and the Do not spray glass cleaner directly
Exterior area behind it can be seen. on the mirror. Use a soft towel
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑12. dampened with water.
Interior Steering Wheel

Adjust the inside rearview mirror for Adjustment
a clear view of the area behind your
vehicle. To avoid glare of the
headlamps from behind, push the
tab forward for daytime and pull it
for nighttime use. See Manual
Rearview Mirror on page 2‑13.
On vehicles with an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror. The
Coupe Shown, Convertible Similar mirror reduces glare from the
Vehicles with outside power mirrors headlamps of the vehicle behind
have controls on the driver door you. The dimming feature comes on
armrest. and the indicator light illuminates
each time the vehicle is started. See
To adjust each mirror: Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Press the switch to select the on page 2‑13.
driver or passenger side mirror. 1. Pull the lever down.
In Brief 1-9
2. Move the steering wheel up To change the settings, press the There are four positions:
or down. following: P : Briefly turn to this position to
3. Pull or push the steering wheel (: Turns the lamp off, even turn the automatic light control off or
closer or away from you. when a door is open. on again. When released, the
4. Pull the lever up to lock the control returns to the AUTO
H : Turns the lamp on position.
steering wheel in place. automatically when a door is
Do not adjust the steering wheel opened. AUTO: Use to automatically turn on
while driving. the headlamps, parking lamps,
': Turns the lamp on. taillamps, sidemarker lamps, license
plate lamps, and instrument panel
Interior Lighting For more information on interior
lights.
lighting, see Instrument Panel
Dome Lamps Illumination Control on page 6‑5. ; : Use to turn on the parking
lamps together with the taillamps,
Exterior Lighting sidemarker lamps, license plate
lamps, and instrument panel lights.
5 : Use to turn on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps,
taillamps, sidemarker lamps, license
plate lamps, and instrument panel
lights.
# : Use to turn the fog lamps on or
The dome lamp buttons are off. The fog lamps come on together
overhead near the rearview mirror. with the parking lamps, taillamps,
sidemarker lamps, license plate
The exterior lamp control is on the lamps, and instrument panel lights.
instrument panel, on the outboard
side of the steering wheel.
1-10 In Brief
See: Windshield Wiper/Washer

. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑2.
. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
INT: Move the lever up to INT for
The windshield wiper/washer lever intermittent wipes, then turn the x
is on the right side of the steering INT band up for more frequent
column. With the ignition in ACC/ wipes or down for less frequent
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move wipes.
the windshield wiper lever to select OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
the wiper speed.
8 : For a single wipe, briefly move
HI: Use for fast wipes. the wiper lever down. For several
LO: Use for slow wipes. wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
nL: Pull the windshield wiper
lever toward you to spray windshield
washer fluid and activate the wipers.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑3.
In Brief 1-11
Climate Controls Transmission

The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can be Automatic Transmission
controlled with this system.
Tap Shift
Tap Shift allows the driver to
manually control the automatic
transmission. To use Tap Shift, the
shift lever must be in M (Manual
Mode) or D (Drive). Vehicles with
this feature have indicators on the
steering wheel. The controls are on
the back of the steering wheel. Tap
the left control to downshift, and the
right control to upshift. A Driver
Information Center (DIC) message
indicates the gear the vehicle is in.
1. Fan Control 5. Air Conditioning Electronic Range Select

(ERS) Mode
2. Heated Seats (If Equipped) 6. Defrost
Vehicles with axle code GW8 have
3. Temperature Control 7. Rear Window Defogger an ERS mode. ERS mode allows
4. Air Delivery Mode Controls 8. Recirculation you to choose the top-gear limit of
the transmission with fully automatic
See Climate Control Systems on gear selection. This can help control
page 8‑1. the vehicle's speed while driving
downhill or towing a trailer. The
vehicle has an electronic shift
position indicator within the
1-12 In Brief
instrument cluster. When using the Manual Transmission Vehicle Features

ERS mode a number will display
next to the M, indicating the current One to Four Shift Message
maximum gear allowed. (V8 Only) Radio(s)
To use this feature: VOL/ O : Press to turn the system
1. Move the shift lever to on and off. Turn to increase or
M (Manual Mode). decrease the volume.
2. Press the plus/minus buttons on RADIO/BAND: Press to choose

the back of the steering wheel, between FM, AM, or SiriusXM®,
to increase or decrease the gear if equipped.
range available. MENU/SELECT: Turn to select
See Manual Mode on page 9‑29. radio stations.
SEEK 7 : Press to seek the
previous radio station or track.
SEEK 6 : Press to seek the next
When this message comes on, you
radio station or track.
can only shift from 1 (First) to
4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to Buttons 1−6: Press to save and
2 (Second). The message will be select favorite stations.
displayed in the Driver Information INFO: Press to show available
Center. See Manual Transmission information about the current station
on page 9‑32. or track.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Overview on page 7‑2.
In Brief 1-13
Storing a Favorite Station 5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob Satellite Radio

to select the next value.
Stations from all bands can be Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite
stored in the favorite lists in any 6. To save the time or date and radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
order. Up to six stations can be return to the Time and Date satellite radio subscription can
stored in each favorite page and the Settings menu, press the / receive SiriusXM programming.
number of available favorite pages BACK button at any time or
can be set. press the MENU/SELECT knob SiriusXM Satellite Radio
To store the station to a position in after adjusting the minutes. Service
the list, press the corresponding Setting the 12/24 Hour Format SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
numeric button 1−6 until the station based in the 48 contiguous United
can be heard again. 1. Press the CONFIG button. States and 10 Canadian provinces.
For more information, see “Storing 2. Select Time and Date Settings. SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
variety of programming and
and Retrieving Favorites” in AM-FM 3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. commercial-free music, coast to
Radio on page 7‑7.
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob coast, and in digital-quality sound.
Setting the Clock to select the 12 hour or 24 hour A fee is required to receive the
display format. SiriusXM service.
Adjusting the Time
For detailed instructions on setting Refer to:
The clock menu can only be used the clock, see Clock on page 5‑4.
with the radio on while in ON/RUN
. www.siriusxm.com or call
or ACC/ACCESSORY. 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
1. Press the CONFIG button.
. www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑9.
3. Select Set Time.
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
adjust the highlighted value.
1-14 In Brief
Portable Audio Devices Steering Wheel Controls $ / i : Press to silence the

vehicle speakers only. Press again
This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
to turn the sound on. For vehicles
(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB
with OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
port in the center console bin.
press to reject an incoming call,
External devices such as iPods®,
or end a current call.
laptop computers, MP3 players, and
USB drives may be connected, _ SRC ^ : Press to select an audio
depending on the audio system. source.
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑15. Turn up or down to select the next
or previous favorite radio station,
Bluetooth® CD, or MP3 track.
The Bluetooth® system allows users + x −: Press + to increase the
with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile volume; press − to decrease the
phone to make and receive Some audio steering wheel controls volume.
hands-free calls using the vehicle can be adjusted at the steering See Steering Wheel Controls on
audio system and controls. wheel. page 5‑2.
The Bluetooth-enabled mobile b / g : Press to interact with the
phone must be paired with the available Bluetooth or OnStar
in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it systems.
can be used in the vehicle. Not all
phones will support all functions.
See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition)
on page 7‑25 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on
page 7‑22 or Bluetooth (Overview)
on page 7‑20.
In Brief 1-15
Cruise Control SET/−: Move the thumbwheel down

to set a speed or to make the
vehicle decelerate.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑44.
Infotainment System
1. SET/CLR: Press to set, or press
See the infotainment manual for and hold to clear, the menu item
information on the radio, audio displayed.
players, phone, navigation system,
and voice or speech recognition. 2. w / x : Use the thumbwheel to
There is also information on settings scroll through the items in
and downloadable applications (if each menu.
equipped). 3. MENU: Press to display the DIC
menus. This button is also used
5: Press to turn the cruise control Driver Information to return to or exit the last
system on and off. An indicator light Center (DIC) screen displayed on the DIC.
comes on in the instrument cluster. The DIC display is in the center of See Driver Information Center (DIC)
\: Press to disengage cruise the instrument cluster. It shows the on page 5‑25.
control without erasing the set status of many vehicle systems. The
speed from memory. controls for the DIC are on the turn Ultrasonic Parking Assist
signal lever.
RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up to If available, this system uses
make the vehicle resume to a sensors on the rear bumper to
previously set speed or to assist with parking and avoiding
accelerate to a higher speed. objects while in R (Reverse).
It operates at speeds less than
1-16 In Brief
8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible Universal Remote System Sunroof

beeps to provide distance and
system information. The ignition must be in ON/RUN,
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's Accessory Power (RAP) to operate
rear bumper clean to ensure proper the sunroof. See Retained
operation. Accessory Power (RAP) on
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9‑21.
page 9‑46. On vehicles with a sunroof, the
This system provides a way to switch is on the overhead console.
Power Outlets replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
The vehicle has two accessory
devices such as garage door
power outlets; one is below the openers, security systems, and
climate control system and the other
home automation devices.
is inside the center console storage.
They can be used to plug in Read the instructions completely
electrical equipment, such as a cell before attempting to program the
phone or an MP3 player. Universal Remote system. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
The accessory power outlets do not
helpful to have another person
work when the key is removed from
available to assist you with
the ignition and the driver door is
programming the Universal Remote
opened. This helps to preserve the
system.
battery life of the vehicle.
See Universal Remote System on
See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. Open/Close: Press and hold the
page 5‑46.
rear or front of the switch to open or
close the sunroof.
In Brief 1-17
Express-open: Press and release Performance and StabiliTrak® System

the rear of the switch two times to
express-open the sunroof. Maintenance StabiliTrak assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
Vent: Press and release the rear of driving conditions. The system turns
the switch to vent the sunroof. Traction Control on automatically every time the
System (TCS) vehicle is started.
Convertible The traction control system limits . To turn off both traction control
If equipped, the convertible top can wheel spin. The system turns on and electronic stability control,
be lowered and stowed under the automatically every time the vehicle press and hold the TCS/
tonneau cover behind the rear seat. is started. StabiliTrak button g on the
For step-by-step instructions, see . To turn off traction control, press console in front of the shift lever.
Convertible Top on page 2‑17. and release the TCS/StabiliTrak i and g illuminate.
button g on the console in front . Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button
of the shift lever. i illuminates. again to turn on both systems.
. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button See StabiliTrak® System on
again to turn traction control page 9‑38.
back on.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Tire Pressure Monitor
on page 9‑37. This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
1-18 In Brief
The TPMS does not replace normal The oil life system should be reset
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain to 100% only following an oil
the correct tire pressures. change.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System Resetting the Oil Life System
on page 10‑58.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
The low tire pressure warning light the engine off.
Tire Sealant and
alerts to a significant loss in 2. Fully press and release the
pressure of one of the vehicle's Compressor Kit accelerator pedal three times
tires. If the warning light comes on, This vehicle may come with a spare within five seconds.
stop as soon as possible and inflate tire and tire changing equipment or
See Engine Oil Life System on
the tires to the recommended a tire sealant and compressor kit.
page 10‑15.
pressure shown on the Tire and The kit can be used to temporarily
Loading Information label. See seal small punctures in the tread Car Wash Guidelines
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12. area of the tire. See Tire Sealant Notice: Automatic car washes are
The warning light will remain on until and Compressor Kit on page 10‑72. not recommended for ZL1 models
the tire pressure is corrected.
If the vehicle came with a spare tire and 1LE performance packages.
The low tire pressure warning light and tire changing equipment, see If Some car washes cause damage
may come on in cool weather when a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑70. to the vehicle, the wheels, and the
the vehicle is first started, and then convertible top, if the vehicle is
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This Engine Oil Life System equipped.
may be an early indicator that the
The engine oil life system calculates If the vehicle is driven through an
tire pressures are getting low and
engine oil life based on vehicle use automatic car wash that does not
the tires need to be inflated to the
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE have enough clearance for the
proper pressure.
OIL SOON message when it is time undercarriage and/or wide rear tires
to change the engine oil and filter. and wheels, the vehicle could be
damaged. Verify with the manager
In Brief 1-19
of the car wash that the vehicle will

. Keep vehicle tires properly See Roadside Assistance Program
fit before entering the car wash or inflated. (Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
use a touchless car wash. See . Combine several trips into a Assistance Program (U.S. and
Washing the Vehicle on page 10‑89 single trip. Canada) on page 13‑11.
under Exterior Care. . Replace the vehicle's tires with Roadside Assistance and OnStar
the same TPC Spec number (U.S. and Canada)
Driving for Better Fuel molded into the tire's sidewall If the vehicle has an active OnStar
Economy near the size. subscription, contact OnStar and the
Driving habits can affect fuel . Follow recommended scheduled vehicle’s current GPS location will
mileage. Here are some driving tips maintenance. be sent to an OnStar advisor to
to get the best fuel economy assess the situation, contact
possible. Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance, and relay the
exact location to send help.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate Program
smoothly.
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 OnStar®
. Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops. TTY Users (U.S. Only): If equipped, this vehicle has a
1-888-889-2438 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
. Avoid idling the engine for long
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 that can connect to a live Advisor
periods of time. for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
. When road and weather Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 Connection, and Diagnostic
conditions are appropriate, use As the owner of a new Chevrolet, Services. See OnStar Overview on
cruise control. you are automatically enrolled in the page 14‑1.
. Always follow posted speed Roadside Assistance program.
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
1-20 In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Keys and Locks
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
2-12 Keys
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-12
Keys and Locks Interior Mirrors
{ WARNING
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Automatic Dimming Rearview the ignition key is dangerous for
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) many reasons. Children or others
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Windows could be badly injured or even
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 killed. They could operate the
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 power windows or other controls
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 or even make the vehicle move.
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 The windows will function with the
Roof keys in the ignition and children
Doors Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 could be seriously injured or killed
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 if caught in the path of a closing
Vehicle Security window. Do not leave the keys in
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 a vehicle with children.
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-10
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
With an active OnStar subscription,

an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 14‑1.
Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑21 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
The key that is part of the Remote Press the key release button on the Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can RKE transmitter to extend the key
be used for the ignition and all blade. Press the button and the key If there is a decrease in the RKE
locks. blade to retract the key. operating range:
If it becomes difficult to turn the key, If it becomes difficult to turn the . Check the distance. The
inspect the key blade for debris. ignition key, inspect the key blade transmitter may be too far from
Periodically clean with a brush for debris. Periodically clean with a the vehicle.
or pick. brush or pick. . Check the location. Other
See your dealer if a new key is vehicles or objects may be
needed. blocking the signal.
If locked out of the vehicle, see . Check the transmitter's battery.
Roadside Assistance Program See “Battery Replacement” later
(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside in this section.
Assistance Program (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑11.

. If the transmitter is still not
Pressing Q may also arm the
working correctly, see your
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
dealer or a qualified technician
Alarm System on page 2‑10.
for service.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
Remote Keyless Entry driver door or all doors. See “Door
Unlock Options” under Vehicle
(RKE) System Operation Personalization on page 5‑43.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The turn signal indicators may flash
transmitter may work up to 20 m and/or the horn may sound to
(65 ft) away from the vehicle. indicate unlocking. See “Unlock
Other conditions can affect the Feedback (Lights)” under Vehicle
performance of the transmitter. See RKE without Remote Start Shown Personalization on page 5‑43.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System on page 2‑2. The following may be available: Pressing K will disarm the
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Alarm System on page 2‑10.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to V (Remote Trunk Release):
indicate locking. See “Locking Press and hold to open the trunk.
Feedback” under Vehicle 7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Personalization on page 5‑43. Alarm): Press and release one
If the passenger door is open when time to initiate vehicle locator. The
Q is pressed, all doors lock. exterior lamps flash and the horn
chirps three times.
If the driver door is open when Q is
pressed, all doors lock except the Press and hold 7 for at least
driver door, if enabled through three seconds to sound the panic
vehicle personalization. alarm. The horn sounds and the
turn signals flash until 7 is pressed transmitters will no longer work Remote Vehicle Start
again or the key is placed in the once the new transmitter is
programmed. For vehicles with this feature, the
ignition and turned to ON/RUN. engine may be started from up to
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For Battery Replacement 60 m (195 ft) away outside the
vehicles with this feature, press Q The battery is not rechargeable. To vehicle.
and then / to start the engine from replace the battery: / (Remote Vehicle Start): This
outside the vehicle using the RKE 1. Extend the key blade and open button will be on the RKE
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle the battery cover on the back of transmitter if you have remote start.
Start on page 2‑4 for additional the transmitter by prying it with a The climate control system will use
information. finger. the previous settings during a
The buttons on the keys are 2. Remove the used battery by remote start. The rear defog may
disabled when there is a key in the pushing on the battery and come on during remote start based
ignition. sliding it toward the key blade. on cold ambient conditions. The
rear fog indicator light does not
Programming Transmitters to 3. Insert the new battery, positive come on during remote start. If the
the Vehicle side facing up. Push the battery vehicle has heated seats, they may
down until it is held in place. come on during a remote start.
Only RKE transmitters programmed Replace with a CR2032 or
to this vehicle will work. If a equivalent battery. Laws in some local communities
transmitter is lost or stolen, a may restrict the use of remote
replacement can be purchased and 4. Snap the battery cover back on starters. For example, some laws
programmed through your dealer. to the transmitter. may require a person using remote
When the replacement transmitter is start to have the vehicle in view.
programmed to this vehicle, all Check local regulations for any
remaining transmitters must also be requirements.
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
Other conditions can affect the 3. Immediately after completing Extending Engine Run Time
performance of the transmitter. See Step 2, press and hold / for at For a 10-minute extension, repeat
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) least two seconds until the turn Steps 1–3 while the engine is still
System on page 2‑2. signal lamps flash. The turn running. The remote start can only
Starting the Vehicle signal lamps flashing confirms be extended once.
the request to remote start the
To start the engine using the remote vehicle has been received. When the remote start is extended,
start feature: the second 10 minutes will start
When the engine starts, the immediately.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the parking lamps will turn on and
vehicle. For example, if the vehicle has been
remain on as long as the engine
running for five minutes, and
2. Press and release Q. is running. The vehicle's doors
10 minutes are added, the engine
will be locked and the climate
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
control system may come on.
A maximum of two remote starts are
The engine will continue to run
allowed between ignition cycles.
for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps
for a 10-minute time extension. The vehicle's ignition switch must
Remote start can be extended be turned to ON/RUN and then back
only once. to LOCK/OFF using the key before
Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUN the remote start procedure can be
used again.
before driving.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start, do one of
the following:
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
Door Locks WARNING (Continued)
. Turn the vehicle on and then off. { WARNING . Outsiders can easily enter
Conditions in Which Remote Start through an unlocked door
Will Not Work Unlocked doors can be when slowing or stopping the
dangerous. vehicle. Lock the doors to
The remote start will not operate if: help prevent this from
. Passengers, especially
. The key is in the ignition. children, can easily open the happening.
. The hood is not closed. doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. The chance of being Manual Door Locks
. The hazard warning flashers thrown out of the vehicle in a
are on. crash is increased if the Lock the doors from inside the
. There is an emission control doors are not locked. So, all vehicle by pressing down on the
system malfunction. passengers should wear door lock knob on the top of
safety belts properly and the the door.
. The engine coolant temperature
is too high. doors should be locked The doors can also be unlocked
whenever the vehicle is from the inside by pulling the door
. The oil pressure is low. driven. handle. Pulling the door handle
. Two remote vehicle starts, or a . Young children who get into again unlatches the door.
single remote start with an unlocked vehicles may be Only the driver door has a key
extension, have already unable to get out. A child can cylinder. Unlock the door from the
been used. be overcome by extreme heat outside by turning the key
. The vehicle is not in P (Park). and can suffer permanent counterclockwise.
injuries or even death from
Lock all doors from the outside by
heat stroke. Always lock the
turning the key clockwise.
vehicle whenever leaving it.
(Continued)
The door lock cylinder turns freely K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
when either the wrong key is used, doors.
or the correct key is not fully
inserted. The free turning door lock To program the power door locks,
feature prevents the lock from being see Vehicle Personalization on
forced open. page 5‑43.
To reset the lock, turn it to the Lockout Protection
vertical position with the correct key
fully inserted. Remove the key and If the power door lock switch is
insert it again. pressed when the key is in the
ignition and a door is open, all the
If this does not reset the lock, turn doors will lock and only the driver
the key half-way around in the door will unlock. If the doors are
Instrument Panel
cylinder and repeat the reset closed, they can be locked by using
procedure. the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. Be sure to remove the
Power Door Locks key from the ignition when locking
If equipped, there is a power door the vehicle. This feature can be
lock switch on the instrument panel overridden by pressing Q on the
and on the front door panels. RKE transmitter or by pressing the
power door lock switch a
second time.
This feature can be disabled. See
“Power Door Locks” in Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑43.
Front Door Panels
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
Doors WARNING (Continued)

Trunk . Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
{ WARNING brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See “Climate
vehicle if it is driven with the Control Systems” in the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Index.
any objects that pass through the . If the vehicle has a power
seal between the body and the liftgate, disable the power
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine liftgate function.
exhaust contains carbon From inside the vehicle, press V
For more information about on the lower portion of the
monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine
seen or smelled. It can cause driver door.
Exhaust on page 9‑25.
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with Remote Trunk Release
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
To open the trunk from the outside
. Close all of the windows.
of the vehicle, press V on the
. Fully open the air outlets on Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
or under the instrument transmitter.
panel.
(Continued)
Emergency Trunk Release 2. Pull the cushion to the side, then

Lock (Convertible Only) fully insert the key into the lock
cylinder.
3. Firmly turn the key clockwise to
unlatch the trunk lid.
4. Remove the key.
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
There is an emergency trunk
when securing items in the trunk
release handle inside the trunk on
as it could damage the handle.
the liner, near the trunk latch. On
The emergency trunk release
If the trunk lid cannot be opened some vehicles, the release handle
handle is only intended to aid a
using the RKE transmitter or the can be accessed by folding the rear
person trapped in a latched trunk,
trunk release button: seatback down. See Rear Seats on
enabling them to open the trunk
page 3‑7.
1. Locate the manual release from the inside.
beside the rear seatback Pull the release handle to open the
cushion on the driver side. trunk from the inside.
Return the release handle to its
original position for proper
operation.
Vehicle Security Arming the System The security light stays on for
approximately one second when the
This vehicle has theft-deterrent To arm the system do one of the
vehicle is disarming.
features; however, they do not make following:
If the system is armed when there
the vehicle impossible to steal. . Close all of the windows and
are people inside of the vehicle,
doors, then lock the doors with
pulling the door handle from the
Vehicle Alarm System the RKE transmitter.
inside one time will unlock the door.
. Lock the vehicle using the power Pulling the handle a second time will
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system. door lock switch inside the unlatch the door.
vehicle if “Unlocked Door Anti
Lock Out” is turned off. How the System Alarm is
Activated
See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock
Out” under Vehicle To activate the system if it is armed,
Personalization on page 5‑43. open any door, the trunk, or hood.
The horn will sound and the hazard
The alarm will arm after warning flashers will flash.
30 seconds. Pressing Q on the
RKE transmitter a second time How to Turn Off the System
will bypass the 30-second delay Alarm
and immediately arm the To turn off the system alarm, do one
system. of the following:
Disarming the System . Press K on the RKE transmitter.
The security light is located on the To disarm the system, do one of the
instrument panel.
. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
following:
The theft-deterrent system is
. Press K on the RKE transmitter. disarmed when the alarm is
. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. turned off.
How to Detect a Tamper The vehicle is automatically When trying to start the vehicle, the
Condition immobilized when the key is immobilizer light comes on briefly
removed from the ignition. when the ignition is turned on.
If the horn sounds and the turn
signal lamps flash three times when The system is automatically If the engine does not start and the
K is pressed, an attempted break-in disarmed when the vehicle is immobilizer light stays on, there is a
occurred while the system was started with the correct key. The key problem with the system. Turn the
armed. The vehicle may also uses a transponder that matches an ignition off and try again.
display a message on the DIC. See immobilizer control unit in the If the engine still does not start, and
Security Messages on page 5‑41 for vehicle and automatically disarms the key appears to be undamaged,
more information. the system. Only the correct key try another ignition key.
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may
not start if the key is damaged. If the engine still does not start and
Immobilizer the light continues to stay on, try
See Radio Frequency Statement on another key.
page 13‑21 for information If the engine still does not start with
regarding Part 15 of the Federal the other key, the vehicle needs
Communications Commission (FCC) service. If the vehicle does start, the
rules and Industry Canada first key may be damaged. See your
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. dealer who can service the
The immobilizer light in the theft-deterrent system and have a
Immobilizer Operation instrument cluster comes on if there new key made.
This vehicle has a passive is a problem with arming or Do not leave the key or device that
theft-deterrent system. disarming the theft-deterrent disarms or deactivates the
system. See Immobilizer Light on theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
The system does not have to be page 5‑24.
manually armed or disarmed.
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors 3. Adjust each outside mirror so

that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
Convex Mirrors
Turn Signal Indicator
{ WARNING If the vehicle has a turn signal
indicator on the mirror, an arrow on
A convex mirror can make things, the mirror flashes in the direction of
like other vehicles, look farther the turn or lane change.
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane, Heated Mirrors
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or For vehicles with heated mirrors:
glance over your shoulder before 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
changing lanes. Coupe Shown, Convertible Similar Press to heat the mirrors.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors See “Rear Window Defogger” under
The passenger side mirror is convex have controls on the driver door Climate Control Systems on
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is armrest. page 8‑1.
curved so more can be seen from To adjust each mirror:
the driver seat. Automatic Dimming
1. Press the switch to select the
driver or passenger side mirror. Mirror
2. Press one of the four sides on If the vehicle is equipped with an
automatic dimming outside mirror on
the h (control pad) to adjust the
the driver side, the mirror will adjust
mirror. for the glare of headlamps
behind you.
Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Windows

Rearview Mirror
Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic { WARNING
Adjust the inside rearview mirror for dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the Never leave a child, a helpless
a clear view of the area behind your
glare from the headlamps of the adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
vehicle. To avoid glare of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming especially with the windows
headlamps from behind, push the
tab forward for daytime and pull it feature and the indicator light come closed in warm or hot weather.
for nighttime use. on each time the vehicle is started. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
Vehicles with OnStar® have three Vehicles with OnStar have three permanent injuries or even death
control buttons at the bottom of the control buttons at the bottom of the
from heat stroke.
mirror. See OnStar Overview on mirror. See OnStar Overview on
page 14‑1. page 14‑1.
Cleaning the Mirror Cleaning the Mirror
To avoid accidental OnStar calls, To avoid accidental OnStar calls,
clean the mirror with the ignition off. clean the mirror with the ignition off.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water. dampened with water.
Power Windows the front of the switch down to open the top of the window inward while
the window. Pull the switch up to closing the door so the top of the
close it. window goes under the roof seal.
{ WARNING The switches work when the ignition Express Window Operation
Children could be seriously is in ON/RUN or ACC/
injured or killed if caught in the ACCESSORY, or in Retained Coupe and Convertible Top
path of a closing window. Never Accessory Power (RAP). See The window switches have an
leave keys in a vehicle with Retained Accessory Power (RAP) express-up and down feature that
children. See Keys on page 2‑1. on page 9‑21. raises or lowers the window without
Window Indexing holding the switch. Pull the switch
up or press it down all the way and
This automatically lowers the release it. Stop the window by
window a small amount when the operating the switch in the same
door is opened. When the door is direction.
closed, the window will raise fully.
Convertible Top Only
If the vehicle loses power, you may
need to reprogram the windows. To express-up a front window, the
Follow the procedure under same side rear window must be
"Programming the Power Windows" closed.
later in this section. If a message To close all the windows, pull all
about the windows appears in the window switches up fully and
Driver Information Center (DIC), see release within four seconds. This
Coupe Shown, Convertible Similar Window Messages on page 5‑43. will result in the windows closing
If the window freezes to the door, automatically.
The power window switches on the
this feature may not work. To close
driver door control all windows. The
a door with a frozen window, push
window switch on the passenger
door is only for that window. Push
Express Window Anti-Pinch To program each front window:

Feature WARNING (Continued)
1. With the ignition in ON/RUN,
When express-up is active, the express override, make sure that close all doors.
window will auto-reverse if there is all people and obstructions are 2. With the window partially open,
an obstruction or severe icing. The clear of the window path. pull the power window switch up
window returns to normal operation until the window is fully closed.
after the obstruction or condition is
removed. In an emergency, the anti-pinch 3. Repeat Step 2 on all remaining
feature can be overridden in a windows.
If conditions prevent a window from supervised mode. Hold the window
closing and it continues to The windows are now
switch all the way up to the second
auto-reverse, the window can be reprogrammed.
position. The window will rise for as
closed by having the ignition in ON/ long as the switch is held. Once the
RUN and holding the window switch switch is released, the express Sun Visors
up until the window is closed. mode is re-activated. Pull the sun visor down to block
Express Window Anti-Pinch In this mode, the window can still glare. Detach the sun visor from the
Override close on an object in its path. Use center mount to pivot it to the side,
care when using the override mode. if available.
{ WARNING Programming the Power

Windows
If express override is activated,
the window will not reverse If the battery on the vehicle has
automatically. You or others could been recharged or disconnected,
be injured and the window could or is not working, you may need to
be damaged. Before you use reprogram the windows for the
express-up feature to work. Before
(Continued) reprogramming, replace or recharge
the vehicle's battery.
Roof Vent: Press and release the rear of

the switch to vent the sunroof.
To stop the sunroof from moving,
press either the open or close
sunroof switch.
Sunroof The sunroof only operates when the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ Press and release the back of the
On vehicles with a sunroof, the ACCESSORY, or if Retained switch to open the sunroof to the
switch is on the overhead console. Accessory Power (RAP) is active. vent position. Press it again to
See Retained Accessory Power express-open the sunroof. To stop
(RAP) on page 9‑21. the sunroof from opening, press the
switch again.
Express Sunroof Operation
A deflector automatically raises
when the sunroof is opened and
retracts while the sunroof closes.
If the sunshade is closed, it opens
automatically when the sunroof
opens past the vented position.
Notice: Forcing the sunshade
forward of the sliding glass panel
may cause damage and the
sunroof may not operate properly.
Open/Close: Press and hold the Always close the glass panel
rear or front of the switch to open or before closing the sunshade.
close the sunroof.
To close the sunroof, press the front
Express-open: Press and release The sunroof can be opened without of the switch and hold it until the
the rear of the switch two times to holding the switch down. Push the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will
express-open the sunroof. switch in the open direction until the stop if the switch is released. Close
second pause. The sunroof will the sunshade by hand.
fully open.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be Convertible Top Notice: Lowering the convertible
opened or closed if the vehicle has top when there are objects in the
an electrical failure. Power Operation storage area could damage it or
break the glass rear window.
Always verify that no objects are
in the storage area before
lowering the convertible top.
Notice: Lowering the convertible
top if it is damp, wet, or dirty can
cause stains, mildew, and
damage to the inside of the
vehicle. Dry off the convertible
top before lowering it.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This Notice: If you lower the
could cause an issue with sunroof convertible top on the vehicle in
operation or noise. It could also plug cold weather (0°C (32°F) or
1. Convertible Top
the water drainage system. lower), you may damage
2. Tonneau Cover (In the Trunk) convertible top components. Do
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose To operate the convertible top use not lower the top in cold weather.
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and the following steps. Notice: If you raise or lower the
roof sealing area using a clean Notice: Leaving the convertible convertible top while the vehicle
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not top down and exposing the is in motion, you could damage
remove grease from the sunroof. interior of the vehicle to outdoor the top or the top mechanism.
conditions may cause damage. The repairs would not be covered
Always close the convertible top by the warranty. Always put an
if leaving the vehicle outdoors. automatic transmission in
P (Park) or a manual transmission

in Neutral before raising or
lowering the convertible top.
Lowering the Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Place
the vehicle in P (Park) with an
automatic transmission and
Neutral with a manual
transmission. Set the parking
brake.
2. Remove the tonneau cover from
the trunk. 7. Release the convertible top front 9. Push and hold the rear of the
3. The rear trunk partition must be latch above the inside rearview convertible top button. The
in the fastened position. See mirror, by pulling down and windows will automatically lower
Rear Storage on page 4‑1. turning it clockwise. and the convertible top will lower
8. Return the convertible top front into the rear of the vehicle.
4. Remove all objects on or above A chime will sound when the
the rear trunk partition. latch to the closed position.
convertible top has lowered
5. Close the trunk. completely. If the radio is on the
sound may be muted for a brief
6. Start the engine.
time so the chime can be heard.
10. Install the tonneau cover. See
Tonneau Cover on page 4‑2.
If the convertible top is operated
multiple times, the engine should be
running to prevent drain on the
vehicle's battery. Under certain 1. Park on a level surface. Place

conditions, the Driver Information the vehicle in P (Park) with an
Center (DIC) may display a automatic transmission and
message regarding the convertible Neutral with a manual
top. See Convertible Top Messages transmission. Set the parking
on page 5‑34. brake.
Raising the Convertible Top 2. Remove the tonneau cover if
installed. See Tonneau Cover on
Notice: If you raise or lower the page 4‑2.
convertible top while the vehicle
is in motion, you could damage 3. Move any objects that have
the top or the top mechanism. fallen against the convertible top
The repairs would not be covered inside the trunk.
by the warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in
4. Close the trunk. { WARNING
P (Park) or a manual transmission 5. Start the engine. Placing hands on the top of the
in Neutral before raising or windshield frame when closing
lowering the convertible top. the convertible soft top could
Notice: If you raise the top cause fingers to be pinched and
without removing the tonneau may cause injury. Keep hands
cover you may damage the top below the windshield frame when
components and the tonneau closing the convertible top.
cover. Remove the tonneau cover
before operating the 6. Push and hold the front of the
convertible top. convertible top button. The top
will raise and the windows will
lower.
7. After the convertible top is If the convertible top has been cover. Remove the tonneau cover
completely raised, release the opened repeatedly within a short before operating the
convertible top button. time and is not working, wait convertible top.
five minutes before pressing the 1. Park on a level surface. Place
convertible top button again. the vehicle in P (Park) with an
Operation of the convertible top automatic transmission and
cannot be attempted for five minutes Neutral with a manual
after the last time the convertible top transmission. Set the parking
switch was pressed if the brake.
convertible top was opened 2. Remove the tonneau cover if
repeatedly within a short time and installed. See Tonneau Cover on
the top has stopped functioning. page 4‑2.
If the vehicle has lost power, the 3. Move any objects that have
convertible top can still be raised by fallen against the convertible top
releasing pressure on the inside the trunk.
hydraulic pump.
8. Release the convertible top front
latch from the lock position by Never attempt to open or close the
pulling down and turning it convertible top manually without first
clockwise. releasing pressure.
9. Lock the convertible top front Raising the Convertible Top
latch by pulling down and turning Manually
it counterclockwise, then push Notice: If you raise the top
it up. without removing the tonneau
cover you may damage the top
components and the tonneau
6. Using the provided wrench, turn 10. Lock the convertible top front
the pressure release bolt latch by pulling down and
counterclockwise no more than turning it counterclockwise,
one turn. then push it up.
7. Reinstall the trim cover. When power is restored to the
8. Pull the front of the convertible vehicle, the pressure release bolt
top up and forward. must be tightened using the
provided wrench, by turning it
clockwise. The convertible top
button can then be used to lower or
raise the convertible top.
If the convertible top is operated
4. Remove the trim cover to access multiple times, the engine should be
the hydraulic pressure running to prevent drain on the
release bolt. vehicle's battery. Under certain
conditions, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) may display a
message regarding the convertible
top. See Convertible Top Messages
on page 5‑34.
9. After the convertible top is If the battery has been
completely raised, release the disconnected, the power windows
convertible top front latch from must be programmed for the
the lock position by pulling down convertible top to operate. See
and turning it clockwise. Power Windows on page 2‑14.
5. Locate the pressure release bolt
on the top of the hydraulic pump.
Cleaning the Convertible Top Wet the entire vehicle and wash the
top evenly to avoid spots or rings.
The convertible top should be
Let the soap remain on the fabric for
cleaned often. High pressure car
a few minutes. When the top is very
washes may cause water to enter
dirty, use a mild foam-type cleaner.
the vehicle.
Thoroughly rinse, then let the top
Hand wash the convertible top in dry in direct sunlight.
the shade. Use a mild soap,
To protect the convertible top:
lukewarm water, and a soft sponge.
A chamois or cloth may leave lint on . After washing, the top must be
the top, and a brush can chafe the completely dry before lowering.
threads in the top fabric. Do not use . Do not get any cleaner on the
detergents, harsh cleaners, painted finish; it could leave
solvents, or bleaching agents. streaks.
. Before going through an
automatic car wash, find out if
the equipment could damage the
convertible top.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Use During Adding Equipment to the

Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28
Restraints Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-15 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Head Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Front Seats Airbag System Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-18 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-34
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 When Should an Airbag Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 What Makes an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Rear Seats
How Does an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Safety Belts What Will You See after an Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
How to Wear Safety Belts Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 (Right Front
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint
down. Try to move the head
restraint after the button is released
to make sure that it is locked in
place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Front Seats Seat Position Height Adjustment
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. To adjust a manual seat,
if equipped:
1. Lift the handle under the seat to
unlock it. If equipped, move the lever up or
2. Slide the seat and release the down repeatedly to manually raise
handle. or lower the seat.
3. Try to move the seat back and

forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
Power Seat Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
The lap belt could go up over
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: your abdomen. The belt forces
. Move the seat forward or would be there, not at your pelvic
To adjust the seatback:
rearward by sliding the bones. This could cause serious
. Tilt the top of the control
horizontal control forward or internal injuries.
rearward. rearward to recline.
For proper protection when the
. Raise or lower the front part of
. Tilt the top of the control forward vehicle is in motion, have the
the seat cushion by moving the to raise. seatback upright. Then sit well
front of the horizontal control up back in the seat and wear the
or down. safety belt properly.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the entire horizontal
control up or down.
Seatback Latches
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To return the seatback to the upright

Do not have a seatback reclined if position, lift the seatback and
the vehicle is moving. manually push it rearward until it
locks in place. Push and pull on the
To access the rear seats, pull up on
seatback to make sure it is locked.
the latch on the rear of the driver or
front passenger seatback. Fold the The power recline control is
seatback forward. deactivated when the seatback is
folded forward and will not function
until the seatback has been
manually returned to the upright,
locked position. This is normal. Do
not use the power recline control on
the outboard side of the seat to
raise the seatback. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 3‑4.
Heated Front Seats Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heated
{ WARNING seats can be turned on
automatically during a remote start.
If you cannot feel temperature They are canceled when the ignition
change or pain to the skin, the is turned on. Press the button to use
seat heater may cause burns. To the heated seats after the vehicle is
reduce the risk of burns, people started.
with such a condition should use The heated seat indicator lights do
care when using the seat heater, If available, press L or M to turn on not turn on during a remote start.
especially for long periods of the heated seat. A light indicates
this feature is on. The temperature performance of an
time. Do not place anything on
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
the seat that insulates against To operate, the engine must be This is normal.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, running.
cover, or similar item. This may The heated seats will not turn on
Press the button once for the during a remote start unless they
cause the seat heater to highest setting. With each press of
overheat. An overheated seat are enabled in the vehicle
the button, the heated seat will personalization menu. See Remote
heater may cause a burn or may change to the next lower setting,
damage the seat. Vehicle Start on page 2‑4 and
and then the off setting. Two lights Vehicle Personalization on
indicate the highest setting, and one page 5‑43.
light indicates the lowest.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Rear Seats To fold the seatback down:

{ WARNING
Notice: On convertible models,
there is a speaker between the A safety belt that is improperly
two rear seating positions on the routed, not properly attached,
seatback. If someone leans on or twisted will not provide the
the speaker, if cargo is loaded on protection needed in a crash. The
it, or if liquid is spilled on it, person wearing the belt could be
damage could occur. Do not lean seriously injured. After raising the
against the speaker, place cargo rear seatback, always check to be
on the speaker, or spill liquids on sure that the safety belts are
the speaker. properly routed and attached, and
On coupe models, the rear seat has are not twisted.
two designated seating positions
and can be folded for more cargo 1. Pull on the strap on the top of Lift the seatback up to raise it, and
space. Fold the seat only when the the rear seatback. push it back to lock it into place.
vehicle is parked. Make sure the safety belt is not
2. Fold the seatback down.
twisted or caught in the seatback.
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

WARNING (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some
in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts.
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
Do not let anyone ride where a injured or killed. Do not allow
safety belt cannot be worn passengers to ride in any area of
properly. In a crash, if you or your the vehicle that is not equipped
passenger(s) are not wearing with seats and safety belts.
safety belts, injuries can be much Always wear a safety belt, and
worse than if you are wearing check that all passenger(s) are
When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously restrained properly too. as fast as the vehicle does. If the
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle has indicators as a going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. In reminder to buckle the safety belts. It could be the windshield, the
addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other page 5‑15. When you wear a safety belt, you
passengers in the vehicle.
and the vehicle slow down together.
(Continued) There is more time to stop because
you stop over a longer distance and,
when worn properly, your strongest
bones take the forces from the
safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be — whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front
much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3‑30 or Infants of you.
and Young Children on page 3‑32. . Always use the correct buckle
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
should I have to wear safety for your seating position.
protection.
belts? . Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just
A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with touching the thighs. In a crash,
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong
safety belts — not instead of in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
most protection. about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
These parts of the body are best All seating positions in the vehicle straight. To see how, see “Seats”
able to take belt restraining have a lap-shoulder belt. in the Index.
forces. The shoulder belt locks if The following instructions explain
there is a sudden stop or crash. how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured,
or even killed, by not wearing
your safety belt properly.
. Never allow the lap or
shoulder belt to become
loose or twisted.
. Never wear the shoulder belt
under both arms or behind
your back.
. Never route the lap or
shoulder belt over an
1. If the seat has a safety belt
armrest.
guide, and the safety belt is not
routed through the guide, snap
the guide around the belt
webbing. Be sure the belt is not
twisted.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
the belt across you. Do not let it up on the shoulder belt.
get twisted. It may be necessary to pull
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if stitching on the safety belt
you pull the belt across you very through the latch plate to fully
quickly. If this happens, let the tighten the lap belt on smaller
belt go back slightly to unlock it. occupants.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 4. Push the latch plate into the
If this happens, let the belt go buckle until it clicks.
back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑15.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if To unlatch the belt, push the button
necessary. on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the Pretensioners work only once. If the There is one guide for each
safety belt is out of the way. If a pretensioners activate in a crash, outboard passenger position in the
door is slammed against a safety the pretensioners and probably rear seat. Here is how to install a
belt, damage can occur to both the other parts of the vehicle's safety comfort guide to the safety belt:
safety belt and the vehicle. belt system will need to be replaced.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Safety Belt Pretensioners Parts after a Crash on page 3‑15.
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for the front outboard Rear Safety Belt Comfort
occupants. Although the safety belt Guides
pretensioners cannot be seen, they Rear shoulder belt comfort guides
are part of the safety belt assembly. may provide added safety belt
They can help tighten the safety comfort for older children who have
belts during the early stages of a outgrown booster seats and for
moderate to severe frontal or near some adults. When installed on a
frontal crash if the threshold shoulder belt, the comfort guide
conditions for pretensioner positions the shoulder belt away
activation are met. If the vehicle has from the neck and head. 1. Pull the elastic cord out from
side impact airbags, safety belt
between the edge of the
pretensioners can help tighten the
seatback and the interior body to
safety belts in a side crash. And,
remove the guide from its
if the vehicle has roof-rail airbags
storage clip.
the safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts during a
rollover crash.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt 3. Be sure that the belt is not
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
To remove and store the comfort

guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide onto the clip, leaving only
the loop of the elastic cord exposed.
Properly secure the guide before
folding the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy
4. Buckle, position, and release the Safety belts work for everyone, A pregnant woman should wear a
safety belt as described including pregnant women. Like all lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
previously in this section. Make occupants, they are more likely to portion should be worn as low as
sure the shoulder portion of the be seriously injured if they do not possible, below the rounding,
belt is on the shoulder and not wear safety belts. throughout the pregnancy.
falling off of it. The belt should The best way to protect the fetus is
be close to, but not contacting, to protect the mother. When a safety
the neck. belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Extender to have it repaired. Torn or frayed Replacing Safety Belt
safety belts may not protect you in a
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten crash. They can rip apart under
System Parts after a
around you, you should use it. impact forces. If a belt is torn or Crash
But if a safety belt is not long frayed, get a new one right away.
enough, your dealer will order you Make sure the safety belt reminder { WARNING
an extender. When you go in to light is working. See Safety Belt
order it, take the heaviest coat you Reminders on page 5‑15. A crash can damage the safety
will wear, so the extender will be belt system in the vehicle.
long enough for you. To help avoid Keep safety belts clean and dry. A damaged safety belt system
personal injury, do not let someone See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑15. may not properly protect the
else use it, and use it only for the person using it, resulting in
seat it is made to fit. The extender Safety Belt Care serious injury or even death in a
has been designed for adults. Never Keep belts clean and dry. crash. To help make sure the
use it for securing child seats. To safety belt systems are working
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. See the instruction sheet that { WARNING properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
comes with the extender. Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacements made as soon as
It may severely weaken them. In possible.
Safety System Check a crash, they might not be able to
Now and then, check that the safety provide adequate protection. After a minor crash, replacement of
belt reminder light, safety belts, Clean safety belts only with mild safety belts may not be necessary.
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and soap and lukewarm water. But the safety belt assemblies that
anchorages are all working properly. were used during any crash may
Look for any other loose or have been stressed or damaged.
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
See your dealer to have the safety Airbag System All of the airbags in your vehicle will
belt assemblies inspected or have the word AIRBAG embossed
replaced. The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label
airbags: near the deployment opening.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt . A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word
system was not being used at the . A frontal airbag for the right front AIRBAG will appear on the middle
time of the crash. passenger. part of the steering wheel for the
Have the safety belt pretensioners driver and on the instrument panel
. A seat-mounted side impact for the right front passenger.
checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the driver.
crash, or if the airbag readiness light With seat-mounted side impact
stays on after you start the vehicle . A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will
or while you are driving. See Airbag airbag for the right front appear on the side of the seatback
Readiness Light on page 5‑15. passenger. closest to the door.
The vehicle may also have the With roof-rail airbags, the word
following airbags: AIRBAG will appear along the
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver headliner or trim.
and the passenger seated Airbags are designed to supplement
directly behind the driver. the protection provided by safety
. A roof-rail airbag for the right belts. Even though today's airbags
front passenger and the are also designed to help reduce
passenger seated directly the risk of injury from the force of an
behind the right front passenger. inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
{ WARNING force and faster than the blink of or very close to, any airbag when
You can be severely injured or an eye, anyone who is up it inflates can be seriously injured
killed in a crash if you are not against, or very close to any or killed. Airbags plus
wearing your safety belt, even airbag when it inflates can be lap-shoulder belts offer protection
with airbags. Airbags are seriously injured or killed. Do not for adults and older children, but
designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any not for young children and infants.
belts, not replace them. Also, airbag, as you would be if sitting Neither the vehicle's safety belt
airbags are not designed to inflate on the edge of the seat or leaning system nor its airbag system is
in every crash. In some crashes forward. Safety belts help keep designed for them. Young
safety belts are the only restraint. you in position before and during children and infants need the
See When Should an Airbag a crash. Always wear a safety protection that a child restraint
Inflate? on page 3‑20. belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
crash helps reduce the chance of the vehicle. Children on page 3‑30 or Infants
hitting things inside the vehicle or and Young Children on
being ejected from it. Airbags are Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side page 3‑32.
“supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly, whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag The right front passenger frontal
Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for airbag is in the instrument panel on
more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side.
middle of the steering wheel.
Coupe Models, Driver Side Shown, Convertible Models, Driver Side Coupe Models, Driver Side Shown,
Passenger Side Similar Shown, Passenger Side Similar Passenger Side Similar
On coupe models, the seat-mounted On convertible models, the On coupe models, the roof-rail
side impact airbags for the driver seat-mounted side impact airbags airbags for the driver, right front
and right front passenger are in the for the driver and right front passenger, and second row
side of the seatbacks closest to passenger are in the side of the outboard passengers are in the
the door. seatbacks closest to the door. ceiling above the side windows.
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at

{ WARNING Inflate? different crash speeds. For
example:
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to
occupant and an airbag, the
. If the vehicle hits a stationary
inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate
airbag might not inflate properly or near frontal crashes to help
or it might force the object into at a different crash speed than if
reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object.
that person causing severe injury injuries mainly to the driver's or right
or even death. The path of an front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that
inflating airbag must be kept However, they are only designed to deforms, the airbags could
clear. Do not put anything inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed
between an occupant and an predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object
airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform.
anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object
hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could
airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed
the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or object (like a wall).
seat-mounted side impact airbag. should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object
fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could
Never secure anything to the roof It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight
by routing a rope or tie‐down quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object.
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an Thresholds can also vary with
inflating roof-rail airbag will be specific vehicle design.
blocked.
Frontal airbags are not intended to Airbag System on page 3‑16. damage to a vehicle or because of
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear Seat-mounted side impact and what the repair costs were. For
impacts, or many side impacts. roof-rail airbags are intended to frontal airbags, inflation is
In addition, the vehicle has inflate in moderate to severe side determined by what the vehicle hits,
dual-stage frontal airbags. crashes. In addition, these roof‐rail the angle of the impact, and how
Dual-stage airbags adjust the airbags are intended to inflate quickly the vehicle slows down. For
restraint according to crash severity. during a rollover or in a severe seat-mounted side impact and
The vehicle has electronic frontal frontal impact. Seat-mounted side roof-rail airbags, deployment is
sensors, which help the sensing impact and roof-rail airbags will determined by the location and
system distinguish between a inflate if the crash severity is above severity of the side impact.
moderate frontal impact and a more the system's designed threshold In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
severe frontal impact. For moderate level. The threshold level can vary deployment is determined by the
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags with specific vehicle design. direction of the roll. In a rollover
inflate at a level less than full Seat-mounted side impact airbags event, both roof‐rail airbags will
deployment. For more severe frontal are not intended to inflate in frontal deploy.
impacts, full deployment occurs. impacts, near frontal impacts,
The vehicle has a seat position rollovers, or rear impacts. What Makes an Airbag
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
sensor which enables the sensing
is intended to deploy on the side of
Inflate?
system to monitor the position of the
the vehicle that is struck. Both In a deployment event, the sensing
driver seat. The seat position sensor
roof-rail airbags will deploy when system sends an electrical signal
provides information that is used to
either side of the vehicle is struck, triggering a release of gas from the
determine if the airbag(s) should
or if the sensing system predicts inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
deploy at a reduced level or at full
that the vehicle is about to roll over, airbag causing the bag to break out
deployment.
or in a severe frontal impact. of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
The vehicle has seat-mounted side the airbag, and related hardware are
impact airbags. The vehicle may or In any particular crash, no one can
all part of the airbag module.
may not have roof-rail airbags. See say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
Frontal airbag modules are located Seat-mounted side impact and What Will You See after
inside the steering wheel and roof-rail airbags distribute the force
instrument panel. For vehicles with of the impact more evenly over the
an Airbag Inflates?
seat-mounted side impact airbags, occupant's upper body. After the frontal airbags and
there are airbag modules in the side Rollover‐capable roof‐rail airbags seat-mounted side impact airbags
of the front seatbacks closest to the are designed to help contain the inflate, they quickly deflate, so
door. For vehicles with roof-rail head and chest of occupants in the quickly that some people may not
airbags, there are airbag modules in outboard seating positions in the even realize an airbag inflated.
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the first and second rows. The rollover‐ Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
side windows that have occupant capable roof‐rail airbags are partially inflated for some time after
seating positions. designed to help reduce the risk of they inflate. Some components of
full or partial ejection in rollover the airbag module may be hot for
How Does an Airbag events, although no system can several minutes. For location of the
Restrain? prevent all such ejections. airbags, see Where Are the
Airbags? on page 3‑18.
In moderate to severe frontal or But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily The parts of the airbag that come
near frontal collisions, even belted
because the occupant's motion is into contact with you may be warm,
occupants can contact the steering
not toward those airbags. See When but not too hot to touch. There may
wheel or the instrument panel. In
Should an Airbag Inflate? on be some smoke and dust coming
moderate to severe side collisions,
page 3‑20 for more information. from the vents in the deflated
even belted occupants can contact
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
the inside of the vehicle. Airbags should never be regarded prevent the driver from seeing out of
Airbags supplement the protection as anything more than a supplement the windshield or being able to steer
provided by safety belts. Frontal to safety belts. the vehicle, nor does it prevent
airbags distribute the force of the people from leaving the vehicle.
impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping the
occupant more gradually.
and turn the hazard warning

. Airbags are designed to inflate
{ WARNING flashers off by using the controls for only once. After an airbag
those features. inflates, you will need some new
When an airbag inflates, there parts for the airbag system.
may be dust in the air. This dust If you do not get them, the
could cause breathing problems { WARNING airbag system will not be there
for people with a history of A crash severe enough to inflate to help protect you in another
asthma or other breathing trouble. the airbags may have also crash. A new system will include
To avoid this, everyone in the damaged important functions in airbag modules and possibly
vehicle should get out as soon as other parts. The service manual
the vehicle, such as the fuel
it is safe to do so. If you have for the vehicle covers the need
system, brake and steering
breathing problems but cannot to replace other parts.
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
get out of the vehicle after an appears to be drivable after a . The vehicle has a crash sensing
airbag inflates, then get fresh air moderate crash, there may be and diagnostic module which
by opening a window or a door. concealed damage that could records information after a
If you experience breathing make it difficult to safely operate crash. See Vehicle Data
problems following an airbag the vehicle. Recording and Privacy on
deployment, you should seek page 13‑19 and Event Data
medical attention. Use caution if you should attempt Recorders on page 13‑19.
to restart the engine after a crash . Let only qualified technicians
has occurred. work on the airbag systems.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn Improper service can mean that
the interior lamps on, turn the In many crashes severe enough to an airbag system will not work
hazard warning flashers on, and inflate the airbag, windshields are properly. See your dealer for
shut off the fuel system after the broken by vehicle deformation. service.
airbags inflate. You can lock the Additional windshield breakage may
doors, turn the interior lamps off, also occur from the front outboard
passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing start the vehicle from a distance, According to accident statistics,
you may not see the system check. children are safer when properly
System When the system check is secured in a rear seat in the correct
The vehicle has a passenger complete, either the word ON or child restraint for their weight
sensing system for the right front OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will and size.
passenger position. The passenger be visible. See Passenger Airbag We recommend that children be
airbag status indicator will be visible Status Indicator on page 5‑16. secured in a rear seat, including: an
on the overhead console when the The passenger sensing system will infant or a child riding in a
vehicle is started. turn off the right front passenger rear-facing child restraint; a child
frontal airbag under certain riding in a forward-facing child seat;
conditions. The driver airbags and an older child riding in a booster
roof‐rail airbags (if equipped) are not seat; and children, who are large
affected by the passenger sensing enough, using safety belts.
system. A label on the sun visor says,
The passenger sensing system “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
United States works with sensors that are part of the front.” This is because the risk to
the right front passenger seat. The the rear-facing child is so great if the
sensors are designed to detect the airbag deploys.
presence of a properly seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag
{ WARNING
should be enabled (may inflate) A child in a rear-facing child
or not. restraint can be seriously injured
Canada and Mexico
or killed if the right front
The words ON and OFF, or the passenger airbag inflates. This is
symbol for on and off, will be visible because the back of the
during the system check. If you are
(Continued)
using remote start, if equipped, to

. The right front passenger seat is
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
rear-facing child restraint would back as it will go. It is better to outgrown child restraints.
be very close to the inflating secure the child restraint in a . Or, if there is a critical problem
airbag. A child in a forward-facing rear seat.
with the airbag system or the
child restraint can be seriously passenger sensing system.
injured or killed if the right front The passenger sensing system is
passenger airbag inflates and the When the passenger sensing
designed to turn off the right front system has turned off the right front
passenger seat is in a forward passenger frontal airbag if:
position. passenger frontal airbag, the off
. The right front passenger seat is indicator will light and stay lit to
Even if the passenger sensing unoccupied. remind you that the airbag is off.
system has turned off the right See Passenger Airbag Status
. The system determines that an
front passenger frontal airbag, no Indicator on page 5‑16.
infant is present in a rear-facing
system is fail-safe. No one can
infant seat. The passenger sensing system is
guarantee that an airbag will not designed to turn on (may inflate) the
. The system determines that a
deploy under some unusual right front passenger frontal airbag
circumstance, even though the small child is present in a child
restraint. any time the system senses that a
airbag is turned off. person of adult size is sitting
Secure rear-facing child restraints
. The system determines that a properly in the right front passenger
in a rear seat, even if the airbag small child is present in a seat. When the passenger sensing
booster seat. system has allowed the airbag to be
is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in . A right front passenger takes enabled, the on indicator will light
the right front seat, always move his/her weight off of the seat for and stay lit to remind you that the
a period of time. airbag is active.
the front passenger seat as far
(Continued)
For some children who have If the On Indicator is Lit for a if adjustable, to make sure that
outgrown child restraints and for Child Restraint the vehicle seatback is not
very small adults, the passenger pushing the child restraint into
sensing system may or may not turn If a child restraint has been installed the seat cushion.
off the right front passenger frontal and the on indicator is lit:
6. Restart the vehicle.
airbag, depending upon the 1. Turn the vehicle off.
person's seating posture and body If the on indicator is still lit,
2. Remove the child restraint from secure the child in the child
build. Everyone in the vehicle who
the vehicle. restraint in a rear seat position in
has outgrown child restraints should
wear a safety belt properly — 3. Remove any additional items the vehicle, and check with your
whether or not there is an airbag for from the seat such as blankets, dealer.
that person. cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers. If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
{ WARNING 4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
If the airbag readiness light ever by the child restraint
comes on and stays on, it means manufacturer and refer to
that something may be wrong Securing Child Restraints (Right
with the airbag system. To help Front Passenger Seat) on
avoid injury to yourself or others, page 3‑45 or Securing Child
have the vehicle serviced right Restraints (Rear Seat) on
away. See Airbag Readiness page 3‑43.
Light on page 5‑15 for more 5. If, after reinstalling the child
information, including important restraint and restarting the
safety information. vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion,
If a person of adult-size is sitting in Additional Factors Affecting The passenger sensing system may
the right front passenger seat, but System Operation turn on the passenger airbag when
the off indicator is lit, it could be liquid soaks into the seat. If this
because that person is not sitting Safety belts help keep the happens, the on indicator will be lit.
properly in the seat. If this happens, passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
use the following steps to allow the the seat immediately. If the airbag
system to detect that person and braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the readiness light is lit, do not install a
enable the right front passenger child restraint or allow anyone to
frontal airbag: passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” occupy the seat. See Airbag
1. Turn the vehicle off. in the Index for additional Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for
2. Remove any additional material information about the importance of important safety information.
from the seat, such as blankets, proper restraint use.
cushions, seat covers, seat A thick layer of additional material, { WARNING
heaters, or seat massagers. such as a blanket or cushion,
Stowing of articles under the
3. Place the seatback in the fully or aftermarket equipment such as
passenger seat or between the
upright position. seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the passenger seat cushion and
4. Have the person sit upright in passenger sensing system seatback may interfere with the
the seat, centered on the seat operates. We recommend that you proper operation of the passenger
cushion, with legs comfortably not use seat covers or other sensing system.
extended. aftermarket equipment except when
5. Restart the vehicle and have the approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
Servicing the
person remain in this position for
one minute after the on indicator the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
is lit. page 3‑28 for more information Airbags affect how the vehicle
about modifications that can affect should be serviced. There are parts
how the system operates. of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your Adding Equipment to the In addition, the vehicle has a
dealer and the service manual have passenger sensing system for the
information about servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle front outboard passenger position,
vehicle and the airbag system. To Adding accessories that change the which includes sensors that are part
purchase a service manual, see vehicle's frame, bumper system, of the passenger seat. The
Service Publications Ordering height, front end, or side sheet passenger sensing system may not
Information on page 13‑17. metal, may keep the airbag system operate properly if the original seat
from working properly. The trim is replaced with non-GM
{ WARNING operation of the airbag system can
also be affected by changing or
covers, upholstery, or trim; or with
GM covers, upholstery, or trim
For up to 10 seconds after the moving any parts of the front seats, designed for a different vehicle. Any
vehicle is turned off and the safety belts, the airbag sensing and object, such as an aftermarket seat
battery is disconnected, an airbag diagnostic module, steering wheel, heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
can still inflate during improper instrument panel, roof-rail airbag or device, installed under or on top
service. You can be injured if you modules, ceiling headliner or pillar of the seat fabric, could also
are close to an airbag when it garnish trim, front sensors, side interfere with the operation of the
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. impact sensors, or airbag wiring. passenger sensing system. This
could either prevent proper
They are probably part of the Your dealer and the service manual
deployment of the passenger
airbag system. Be sure to follow have information about the location
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
proper service procedures, and of the airbag sensors, sensing and
sensing system from properly
make sure the person performing diagnostic module, and airbag
turning off the passenger airbag(s).
work for you is qualified to do so. wiring.
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑24.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail
airbags, see Different Size Tires
and Wheels on page 10‑66.
If your vehicle needs to be modified have the airbag covering and/or If an airbag inflates, you will need to
because you have a disability and airbag module replaced. For the replace airbag system parts. See
you have questions about whether location of the airbags, see your dealer for service.
the modifications will affect the Where Are the Airbags? on If the airbag readiness light stays on
vehicle's airbag system, or if you page 3‑18. See your dealer for after the vehicle is started or comes
have questions about whether the service. on when you are driving, the airbag
airbag system will be affected if the system may not work properly. Have
vehicle is modified for any other Replacing Airbag System the vehicle serviced right away. See
reason, call Customer Assistance.
See Customer Assistance Offices
Parts after a Crash Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑15.
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
Customer Assistance Offices { WARNING
(Mexico) on page 13‑5.
A crash can damage the airbag
systems in the vehicle.
Airbag System Check A damaged airbag system may
The airbag system does not need not work properly and may not
regularly scheduled maintenance or protect you and your
replacement. Make sure the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
readiness light is working. See in serious injury or even death. To
Airbag Readiness Light on help make sure the airbag
page 5‑15. systems are working properly
Notice: If an airbag covering is after a crash, have them
damaged, opened, or broken, the inspected and any necessary
airbag may not work properly. Do replacements made as soon as
not open or break the airbag possible.
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
page 3‑10. If the shoulder belt
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
still does not rest on the
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
shoulder, then return to the
booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑10.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, According to accident statistics,
return to the booster seat. children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint

system secured in a rear seating WARNING (Continued)
position.
belt. The belt force would then be
In a crash, children who are not applied right on the abdomen.
buckled up can strike other people That could cause serious or fatal
who are buckled up, or can be injuries. The shoulder belt should
thrown out of the vehicle. Older go over the shoulder and across
children need to use safety belts the chest.
properly.
{ WARNING
Never allow more than one child
to wear the same safety belt. The { WARNING
safety belt cannot properly spread Never allow a child to wear the
the impact forces. In a crash, they safety belt with the shoulder belt
can be crushed together and behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured. A safety belt seriously injured by not wearing
must be used by only one person the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
at a time. crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's arms. An infant should be
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag secured in an appropriate
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every restraint.
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
Children can be seriously injured while riding in a vehicle. Due to
or strangled if a shoulder belt is crash forces, an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and will become so heavy it is not
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
{ WARNING
unattended in a vehicle and never 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) Children who are up against,
allow children to play with the infant will suddenly become a or very close to, any airbag when
safety belts. 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's it inflates can be seriously injured
(Continued) or killed. Never put a rear-facing
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of are many kinds of restraints

WARNING (Continued) add-on child restraints? available for children with
A: Add-on child restraints, which special needs.
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child are purchased by the vehicle
restraint in a rear seat. It is also owner, are available in four basic { WARNING
better to secure a forward-facing types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into To reduce the risk of neck and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you head injury during a crash, infants
must secure a forward-facing consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also need complete support. In a
child restraint in the right front crash, if an infant is in a
whether or not the restraint will
seat, always move the front rear-facing child restraint, the
be compatible with the motor
passenger seat as far back as it vehicle in which it will be used. crash forces can be distributed
will go. across the strongest part of an
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many infant's body, the back and
different models available. When shoulders. Infants should always
purchasing a child restraint, be be secured in rear-facing child
sure it is designed to be used in restraints.
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards. { WARNING
The restraint manufacturer A young child's hip bones are still
instructions that come with the so small that the vehicle's regular
restraint state the weight and safety belt may not remain low on
height limitations for a particular the hip bones, as it should.
child restraint. In addition, there
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Child Restraint Systems
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate Forward-Facing Child Seat
child restraints.
Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child's body with the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness.
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child Children can be endangered in a

Restraint in the Vehicle crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured or that come with the restraint which
killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual.
the vehicle. Secure the child The child restraint instructions are
restraint properly in the vehicle important, so if they are not
using the vehicle safety belt or available, obtain a replacement
LATCH system, following the copy from the manufacturer.
Booster Seats instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured
A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure
vehicle's safety belt system. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is
in the vehicle. Child restraint in it.
systems must be secured in vehicle In some areas of the United States
seats by lap belts or the lap belt and Canada, Certified Child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Passenger Safety Technicians
the LATCH system. See Lower (CPSTs) are available to inspect
Anchors and Tethers for Children and demonstrate how to correctly
(LATCH System) on page 3‑37. use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website to We recommend that children and

locate the nearest child safety seat child restraints be secured in a rear WARNING (Continued)
inspection station. For CPST seat, including: an infant or a child
availability in Canada, check with riding in a rear-facing child restraint; passenger airbag inflates and the
Transport Canada or the Provincial a child riding in a forward-facing passenger seat is in a forward
Ministry of Transportation office. child seat; an older child riding in a position.
booster seat; and children, who are Even if the passenger sensing
Securing the Child Within the large enough, using safety belts. system has turned off the right
Child Restraint
Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no
the front. This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can
{ WARNING the rear-facing child is so great if the guarantee that an airbag will not
A child can be seriously injured or airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual
killed in a crash if the child is not circumstance, even though it is
properly secured in the child { WARNING turned off.
restraint. Secure the child Secure rear-facing child restraints
A child in a rear-facing child
properly following the instructions in a rear seat, even if the airbag
restraint can be seriously injured
that came with that child restraint. is off. If you secure a
or killed if the right front
forward-facing child restraint in
passenger airbag inflates. This is
the right front seat, always move
Where to Put the because the back of the
the front passenger seat as far
Restraint rear-facing child restraint would
back as it will go. It is better to
be very close to the inflating
According to accident statistics, secure the child restraint in a
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
children and infants are safer when rear seat.
child restraint can be seriously
properly restrained in a child injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
restraint system or infant restraint on page 3‑24 for additional
system secured in a rear seating (Continued)
information.
position.
When securing a child restraint in a Keep in mind that an unsecured a top tether, you must also use
rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a either the lower anchors or the
instructions that came with the child collision or sudden stop and injure safety belts to properly secure the
restraint to make sure it is people in the vehicle. Be sure to child restraint. A child restraint must
compatible with this vehicle. properly secure any child restraint in never be installed using only the top
Child restraints and booster seats the vehicle — even when no child is tether and anchor.
vary considerably in size, and some in it. In order to use the LATCH system in
may fit in certain seating positions the vehicle, you need a child
better than others. Always make Lower Anchors and restraint that has LATCH
sure the child restraint is properly Tethers for Children attachments. The child restraint
secured. (LATCH System) manufacturer will provide you with
Depending on where you place the instructions on how to use the child
The LATCH system secures a child restraint and its attachments. The
child restraint and the size of the restraint during driving or in a crash.
child restraint, you may not be able following explains how to attach a
LATCH attachments on the child child restraint with these
to access adjacent safety belt restraint are used to attach the child
assemblies or LATCH anchors for attachments in the vehicle.
restraint to the anchors in the
additional passengers or child vehicle. This system is designed to Not all vehicle seating positions or
restraints. Adjacent seating make installation of a child restraint child restraints have lower anchors
positions should not be used if the easier. and attachments or top tether
child restraint prevents access to or anchors and attachments.
interferes with the routing of the Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed Some child restraints with a top
safety belt. tether are designed to be used
using the anchors, or use the
Wherever a child restraint is vehicle's safety belts to secure the whether the top tether is anchored
installed, be sure to secure the child restraint, following the instructions or not. Other child restraints require
restraint properly. that came with that restraint, as well that the top tether be anchored.
as the instructions in this manual. A national or local law may require
When installing a child restraint with that the top tether be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Convertible models do not have top
tether anchors to secure a child
restraint. If a national or local law
requires that the top tether be
anchored, do not use a child
restraint in this vehicle because a
top tether cannot be properly
anchored.
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
built into the vehicle. There are two the child restraint to the vehicle.
lower anchors for each LATCH A top tether anchor is built into the
seating position that will vehicle. The top tether
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (2) on the child restraint
lower attachments (2). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether Rear Seat — Convertible Model
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top Rear Seat — Coupe Model
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the child H (Lower Anchor): Seating
restraint. positions with two lower anchors.
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating Lower Anchors
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
To assist in locating the lower According to accident statistics,

anchors, each seating position with children and infants are safer when
lower anchors has two labels, near properly restrained in a child
the crease between the seatback restraint system or infant restraint
and the seat cushion. system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Top Tether Anchors Restraint on page 3‑36 for
To assist in locating the top tether
anchors, the top tether anchor additional information.
symbol is on the cover of the Securing a Child Restraint
anchor. Designed for the LATCH
Convertible top models do not have System
top tether anchors to be used to
secure a child restraint in any
seating position.
{ WARNING
Be sure to use an anchor on the If a LATCH-type child restraint is
same side of the vehicle as the not attached to anchors, the child
seating position where the child restraint will not be able to protect
restraint will be placed. the child correctly. In a crash, the
Do not secure a child restraint in a child could be seriously injured or
On coupe models, the top tether position without a top tether anchor killed. Install a LATCH-type child
anchors are on the rear seatback if a national or local law requires restraint properly using the
filler panel. that the top tether be attached, or if anchors, or use the vehicle safety
the instructions that come with the belts to secure the restraint,
child restraint say that the top tether following the instructions that
must be attached. came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
use the vehicle's safety belts.

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) Instead, use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock, secure the restraints. Some
restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the restraints also use another vehicle
Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed. anchor to secure the top tether.
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment 1. Attach and tighten the lower
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments to the lower
to come loose or even break attachments rub against the anchors. If the child restraint
during a crash. A child or others vehicle’s safety belts. This may does not have lower
could be injured. To reduce the damage these parts. If necessary, attachments, secure the child
risk of serious or fatal injuries move buckled safety belts to restraint with the safety belts
during a crash, attach only one avoid rubbing the LATCH and top tether, if equipped. Refer
child restraint per anchor. attachments. to the child restraint
Do not fold the empty rear seat manufacturer instructions and
with a safety belt buckled. This the instructions in this manual.
{ WARNING could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating
Children can be seriously injured safety belt to its stowed position, position.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is before folding the seat.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
wrapped around their neck and If you need to secure more than one the seat.
the safety belt continues to child restraint in the rear seat, see
tighten. Buckle any unused safety Where to Put the Restraint on 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
belts behind the child restraint so page 3‑36. attachments on the child
children cannot reach them. Pull restraint to the lower
This system is designed to make anchors.
the shoulder belt all the way out installation of child restraints easier.
(Continued) When using lower anchors, do not
2. On coupe models, if the child If the child restraint has a Replacing LATCH System
restraint manufacturer single tether, route the
recommends that the top tether tether over the seatback.
Parts After a Crash
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether { WARNING
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and A crash can damage the LATCH
the following steps: system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. secure the child restraint,
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten resulting in serious injury or even
the top tether according to death in a crash. To help make
the child restraint sure the LATCH system is
instructions and the If the child restraint has a working properly after a crash,
following instructions: dual tether, route the tether see your dealer to have the
over the seatback. system inspected and any
3. Before placing a child in the necessary replacements made as
child restraint, make sure it is soon as possible.
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the If the vehicle has the LATCH system
LATCH path and attempt to and it was being used during a
move it side to side and back crash, new LATCH system parts
and forth. There should be no may be needed.
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper New parts and repairs may be
installation. necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

(Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that
system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
System) on page 3‑37 for how and and as the instructions say.
where to install your child restraint If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks.
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑36. the buckle so that the safety belt
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
1. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if
Children (LATCH System) on
the seat. necessary.
page 3‑37 for top tether anchor
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Do not secure a child restraint in a the lap and shoulder portions of
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑37.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down move it side to side and back
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the and forth. When the child
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to restraint is properly installed,
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, there should be no more than
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
into the retractor. When installing To remove the child restraint,
a forward-facing child restraint, it unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
may be helpful to use your knee let it return to the stowed position.
to push down on the child If the top tether is attached to a top
restraint as you tighten the belt. tether anchor, disconnect it.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Securing Child Restraints

(Right Front
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Passenger Seat) A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints

restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
This vehicle has airbags. A rear or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
seat is a safer place to secure a passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
forward-facing child restraint. See because the back of the the right front seat, always move
Where to Put the Restraint on
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
page 3‑36
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
In addition, the vehicle has a airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front
passenger frontal airbag under See Passenger Sensing System
passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑24 for additional
certain conditions. See Passenger passenger seat is in a forward
Sensing System on page 3‑24 and information.
position.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑16 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing If the child restraint has the LATCH
including important safety system has turned off the right system, see Lower Anchors and
information. front passenger frontal airbag, no Tethers for Children (LATCH
A label on the sun visor says, system is fail-safe. No one can System) on page 3‑37 for how and
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in guarantee that an airbag will not where to install the child restraint
the front.” This is because the risk to deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint is
the rear-facing child is so great if the circumstance, even though it is secured using a safety belt and it
airbag deploys. turned off. uses a top tether, see Lower
(Continued) Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑37 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a When the passenger sensing

position without a top tether anchor system has turned off the right
if a national or local law requires front passenger frontal airbag,
that the top tether be anchored, or if the off indicator on the
the instructions that come with the passenger airbag status
child restraint say that the top strap indicator should light and stay lit
must be anchored. when the vehicle is started. See
In Canada, the law requires that Passenger Airbag Status
forward-facing child restraints have Indicator on page 5‑16.
a top tether, and that the tether be 2. Put the child restraint on
attached. the seat.
You will be using the lap-shoulder If the seat has a safety belt
belt to secure the child restraint in guide, remove the safety belt 4. Push the latch plate into the
this position. Follow the instructions from the guide by unsnapping buckle until it clicks.
that came with the child restraint. the guide on the seat. Do not Position the release button on
1. Move the seat as far back as it secure the child restraint with the buckle, so that the safety
will go before securing the the safety belt routed through belt could be quickly unbuckled
forward-facing child restraint. the guide. if necessary.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in
the passenger airbag status
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down indicator will come on and stay on
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the when the vehicle is started.
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3‑24 for more
may be helpful to use your knee information.
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Try to pull the belt out of the let it return to the stowed position.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the If the seat has a safety belt guide,
retractor is not locked, repeat return the safety belt into the guide
Steps 5 and 6. by snapping the guide around the
webbing.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Fastened Position
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Open the glove box by lifting up on
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 the lever. Use the key to lock and
Additional Storage Features unlock the glove box.
Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Rear Storage
Rear Trunk Partition 1. Pull on the handle (1) to detach
and roll out the trunk partition (2)
The trunk partition keeps cargo at the front of the trunk (3).
away from the convertible top.
The trunk partition attaches to the
sides of the trunk to protect the
convertible top or can be rolled up
and stored when the convertible top
is up.
2. Attach the trunk partition (2) into

the brackets (1).
3. Remove any objects from the
top of the trunk partition (2).
4-2 Storage
Stored Position Additional Storage

Features
Tonneau Cover
Installation
1. Remove the tonneau cover
storage bag from the trunk and
3. Attach the handle (1) to the remove the tonneau cover.
rolled-up trunk partition (2) at the
1. Pull the handle (3) toward the front of the trunk (3).
rear of the trunk while pulling up See Convertible Top Messages on
to release the trunk partition (2) page 5‑34.
from the brackets (1).
2. Hold the handle (3) and slowly Center Console Storage
let the trunk partition (2) roll up
toward the front of the trunk (4). To open, lift the latch on the front
edge of the armrest.
There is an accessory power outlet
and an optional USB/audio jack in
the storage area. See Power Outlets
on page 5‑5 and Auxiliary Devices
on page 7‑15. 2. Unfold and place the tonneau
cover on the vehicle.
Storage 4-3
3. Fold the sides of the tonneau 4. Insert the tab (1) under the 5. Push the outside rim (1) of the
cover over. Attach the cord (1) at trim (2) on both sides. tonneau cover under the vehicle
the front edge of the tonneau trim (2) on both sides.
cover to the post (2) on the back
seat rear panel on both sides.
4-4 Storage
Removal
6. Push the edge (2) of the center 2. Fold the sides of the tonneau
of the tonneau cover (1) under cover over and remove the
the vehicle trim (3). 1. Grip the tonneau cover at the cord (1) from the post (2) on the
notch and pull back to release back seat rear panel on both
the tab on both sides. sides.
3. Fold the tonneau cover, place it
in the storage bag, and store it in
the trunk.
Storage 4-5
Convenience Net
For vehicles with a convenience net
inside the trunk, it can be used to
secure loose items.
The upper (1) and lower (3) hooks

on each side of the trunk opening
are provided to attach the net.
Install the opening of the net at the
top and over the two middle
hooks (2).
4-6 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Transmission Temperature
Gauge (Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . 5-13
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-28
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15 Vehicle Messages
Controls Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15
Passenger Airbag Status Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-34
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Convertible Top Messages . . . 5-34
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-35
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Antilock Brake System (ABS) Engine Cooling System
Indicators Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-36
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Traction Control System Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-22 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-37
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Traction Control System Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 (TCS) OFF/StabiliTrak® OFF Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Object Detection System
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23 Ride Control System
Boost Gauge (ZL1 Only) . . . . . 5-10 Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Engine Oil Pressure High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-41
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-24 Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Engine Oil Temperature Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 5-24 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-41
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-42 Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel

Vehicle Reminder while driving.
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-42 Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls
Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 Adjustment
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-43
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-46
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Some audio controls can be

To adjust the steering wheel: adjusted at the steering wheel.
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles Horn

with Bluetooth® or OnStar®, press to
interact with those systems. See Press a on the steering wheel pad
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on to sound the horn.
page 7‑25 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on Windshield Wiper/Washer
page 7‑22 or Bluetooth (Overview)
on page 7‑20 or OnStar Overview INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Move
on page 14‑1. the lever up to INT for intermittent
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to wipes, then turn the x INT band
reject an incoming call, or end a up for more frequent wipes or down
current call. Press to silence the for less frequent wipes.
vehicle speakers while using the OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
infotainment system. Press again to The windshield wiper/washer lever
turn the sound on. is on the right side of the steering 8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly
move the wiper lever down. For
_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press to column. With the ignition in ACC/
several wipes, hold the wiper
select an audio source. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move
the windshield wiper lever to select lever down.
Turn up or down to select the next the wiper speed. Clear snow and ice from the wiper
or previous favorite radio station or blades and windshield before using
CD, or MP3 track. HI: Use for fast wipes.
them. If frozen to the windshield,
+ x − (Volume): Press + or − to LO: Use for slow wipes. carefully loosen or thaw them.
increase or decrease the volume. Damaged blades should be
replaced. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑35.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor.
Wiper Parking See Washer Fluid on page 10‑30 for location of the vehicle's antennas.
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ information on filling the windshield The compass system is designed to
OFF while the wipers are on LO, HI, washer fluid reservoir. operate for a certain number of
or INT, they will immediately stop. miles or degrees of turn before
If the windshield wiper lever is then

{ WARNING needing a signal from the GPS
satellites. When the compass
moved to off before the driver door In freezing weather, do not use display shows CAL, drive the
is opened or within 10 minutes, the the washer until the windshield is vehicle for a short distance in an
wipers will restart and move to the warmed. Otherwise the washer open area where it can receive a
base of the windshield. fluid can form ice on the GPS signal. The compass system
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/ windshield, blocking your vision. will automatically determine when
OFF while the wipers are performing the GPS signal is restored and
wipes due to windshield washing, provide a heading again. See
the wipers continue to run until they Compass Compass Messages on page 5‑34
reach the base of the windshield. for more information on the
The vehicle may have a compass
messages that may be displayed for
n L (Windshield Washer): Pull display on the Driver Information
the compass.
the windshield wiper lever toward Center (DIC). The compass receives
you to spray windshield washer fluid its heading and other information
and activate the wipers. The wipers from the Global Positioning Clock
will continue until the lever is System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak, The infotainment system controls
released or the maximum wash time and vehicle speed information. are used to access the time and
is reached. When the windshield Avoid covering the GPS antenna for date settings through the menu
wiper lever is released, additional long periods of time with objects system. The clock menu can only
wipes may occur depending on how that may interfere with the antenna's be used with the radio on while in
long the windshield washer had ability to receive a satellite signal. ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
been activated. See Backglass Antenna on
page 7‑12 and Satellite Radio
Antenna on page 7‑13 for the
Setting the Time and Date Setting the Month & Day Certain power accessory plugs may
Format not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
2. Select Time and Date Settings. 1. Press the CONFIG button. overload vehicle and adapter fuses.
3. Select Set Time or Set Date. 2. Select Time and Date Settings. If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 3. Highlight Month & Day Format.
adjust the highlighted value. When adding electrical equipment,
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
be sure to follow the proper
5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select MM/DD (month/day) or
installation instructions included with
to select the next value. DD/MM (day/month).
the equipment. See Add-On
6. To save the time or date and Electrical Equipment on page 9‑59.
Power Outlets
return to the Time and Date Notice: Hanging heavy
Settings menu, press the / The vehicle has two accessory equipment from the power outlet
BACK button at any time or power outlets; one is below the can cause damage not covered
press the MENU/SELECT knob climate control system and the other by the vehicle warranty. The
after adjusting the minutes is inside the center console storage. power outlets are designed for
or year. They can be used to plug in accessory power plugs only, such
electrical equipment, such as a cell as cell phone charge cords.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format phone or an MP3 player.
1. Press the CONFIG button. The accessory power outlets do not
work when the key is removed from
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
the ignition and the driver door is
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. opened. This helps to preserve the
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob battery life of the vehicle.
to select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format.
Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Instrument Cluster
V8 English Shown, V6, Metric, and Manual Transmission Similar

ZL1 English Shown, Metric and Manual Transmission Similar

Speedometer Trip Odometer Fuel Gauge

The speedometer shows the The trip odometer can show how far
vehicle's speed in either kilometers the vehicle has been driven since
per hour (km/h) or miles per the trip odometer was last reset.
hour (mph). The trip odometer is accessed and
reset through the Driver Information
Odometer Center (DIC). See Driver
The odometer shows how far the Information Center (DIC) on
vehicle has been driven, in either page 5‑25.
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
Tachometer
odometer. If the vehicle needs a The tachometer displays the engine
new odometer installed, the new speed in revolutions per Metric
one is set to the mileage of the old minute (rpm).
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver door to show the old mileage
reading.
English
When the ignition is on, the fuel Here are some situations that can Boost Gauge (ZL1 Only)
gauge shows about how much fuel occur with the fuel gauge. None of
the vehicle has left in the fuel tank. these indicate a problem with the
An arrow on the fuel gauge shows fuel gauge.
the side of the vehicle on which the . At the gas station, the fuel pump
fuel door is located. shuts off before the gauge
The gauge indicates empty before reads full.
the vehicle is out of fuel, to show . It takes a little more or less fuel
that the vehicle's fuel tank should be to fill up than the fuel gauge
filled soon. indicated. For example, the
When the fuel tank is low on fuel, a gauge may have indicated the
FUEL LEVEL LOW message will tank was half full, but it actually
appear on the Driver Information took a little more or less than
Center (DIC). For more information half the tank's capacity to fill Metric
see Fuel System Messages on the tank.
page 5‑37. . The pointer on the fuel gauge is
on empty when the ignition is off.
English
This gauge, near the shift lever, Engine Oil Pressure in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds
indicates vacuum during light to per square inch) when the engine is
moderate throttle and boost under
Gauge running.
heavier throttle. Oil pressure may vary with engine
It displays the air pressure level in speed, outside temperature, and oil
the intake manifold before it enters viscosity, but readings above the
the engine's combustion chamber. low pressure zone indicate the
The gauge is automatically centered normal operating range. When the
at zero every time the engine is oil pressure reaches the low
started. Actual vacuum or boost is pressure zone, a message appears
displayed from this zero point. in the Driver Information Center
Changes in ambient pressure, such (DIC). See Engine Oil Messages on
Metric
as driving in mountains and page 5‑36 and Engine Oil on
changing weather, will slightly page 10‑13 for more information.
change the zero reading. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Check the oil level as soon as
English possible. Add oil if required, but
if the oil level is within the
For vehicles with the oil pressure operating range and the oil
gauge, it is near the shift lever, and pressure is still low, have the
shows the engine oil pressure vehicle serviced. Always follow
the maintenance schedule for
changing engine oil.
A reading in the low pressure zone Engine Oil Temperature

can be caused by a dangerously
low oil level or some other problem
Gauge
causing low oil pressure. Check the
oil as soon as possible.
English
For vehicles with this gauge, it is
near the shift lever and indicates
Metric
engine oil temperature. If the gauge
pointed moves to the higher end of
the gauge, the engine oil
temperature is operating hotter than
normal. It is acceptable if this
happens during aggressive driving
or racetrack usage. The DIC will
display a warning message if the
engine oil temperature exceeds an
acceptable level. See Engine Oil
Messages on page 5‑36 in DIC.
Engine Coolant Transmission

Temperature Gauge Temperature Gauge
(Except ZL1)
English
Metric
This gauge indicates the engine
coolant temperature. If the gauge
Metric
pointer moved to the H or the
shaded area, the engine coolant is
operating hotter than normal. It is
acceptable if this happens during
aggressive driving or racetrack
usage. The DIC will display a
warning message if the engine
coolant temperature exceeds an
acceptable level. See Engine English
Cooling System Messages on For vehicles with this gauge, it is
page 5‑35 in DIC. near the shift lever, and shows the
transmission oil temperature when
the ignition is on. If the gauge is
reading in the red area and/or a Voltmeter Gauge The vehicle's charging system
message appears in the Driver regulates voltage based on the state
Information Center (DIC), the of charge of the battery. It is normal
vehicle must be stopped and the for the voltmeter to fluctuate.
cause checked. One possible cause Readings between the low and high
is a low fluid level in the warning zones indicate the normal
transmission. operating range.
For information on the DIC Readings in the low warning zone
messages see Transmission can occur when a large number of
Messages on page 5‑42. electrical accessories are operating
Notice: If the vehicle is driven Metric in the vehicle and the engine is left
with the transmission idling for an extended period.
temperature gauge above the If there is a problem with the battery
normal operating range, the charging system, a message
transmission can be damaged. appears in the Driver Information
This could lead to costly repairs Center (DIC) and/or the charging
that would not be covered by the system light comes on. See Battery
vehicle warranty. Do not drive the Voltage and Charging Messages on
vehicle while the transmission page 5‑33 and Charging System
temperature gauge reading is Light on page 5‑17 for more
above normal. See your dealer for English information.
service. However, readings in either warning
For vehicles with this gauge, it is
near the shift lever, and shows the zone can indicate a possible
battery's state of charge in DC volts. problem in the electrical system.
Have the vehicle serviced as soon
When the engine is running, and the
as possible.
ignition is on, this gauge shows the
condition of the charging system.
Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt
Reminder Light warning light and chime may turn on
Driver Safety Belt Reminder if an object is put on the seat such
Light There is a passenger safety belt as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
reminder light near the passenger bag, laptop, or other electronic
There is a driver safety belt airbag status indicator. See device. To turn off the warning light
reminder light on the instrument Passenger Sensing System on and/or chime, remove the object
cluster. page 3‑24. from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light

This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag
system. The system check includes
When the vehicle is started, this When the vehicle is started, this the airbag sensor(s), passenger
light flashes and a chime may come light flashes and a chime may come sensing system, the pretensioners,
on to remind the driver to fasten on to remind passengers to fasten the airbag modules, the wiring, and
their safety belt. Then the light stays their safety belt. Then the light stays the crash sensing and diagnostic
on solid until the belt is buckled. on solid until the belt is buckled. module. For more information on the
This cycle may continue several This cycle continues several times if airbag system, see Airbag System
times if the driver remains or the passenger remains or becomes on page 3‑16.
becomes unbuckled while the unbuckled while the vehicle is
vehicle is moving. moving.
If the driver safety belt is buckled, If the passenger safety belt is
neither the chime nor the light buckled, neither the chime nor the
comes on. light comes on.
If there is a problem with the airbag

system, a Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on.
See Airbag System Messages on
page 5‑41.
The airbag readiness light comes on Passenger Airbag Status United States
for several seconds when the Indicator
vehicle is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed The vehicle has a passenger
immediately. sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑24 for
important safety information. The
{ WARNING overhead console has a passenger
airbag status indicator. Canada and Mexico
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or When the vehicle is started, the
comes on while driving, it means passenger airbag status indicator
the airbag system might not be will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
working properly. The airbags in for on and off, for several seconds
the vehicle might not inflate in a as a system check. If you are using
crash, or they could even inflate remote start, if equipped, to start
without a crash. To help avoid your vehicle from a distance, you
injury, have the vehicle serviced may not see the system check.
right away. Then, after several seconds, the
status indicator will light either ON
or OFF, or either the on or off
symbol, to let you know the status of a check to show the light is working.
the right front passenger frontal { WARNING It should go out when the engine is
airbag. started.
If the airbag readiness light ever
If the word ON or the on symbol is comes on and stays on, it means If the light stays on, or comes on
lit on the passenger airbag status that something may be wrong while driving, there may be a
indicator, it means that the right with the airbag system. To help problem with the electrical charging
front passenger frontal airbag is avoid injury to yourself or others, system. Have it checked by your
enabled (may inflate). have the vehicle serviced right dealer. Driving while this light is on
If the word OFF or the off symbol is could drain the battery.
away. See Airbag Readiness
lit on the passenger airbag status Light on page 5‑15 for more When this light comes on, the Driver
indicator, it means that the information, including important Information Center (DIC) also
passenger sensing system has safety information. displays a message.
turned off the right front passenger See Battery Voltage and Charging
frontal airbag. Messages on page 5‑33.
If, after several seconds, both status
Charging System Light
If a short distance must be driven
indicator lights remain on, or if there with the light on, be sure to turn off
are no lights at all, there may be a all accessories, such as the radio
problem with the lights or the and air conditioner.
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
The charging system light comes on A computer system called OBD II
briefly when the ignition is turned (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
on, but the engine is not running, as Generation) monitors the operation
of the vehicle to ensure emissions
are at acceptable levels, helping to
maintain a clean environment. The assists the service technician in Maintenance test. See
malfunction indicator lamp comes correctly diagnosing any Accessories and Modifications on
on when the vehicle is placed in malfunction. page 10‑3.
ON/RUN, as a check to show it is Notice: If the vehicle is This light comes on during a
working. If it does not, have the continually driven with this light malfunction in one of two ways:
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See on, the emission controls might
Ignition Positions on page 9‑17 for Light Flashing: A misfire condition
not work as well, the vehicle fuel has been detected. A misfire
more information. economy might not be as good, increases vehicle emissions and
and the engine might not run as could damage the emission control
smoothly. This could lead to system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
costly repairs that might not be and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to
Notice: Modifications made to the the vehicle:
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
vehicle or the replacement of the . Avoid hard accelerations.
comes on while the engine is
original tires with other than
running, this indicates that the OBD . Avoid steep uphill grades.
those of the same Tire
II system has detected a problem
Performance Criteria (TPC) can If the light continues to flash, find a
and diagnosis and service might be
affect the vehicle's emission safe place to stop and park the
required.
controls and can cause this light vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
Malfunctions often are indicated by to come on. Modifications to least 10 seconds, and restart the
the system before any problem is these systems could lead to engine. If the light is still flashing,
apparent. Being aware of the light costly repairs not covered by the follow the previous steps and see
can prevent more serious damage vehicle warranty. This could also your dealer for service as soon as
to the vehicle. This system also result in a failure to pass a possible.
required Emission Inspection/
Light On Steady: An emission or stumbling on acceleration.

control system malfunction has These conditions might go away
been detected on the vehicle. once the engine is warmed up.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
The following may correct an It may require at least one full tank
emission control system of the proper fuel to turn the light off. The DLC is under the instrument
malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on panel to the left of the steering
. Check that the fuel cap is fully page 9‑49. wheel. See your dealer if assistance
installed. See Filling the Tank on is needed.
If none of the above have made the
page 9‑52. The diagnostic light turn off, your dealer can check The vehicle may not pass
system can determine if the fuel the vehicle. The dealer has the inspection if:
cap has been left off or proper test equipment and
improperly installed. A loose or
. The malfunction indicator lamp is
diagnostic tools to fix any on with the engine running, or if
missing fuel cap allows fuel to mechanical or electrical problems
evaporate into the atmosphere. the light does not come on when
that might have developed. the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the Emissions Inspection and while the engine is off.
light off. Maintenance Programs . The OBD II (On-Board
. Check that good quality fuel is Diagnostics) system determines
Depending on where you live, your that critical emission control
used. Poor fuel quality causes vehicle may be required to
the engine not to run as systems have not been
participate in an emission control completely diagnosed. The
efficiently as designed and may system inspection and maintenance
cause stalling after start-up, vehicle would be considered not
program. For the inspection, the ready for inspection. This can
stalling when the vehicle is emission system test equipment will
changed into gear, misfiring, happen if the 12-volt battery has
likely connect to the vehicle's Data recently been replaced or run
hesitation on acceleration, Link Connector (DLC). down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical It could take longer to stop. If the

emission control systems during light is still on, have the vehicle
normal driving. This can take towed for service. See Antilock
several days of routine driving. Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
If this has been done and the on page 5‑21 and Towing the
vehicle still does not pass the Vehicle on page 10‑88.
inspection for lack of OBD II Metric English
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for If the vehicle has antilock brakes,
{ WARNING
inspection. this light should come on when the The brake system might not be
key is turned to START. If it does working properly if the brake
Brake System Warning not come on, have it fixed so it will system warning light is on.
be ready to warn if there is a
Light problem.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
The vehicle brake system consists When the ignition is on, the brake crash. If the light is still on after
of two hydraulic circuits. If one system warning light also comes on the vehicle has been pulled off
circuit is not working, the remaining when the parking brake is set. The the road and carefully stopped,
circuit can still work to stop the light stays on if the parking brake have the vehicle towed for
vehicle. For normal braking does not fully release. If it stays on
performance, both circuits need to service.
after the parking brake is fully
be working released, it means the vehicle has a
If the warning light comes on, there brake problem. The brake message remains on until
is a brake problem. Have the brake the MENU button is pressed. The
If, while driving, the light comes on brake light remains until the problem
system inspected right away. and a brake message comes on the is fixed. See Brake System
Driver Information Center (DIC), pull Messages on page 5‑34 for more
off the road and stop carefully. The information.
pedal could be harder to push or the
pedal can go closer to the floor.
Antilock Brake System If the ABS light is the only light on, This light comes on when the
the vehicle has regular brakes, but Traction Control System (TCS) has
(ABS) Warning Light the antilock brakes are not been turned off by pressing and
functioning. releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
If both the ABS and the brake button.
system warning light are on, the This light also comes on and the
vehicle's antilock brakes are not system turns off if there is a problem
functioning and there is a problem with the TCS.
with the regular brakes. See your If the light comes on and stays on
dealer for service. for an extended period of time while
This light comes on briefly when the
engine is started. See Brake System Warning Light on the system is turned on, the vehicle
page 5‑20 and Brake System needs service.
If the light does not come on, have it Messages on page 5‑34.
fixed so it will be ready to warn if See Traction Control System (TCS)
there is a problem. on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak®
Traction Off Light System on page 9‑38.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off.
If the light comes on while driving,
stop as soon as it is safely possible
and turn off the vehicle. Then start
the engine again to reset the
system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the This light should come on briefly as
vehicle needs service. A chime may the engine is started. If it does not
also sound when the light comes on come on, have the vehicle serviced
steady. by your dealer.
Traction Control System See Traction Control System (TCS) This light comes on when the
on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak® StabiliTrak system is turned off.
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light System on page 9‑38 for more If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
information. limited. If the StabiliTrak system is
off, the system does not assist in
Traction Control System controlling the vehicle. Turn on the
(TCS) OFF/StabiliTrak® TCS and the StabiliTrak system and
the warning light turns off.
OFF Light
For SS models, when both TCS and
StabiliTrak lights are on, the vehicle
The StabiliTrak system or the is in Competitive Mode. A warning
Traction Control System (TCS) also appears in the DIC for
indicator/warning light comes on StabiliTrak Competitive Mode. See
briefly while starting the engine. Ride Control System Messages on
If it does not, have the vehicle page 5‑38.
serviced by your dealer. If the For ZL1, when both TCS and
system is working normally, the This light should come on briefly as
the engine is started. If it does not StabiliTrak lights are on, the vehicle
indicator light will then go off. is in Performance Traction
come on, have the vehicle serviced
The indicator/warning light flashes by your dealer. Management or both TCS and
while the StabiliTrak or TCS system StabiliTrak systems are disabled.
is working to control the vehicle on See Traction Control System (TCS)
a low traction surface. on page 9‑37, StabiliTrak® System
If the TCS indicator/warning light on page 9‑38 and Competitive
comes on and stays on while Driving Mode on page 9‑39.
driving, the vehicle needs service.
Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and

Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle. The oil pressure light should come
See Tire Pressure Monitor on briefly as the engine is started.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Operation on page 10‑59. If it does not come on, have the
Monitor System (TPMS), this light vehicle serviced by your dealer.
comes on briefly when the engine is Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it
started. It provides information Notice: Lack of proper engine oil means that oil is not flowing through
about tire pressures and the TPMS. maintenance can damage the the engine properly. The vehicle
engine. Driving with the engine could be low on oil and might have
When the Light Is On Steady
oil low can also damage the some other system problem. See
This indicates that one or more of engine. The repairs would not be your dealer.
the tires are significantly covered by the vehicle warranty.
underinflated. Check the oil level as soon as
A Driver Information Center (DIC) possible. Add oil if required, but
tire pressure message may also if the oil level is within the
display. See Tire Messages on operating range and the oil
page 5‑41. Stop as soon as pressure light remains lit, have
possible, and inflate the tires to the the vehicle serviced. Always
pressure value shown on the Tire follow the maintenance schedule
and Loading Information label. See for changing engine oil.
Tire Pressure on page 10‑56.
Immobilizer Light High-Beam On Light Taillamp Indicator Light
The immobilizer light should come This light comes on when the This light comes on when the
on briefly as the engine is started. high-beam headlamps are in use. taillamps are in use.
If it does not come on, have the See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
vehicle serviced by your dealer. Changer on page 6‑2. Cruise Control Light
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
Front Fog Lamp Light
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the immobilizer
system. See Immobilizer Operation
on page 2‑11.
The cruise control light is white
when the cruise control is on and
The front fog lamp light comes on ready, and turns green when the
when the fog lamps are in use. cruise control is set and active.
The light goes out when the fog The light goes out when the cruise
lamps are turned off. See Front Fog control is turned off. See Cruise
Lamps on page 6‑5. Control on page 9‑44.
Information Displays The bottom of the DIC display Trip/Fuel Menu Items
shows what position the shift lever
Press the MENU button on the turn
is in (Automatic Transmission Only),
Driver Information the odometer, and the direction the
signal lever until Trip/Fuel
Center (DIC) Information Menu is displayed. Use
vehicle is driving.
the thumbwheel to scroll through the
The DIC displays information about DIC Buttons following menu items:
your vehicle. It also displays . Digital Speedometer
warning messages if a system
problem is detected. See Vehicle . Trip 1
Messages on page 5‑33. All . Trip 2
messages appear in the DIC display
in the center of the instrument
. Fuel Range
cluster. . Average Fuel Economy
The vehicle may also have features 1. SET/CLR: Use this button to set . Average Vehicle Speed
that can be customized through the or clear the menu item when it is
controls on the radio. See Vehicle displayed.
. Turn-by-Turn
Personalization on page 5‑43. . Blank
2. w / x (Thumbwheel): Use the
DIC Operation and Displays thumbwheel to scroll through the Digital Speedometer
The DIC has different displays items in each menu. The speedometer shows how fast
which can be accessed by using the 3. Menu: Press this button to get to the vehicle is moving in either
DIC buttons on the turn signal lever the Trip/Fuel Menu and the kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
on the left side of the steering Vehicle Information Menu. Some per hour (mph). The speedometer
wheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel, models may also have a cannot be reset.
vehicle system information, and Performance Menu.
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
Trip 1 and Trip 2 since the last time this menu item Vehicle Information Menu
The Trip display shows the current was reset. The fuel economy can be Items
distance traveled, in either reset by pressing the SET/CLR
button while the Average Fuel Press the MENU button on the turn
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since signal lever until Vehicle Information
the last reset for the trip odometer. Economy display is showing.
Menu is displayed. Use the
The trip odometer can be reset to Average Vehicle Speed thumbwheel to scroll through the
zero by pressing the trip reset stem following menu items:
or the SET/CLR button while the trip The Average Vehicle Speed display
odometer display is showing. shows the average speed of the . Unit
vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h) . Tire Pressure
Fuel Range or miles per hour (mph). This
average is calculated based on the . Remaining Oil Life
The Fuel Range display shows the
approximate distance the vehicle various vehicle speeds recorded . Coolant Temp
can be driven without refueling. The since the last reset of this value.
The average speed can be reset by
. Battery Voltage
fuel range estimate is based on an
average of the vehicle's fuel pressing the SET/CLR button while . Speed Warning
economy over recent driving history the Average Vehicle Speed display
is showing. Unit
and the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. Fuel range cannot be Turn-by-Turn Move the thumbwheel up or down to
reset. switch between US or Metric when
This display is used for the OnStar the Unit display is active. Press
Average Fuel Economy Turn-by-Turn guidance. See OnStar SET/CLR to confirm the setting.
The Average Fuel Economy display Overview on page 14‑1. This will change the displays on the
shows the approximate average Blank Display cluster and DIC to either English
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) (US) or metric measurements.
or miles per gallon (mpg). This This display shows no information.
number is calculated based on the
number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded
Tire Pressure Maintenance Schedule. See For example, the display may read
The display will show a vehicle with Maintenance Schedule on Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts. The
the approximate pressures of all page 11‑2. vehicle's charging system regulates
four tires. Tire pressure is displayed Remember, the Oil Life display must voltage based on the state of the
in either kilopascal (kPa) or in be reset after each oil change. It will battery. The battery voltage can
pounds per square inch (psi). See not reset itself. Also, be careful not fluctuate while viewing this
Tire Pressure Monitor System on to reset the Oil Life display information on the DIC. This is
page 10‑58 and Tire Pressure accidentally at any time other than normal. See Charging System Light
Monitor Operation on page 10‑59. when the oil has just been changed. on page 5‑17. If there is a problem
It cannot be reset accurately until with the battery charging system,
Remaining Oil Life the next oil change. To reset the the DIC will display a message. See
This display shows an estimate of engine oil life system press the Battery Voltage and Charging
the oil's remaining useful life. SET/CLR button while the Oil Life Messages on page 5‑33.
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is display is active. See Engine Oil Speed Warning
displayed, that means 99% of the Life System on page 10‑15.
current oil life remains. Speed Warning allows the driver to
Coolant Temperature set a speed that they do not want to
When the remaining oil life is low, exceed. To set the Speed Warning,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This display, available on some
vehicles, shows the temperature of press SET/CLR when Speed
message will appear on the display. Warning is displayed.
See Engine Oil Messages on the engine cooling system fluid in
page 5‑36. The oil should be either degrees Celsius (°C) or
changed as soon as possible. See degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
Engine Oil on page 10‑13. In Battery Voltage
addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional This display, available on some
maintenance is recommended in the vehicles, shows the current battery
voltage. If the voltage is in the
normal range, the value will display.
Performance Menu Coolant Temperature and Battery Head-Up Display (HUD)

Voltage
Some vehicles may have a
performance menu. Press the The coolant temperature display
shows the temperature of the
{ WARNING
MENU button on the turn signal
lever until Performance Menu is engine cooling system fluid in either If the HUD image is too bright or
displayed. Use the thumbwheel to degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees too high in your field of view, it
scroll through the following menu Fahrenheit (°F). may take you more time to see
items: The battery voltage display shows things you need to see when it is
. Lap Timer the current battery voltage. The dark outside. Be sure to keep the
vehicle's charging system regulates HUD image dim and placed low in
. Coolant Temperature and your field of view.
voltage based on the state of the
Battery Voltage
battery. The battery voltage can
Lap Timer fluctuate while viewing this For vehicles with the Head-Up
information on the DIC. This is Display (HUD), some information
The Lap Timer display shows total
normal. See Charging System Light concerning the operation of the
time, lap times, top speed, average
on page 5‑17. If there is a problem vehicle is projected onto the
speed, and average time when
with the battery charging system, windshield. This includes but is not
active.
the DIC will display a message. See limited to the speedometer reading,
While in this display, press SET/ Battery Voltage and Charging rpm reading, transmission position,
CLR to activate the lap timer Messages on page 5‑33. outside air temperature, compass
function. While timer is active, press heading, and a brief display of the
MENU to store the current lap time Compass
current radio station, including XM
and start timer for new lap. Press The vehicle may have a compass information or CD track. It will also
SET/CLR to pause or resume lap display in the Driver Information display turn-by-turn information if
timer. Press and hold SET/CLR to Center (DIC). See Compass on the vehicle has OnStar® service.
clear and exit the lap timer function. page 5‑4.
The images are projected through See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7 and The following indicator lights come
the HUD lens on the driver side of Driver Information Center (DIC) on on in the instrument cluster when
the instrument panel. page 5‑25. activated and may also appear on
Notice: If you try to use the HUD the HUD:
image as a parking aid, you may . Turn Signal Indicators
misjudge the distance and . High-Beam Indicator Symbol
damage your vehicle. Do not use
the HUD image as a parking aid. The HUD temporarily displays ICE
POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
The tap shift gear will also appear when this message is on the DIC
on the HUD if the vehicle has tap trip computer.
shift and it is active. The shift timing
lights and a lateral acceleration The HUD also temporarily displays
(G-Force) indicator appear on the following messages on vehicles
ZL1 models only. with these systems, when they are
active:
The HUD information can be HUD Display on the Vehicle
displayed in one of three languages: . Check Tire Pressure
Windshield
English, French, or Spanish. The . Cruise Set To
speedometer reading and other The HUD information appears as an
numerical values can be displayed image focused out toward the front
. Low Fuel
in either English or metric units. of the vehicle. . Speed Limited To
The language selection is changed When the ignition key is turned to . Traction Control Active
through the radio and the units of ON/RUN, the HUD will display an
measurement selection is changed introductory message for a short
. Stability Control Active
through the trip computer in the time, until the HUD is ready. When the HUD is on, the
Driver Information Center (DIC). speedometer reading is continually
displayed. The current radio station
or CD track number may display for
a short period of time after the radio To adjust the HUD image so that HUD. If vehicle messages are
or CD track status changes. This items are properly displayed: displayed, pressing PAGE may clear
may happen whenever radio 1. Adjust the driver seat to a the message.
information is changed. The comfortable position. The four formats are as follows:
speedometer size is reduced when
radio, CD information, or warnings 2. Start the engine.
are displayed on the HUD. 3. Adjust the HUD controls.
When the phone feature is Use the following settings to adjust
activated, the HUD will briefly the HUD.
display phone information,
if available. OFF: Turn the HUD dimming knob
fully counterclockwise until the HUD English
display turns off.
Brightness: Turn the dimming knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the display.
« (Up): or ª (Down): Press the
up or down arrows to center the
HUD image in your view. The HUD Metric
image can only be adjusted up and Format One: This display gives the
down, not side to side. speedometer reading (in English or
PAGE: Press to select the display metric units), turn signal indication,
formats. Release the PAGE button high-beam indication, transmission
when the format number with the positions (for automatic
The HUD control is to the right of desired display is shown on the transmission vehicles only), outside
the steering wheel. air temperature, and compass
heading.
English English English
Metric Metric Metric

Format Two: This display includes Format Three: This display Format Four: This display appears
the information in Format One includes the information in Format on ZL1 models only. It gives the
without the transmission One along with a circular speedometer reading (in English or
information, the outside air tachometer, but without outside air metric units), transmission positions
temperature, and compass heading. temperature and compass heading. (for automatic transmission vehicles
only), Shift Timing Light Position
and lateral acceleration (G)
indicators. The radio, CD,
navigation, and phone information
do not appear in the format four
HUD display.
The shift timing lights at the top of The HUD image can temporarily
the display will appear with increase light up depending on the angle and
in engine RPM. See Automatic position of the sunlight on the HUD
Transmission on page 9‑26 or display. This is normal and will
Manual Transmission on page 9‑32 change when the angle of the
for more information. sunlight on the HUD display
All formats except format four, will English changes.
show turn-by-turn navigation Polarized sunglasses could make
information and provide details the HUD image harder to see.
about the next driving maneuver to
be made. Care of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield
as needed to remove any dirt or film
that could reduce the sharpness or
Metric clarity of the HUD image.
When you near your destination, the To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,
HUD will display a distance bar that clean cloth that has household glass
will empty the closer you get to your cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the
destination. All navigation HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not
information is provided to the HUD spray cleaner directly on the lens
by the OnStar® service, for vehicles because the cleaner could leak into
with this feature. the unit.
The HUD image displayed on the
windshield will automatically dim If You Cannot See the HUD
and brighten to compensate for Image When the Ignition Is On
outside lighting. However, the HUD . Is anything covering the
brightness control can still be HUD lens?
adjusted as needed.

. Is the HUD dimmer setting bright
enough? Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and
. Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages
Is the HUD image adjusted to
the proper height? indicate the status of the vehicle or BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
some action that may be needed to
. Are you wearing polarized correct a condition. Multiple This message displays when the
sunglasses? messages may display one after the vehicle has detected that the battery
other. voltage is dropping beyond a
If the HUD Image Is Not Clear reasonable point. The battery saver
. Is the HUD image too bright? The messages that do not require system starts reducing features of
immediate action can be the vehicle that may be noticed. At
. Are the windshield and HUD acknowledged and cleared by the point that features are disabled,
lens clean? pressing SET/CLR. The messages this message displays. Turn off
If the HUD image is not correct, that require immediate action cannot unnecessary accessories to allow
contact your dealer. be cleared until that action is the battery to recharge.
performed. All messages should be
Keep in mind that the windshield is taken seriously and clearing the LOW BATTERY
part of the HUD system. messages does not correct the
This message is displayed when the
problem.
battery voltage is low. See Battery
The following are some of the on page 10‑33.
vehicle messages that may be
displayed depending on your SERVICE BATTERY
vehicle content. CHARGING SYSTEM
This message is displayed when
there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle to
Brake System Messages Compass Messages CLOSE TRUNK TO

OPERATE TOP
BRAKE FLUID LOW CAL
This message displays if the trunk is
This message is displayed when the This message is displayed when the open while you are trying to operate
brake fluid level is low; see Brake compass needs to be calibrated. the convertible top. Make sure the
Fluid on page 10‑32. See Compass on page 5‑4. trunk is closed before operating the
HILL START ASSIST ACTIVE –– convertible top. See Convertible Top
on page 2‑17.
This message is displayed when Hill Dashes will be displayed if the
Start Assist (HSA) is preventing the compass needs service. See your COMPLETE TOP MOTION TO
vehicle from rolling while driving off dealer for service. OPEN TRUNK
on a grade. See Hill Start Assist This message displays if attempting
(HSA) on page 9‑36. Convertible Top to open the trunk before the top has
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE Messages been fully opened or closed.
This message is displayed as a BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW REDUCE VEHICLE SPEED TO
reminder that the parking brake is – TOP DISABLED OPERATE TOP
on. Release it before you attempt to This message is displayed when the
drive. This message displays when the
battery voltage is too low to operate vehicle is moving too fast to safely
the convertible top. operate the convertible top. Reduce
the vehicle speed.
EXTEND CARGO SHADE TO
OPERATE TEMPERATURE TOO LOW –
TOP DISABLED
This message displays if the rear
trunk partition is not extended and This message displays and a sound
engaged. will be heard when the power
convertible top button is pressed
and the power convertible top pump UNLATCH TOP PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
motor temperature is below 0°C
This message displays and a sound This message will display when the
(32°F). Wait for the power
will be heard if you try to lower the passenger door is open. Close the
convertible top pump motor to warm
convertible top without first door completely.
up before using the power
releasing the front latch. See
convertible top. TRUNK OPEN
Convertible Top on page 2‑17.
TOP NOT SECURE This message will display when the
This message displays when the Cruise Control Messages trunk is open. Close the trunk
completely.
power convertible top is closed CRUISE SET TO XXX
without the convertible top front
latch engaged or when the folding This message displays when the Engine Cooling System
top is not fully stowed. Press and cruise control is set and shows the Messages
hold the convertible top button in the speed it was set to. See Cruise
open direction until a beep is heard Control on page 9‑44. A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
or close the top and engage the ENGINE TEMP
latch. Door Ajar Messages This message displays when the
TOP SYSTEM OVERHEATED, DRIVER DOOR OPEN engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
PLEASE WAIT This message will display when the To avoid added strain on a hot
This message displays and a sound driver door is open. Close the door engine, the air conditioning
will be heard when the power completely. compressor automatically turns off.
convertible top button is pressed When the coolant temperature
HOOD OPEN
and the power convertible top pump returns to normal, the air
motor is overheated. Wait for the This message will display when the conditioning compressor turns back
power convertible top pump motor hood is open. Close the hood on. You can continue to drive the
to cool down before using the power completely. vehicle.
convertible top.
If this message continues to appear, severe damage. This message before filling to the recommended
have the system repaired by your clears when the engine has cooled level. If the oil is not low and this
dealer as soon as possible to avoid to a safe operating temperature. message remains on, take the
damage to the engine. vehicle to your dealer for service.
COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADD
Engine Oil Messages See Engine Oil on page 10‑13.
COOLANT CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP
This message will display if the ENGINE
This message displays when the
coolant is low. See Engine Coolant engine oil needs to be changed. This message displays if low oil
on page 10‑23. When you change the engine oil, be pressure levels occur. Stop the
sure to reset the Oil Life System. vehicle as soon as safely possible
ENGINE OVERHEATED — See Engine Oil Life System on and do not operate it until the cause
IDLE ENGINE page 10‑15, Driver Information of the low oil pressure has been
This message displays when the Center (DIC) on page 5‑25, Engine corrected. Check the oil as soon as
engine coolant temperature is too Oil on page 10‑13, and Maintenance possible and have the vehicle
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to Schedule on page 11‑2. serviced by your dealer.
idle until it cools down.
ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE Engine Power Messages
ENGINE OVERHEATED — ENGINE
STOP ENGINE This message displays when the
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a engine oil temperature is too hot. This message displays when the
continuous chime sounds if the Stop and allow the vehicle to idle vehicle's engine power is reduced.
engine cooling system reaches until it cools down. Reduced engine power can affect
unsafe temperatures for operation. the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
Stop and turn off the vehicle as ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL If this message is on, but there is no
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid On some vehicles, this message reduction in performance, proceed
displays when the engine oil level to your destination. The
may be too low. Check the oil level performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The Key and Lock Messages AUTOMATIC LIGHT
vehicle may be driven at a reduced CONTROL OFF
speed while this message is on, but NUMBER OF KEYS
maximum acceleration and speed PROGRAMMED This message is displayed when the
may be reduced. Anytime this automatic light control has been
This message displays when turned off. See Automatic Headlamp
message stays on, the vehicle
programming new keys to the System on page 6‑3.
should be taken to your dealer for
vehicle.
service as soon as possible. LEFT FRONT TURN
REPLACE BATTERY IN INDICATOR FAILURE
Fuel System Messages REMOTE KEY
This message is displayed if the
FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays when the turn signal bulb needs to be
battery in the Remote Keyless Entry replaced. See Headlamps, Front
This message displays when the (RKE) transmitter needs to be Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as replaced. (Uplevel Vehicle) on page 10‑38 or
soon as possible
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and
TIGHTEN GAS CAP Lamp Messages Parking Lamps (Base Vehicle) on
page 10‑37 and Replacement Bulbs
This message displays when the AUTOMATIC LIGHT on page 10‑41.
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the CONTROL ON
fuel cap. LEFT REAR TURN INDICATOR
This message is displayed when the
FAILURE
automatic light control has been
turned on. See Automatic Headlamp This message is displayed if the
System on page 6‑3. turn signal bulb needs to be
replaced. See Bulb Replacement on
page 10‑37.
RIGHT FRONT TURN Object Detection System Ride Control System

INDICATOR FAILURE Messages Messages
This message is displayed if the
turn signal bulb needs to be PARK ASSIST OFF PERF TRACTION 1 – WET
replaced. See Headlamps, Front This message displays when the ACTIVE HANDLING ON
Turn Signal and Parking Lamps park assist system has been turned SUSPENSION MODE TOUR
(Uplevel Vehicle) on page 10‑38 or off or when there is a temporary (ZL1 Only)
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and condition causing the system to be This message displays when this
Parking Lamps (Base Vehicle) on disabled. See Ultrasonic Parking Performance Traction Management
page 10‑37 and Replacement Bulbs Assist on page 9‑46. mode is selected. The TCS and
on page 10‑41. StabiliTrak OFF cluster lights will
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
RIGHT REAR TURN also be on when this mode is
This message displays if there is a selected. Once this message is
INDICATOR FAILURE problem with the Ultrasonic Rear acknowledged, PTM1 – WET ESC =
This message is displayed if the Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do ON displays on the bottom of the
turn signal bulb needs to be not use this system to help you digital speed page. Launch Control
replaced. See Bulb Replacement on park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist is available when this mode is
page 10‑37. on page 9‑46. selected. In this mode, the Traction
TURN SIGNAL ON Control and Active Handling System
are available but intended for use
This message is displayed if the on wet race track conditions. Adjust
turn signal has been left on. Turn off your driving accordingly. See
the turn signal. “Performance Traction Management
(PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “Launch
Control (V8 with Manual
Transmissions Only)” under
Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑39.
PERF TRACTION 2 – DRY PERF TRACTION 3 – SPORT1 PERF TRACTION 4 – SPORT2

ACTIVE HANDLING ON ACTIVE HANDLING ON ACTIVE HANDLING OFF
SUSPENSION MODE TOUR SUSPENSION MODE SPORT SUSPENSION MODE SPORT
(ZL1 Only) (ZL1 Only) (ZL1 Only)
This message displays when this This message displays when this This message displays when this
Performance Traction Management Performance Traction Management Performance Traction Management
mode is selected. The TCS and mode is selected. The TCS and mode is selected. The TCS and
StabiliTrak OFF cluster lights will StabiliTrak OFF cluster lights will StabiliTrak OFF cluster lights will
also be on when this mode is also be on when this mode is also be on when this mode is
selected. Once this message is selected. Once this message is selected. Once this message is
acknowledged, PTM2 – DRY ESC = acknowledged, PTM3 – SPORT1 acknowledged, PTM4 – SPORT2
ON displays on the bottom of the ESC = ON displays on the bottom of ESC = OFF displays on the bottom
digital speed page. Launch Control the digital speed page. Launch of the digital speed page. Launch
is available when this mode is Control is available when this mode Control is available when this mode
selected. In this mode, the Traction is selected. In this mode, the is selected. In this mode, the
Control and Active Handling System Traction Control and Active Traction Control is available but
are available but intended for use Handling System are available but intended for use on dry race track
on dry race track conditions. Adjust intended for use on dry race track conditions. The Active Handling
your driving accordingly. See conditions. Adjust your driving System is disabled when this mode
“Performance Traction Management accordingly. See “Performance is selected. This mode will require
(PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “Launch Traction Management (PTM) (ZL1 more driver skill than modes 1–3.
Control (V8 with Manual Only)” and “Launch Control (V8 with Adjust your driving accordingly. See
Transmissions Only)” under Manual Transmissions Only)” under “Performance Traction Management
Competitive Driving Mode on Competitive Driving Mode on (PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “Launch
page 9‑39. page 9‑39. Control (V8 with Manual
Transmissions Only)” under
Competitive Driving Mode on
page 9‑39.
PERF TRACTION 5 – RACE SERVICE STABILITRAK on page 9‑43 and “SPEED LIMITED
ACTIVE HANDLING OFF TO XXX (ZL1 Only)” under Vehicle
This message displays if there is a
SUSPENSION MODE TRACK Speed Messages on page 5‑42.
problem with the StabiliTrak®
(ZL1 Only) system. If this message appears, try SERVICE TRACTION
This message displays when this to reset the system. Stop; turn off CONTROL
Performance Traction Management the engine and remove the key from
the ignition; open and close the This message displays when there
mode is selected. The TCS and is a problem with the Traction
StabiliTrak OFF cluster lights will driver door and wait for at least
one minute. During this time you Control System (TCS). When this
also be on when this mode is message is displayed, the system
selected. Once this message is should notice the lights on the
cluster turn off. After a minute has will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
acknowledged, PTM5 – RACE ESC driving accordingly. See your dealer
= OFF displays on the bottom of the passed, start the engine again.
If this message still comes on, it for service.
digital speed page. Launch Control
is available when this mode is means there is a problem. See your STABILITRAK COMPETITIVE
selected. In this mode, the Traction dealer for service. The vehicle is MODE (LS3 and L99 Only)
Control is available but intended for safe to drive; however, you do not
use on dry race track conditions. have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so This message displays when
The Active Handling System is reduce your speed and drive Competitive Mode is selected. See
disabled when this mode is accordingly. “Competitive Driving Mode (Non
selected. This mode will require ZL1)” under Competitive Driving
SERVICE SUSPENSION Mode on page 9‑39.
more driver skill than modes 1–4. SYSTEM (ZL1 Only)
Adjust your driving accordingly. See TRACTION CONTROL OFF
“Performance Traction Management This message displays when the
(PTM) (ZL1 Only)” and “Launch Selective Ride Control system has This message displays when the
Control (V8 with Manual detected a malfunction and the traction control system has been
Transmissions Only)” under vehicle speed will be limited. The disabled. See Traction Control
Competitive Driving Mode on system must be serviced. See your System (TCS) on page 9‑37.
page 9‑39. dealer. See Selective Ride Control
Airbag System Messages SERVICE POWER STEERING If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
SERVICE AIRBAG This message is displayed if there is
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
a problem with the power steering
This message displays if there is a until the tire pressure is equal to the
system and a chime may sound.
problem with the airbag system. values shown on the Tire and
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
Take the vehicle to your dealer for Loading Information label. See Tires
service.
service. on page 10‑49, Vehicle Load Limits
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON on page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑56.
Security Messages This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the vehicle. Take the The DIC also shows the tire
THEFT ATTEMPTED vehicle to your dealer for service. pressure values. See Driver
This message displays if the vehicle Information Center (DIC) on
detects a tamper condition. Tire Messages page 5‑25.
CHECK XXX TIRE PRESSURE SERVICE TIRE MONITOR

Service Vehicle Messages SYSTEM
or TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD
SERVICE AC SYSTEM AIR TO TIRE This message displays if there is a
This message is displayed if there is problem with the Tire Pressure
This message displays if the vehicle
a problem with the air conditioning Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
detects low pressure in one or more
system. Take the vehicle to your Pressure Monitor Operation on
tires.
dealer for service. page 10‑59.
This message also displays LEFT
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate This message displays when the
the location of the low tire. system is learning new tires. See
The low tire pressure warning light Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
will also come on. See Tire page 10‑59.
Pressure Light on page 5‑23.
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM SHIFT DENIED Vehicle Reminder

RESET This message displays when Messages
This message displays when attempting to use the automatic
resetting the TPMS. See Tire transmission manual mode to shift ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
Pressure Monitor Operation on to too low of a gear. See Manual WITH CARE
page 10‑59. Mode on page 9‑29. This message is displayed when ice
SHIFT TO PARK conditions are possible.
Transmission Messages
This message displays when the TURN WIPER CONTROL TO
1 – 4 SHIFT transmission needs to be shifted to INTERMITTENT FIRST
This message displays when you P (Park). This may appear when This message is displayed when
can only shift from 1 (First) to attempting to remove the key from attempting to adjust the intermittent
4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to the ignition if the vehicle is not in wiper speed without intermittent
2 (Second). See Manual P (Park). selected on the wiper control. See
Transmission on page 9‑32. TRANSMISSION HOT – IDLE Windshield Wiper/Washer on
ENGINE page 5‑3.
PRESS CLUTCH TO START
This message displays when This message displays and a chime Vehicle Speed Messages
attempting to start a vehicle with a sounds if the transmission fluid in
manual transmission without the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the DRIVER SELECTED SPEED
pressing on the clutch pedal. transmission fluid temperature high LIMIT EXCEEDED
can cause damage to the vehicle.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION Stop the vehicle and let it idle to This message is displayed when the
allow the transmission to cool. This vehicle speed is greater than the set
This message displays if there is a speed. See “Speed Warning” under
problem with the transmission. See message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level. Driver Information Center (DIC) on
your dealer. page 5‑25.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX Vehicle 3. Press the center of the MENU/

(ZL1 Only) SELECT knob to select the
Personalization Vehicle Settings menu.
This message displays when a
malfunction is present in the The audio system controls are used The following list of menu items will
Selective Ride Control system. The to access the personalization be available:
vehicle speed will be limited to a menus for customizing vehicle . Climate and Air Quality
value determined by the vehicle features.
when the shock absorber system
. Comfort and Convenience
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to
has failed and the shocks are in access the Configuration . Collision/Detection Systems
their full soft mode. Have the vehicle Settings Menu. . Language
serviced by your dealer as soon as
possible. MENU/SELECT Knob: Press the . Lighting
center of this knob to enter the
menus and select menu items. Turn
. Power Door Locks
Window Messages the knob to scroll through the . Remote Lock/Unlock
OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVER/ menus. . Return to Factory Settings
PASSENGER WINDOW / BACK: Press to exit or move
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
This message is displayed when the backward in a menu.
highlight the menu. Press the knob
window needs to be reprogrammed. Entering the Personalization to select it. Each of the menus is
If the vehicle's battery has been Menus detailed in the following information.
recharged or disconnected, you will
need to reprogram each front 1. Press the CONFIG button to Climate and Air Quality
window for the express-up feature to access the Configuration
Settings menu. Select the Climate and Air Quality
work. See Power Windows on menu and the following will be
page 2‑14. 2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to displayed:
highlight Vehicle Settings. . Remote Start Heated Seats
Remote Start Heated Seats Collision/Detection Systems

. Dutch
When on, this feature will turn the Select the Collision/Detection
. Polish
heated seats on when using remote Systems menu and the following will . Danish
start on cold days. be displayed: . Portuguese (Europe)
Press the MENU/SELECT knob . Park Assist
when Remote Start Heated Seats is
. Norwegian
highlighted. Turn the knob to select Park Assist . Finnish
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm This allows the Ultrasonic Parking . Turkish
and go back to the last menu. Assist feature to be turned on or off.
. Arabic
Comfort and Convenience Press the MENU/SELECT knob
when Park Assist is highlighted. . Russian
Select the Comfort and Turn the knob to select On or Off.
Convenience menu and the
. Portuguese (Brazil)
Press the knob to confirm and go
following will be displayed: back to the last menu. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
. Chime Volume select the language. Press the knob
Language to confirm and go back to the
Chime Volume last menu.
Select the Language menu and the
This allows the selection of the following will be displayed: Lighting
chime volume level. . UK English Select the Lighting menu and the
Press the MENU/SELECT knob following will be displayed:
. Spanish
when Chime Volume is highlighted.
Turn the knob to select Normal or . French . Exit Lighting
High. Press the knob to confirm and . German . Vehicle Locator Lights
go back to the last menu.
. Italian
. Swedish
Exit Lighting Power Door Locks Press the MENU/SELECT knob

This allows the selection of how when Auto Door Unlock is
Select Power Door Locks and the
long the exterior lamps stay on highlighted. Turn the knob to select
following will be displayed:
when leaving the vehicle when it is All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Press
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out the knob to confirm and go back to
dark outside.
. Auto Door Unlock the last menu.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob
when Exit Lighting is highlighted. . Delayed Door Lock Delayed Door Lock
Turn the knob to select Off, When on, this feature will delay the
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes. locking of the doors. To override the
Press the knob to confirm and go When on, this feature will keep the delay, press the power door lock on
back to the last menu. driver door from locking when the the instrument panel.
door is open. If Off is selected, the
Vehicle Locator Lights Delayed Door Lock menu will be Press the MENU/SELECT knob
This allows the vehicle locator lights available. when Delayed Door Lock is
to be turned on or off. highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Press the MENU/SELECT knob On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
Press the MENU/SELECT knob when Auto Door Unlock is and go back to the last menu.
when Vehicle Locator Lights is highlighted. Turn the knob to select
highlighted. Turn the knob to select On or Off. Press the knob to confirm Remote Lock/Unlock
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm and go back to the last menu. Select Remote Lock/Unlock and the
and go back to the last menu. following may be displayed:
Auto Door Unlock
This allows selection of which of the
. Unlock Feedback (Lights)
doors will automatically unlock when . Locking Feedback
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or when
. Door Unlock Options
the key is removed from the ignition
(manual transmission).
Unlock Feedback (Lights) Door Unlock Options Universal Remote

When on, the exterior lamps will This allows selection of which doors
flash when unlocking the vehicle will unlock when pressing the unlock
System
with the RKE transmitter. button on the RKE transmitter. See Radio Frequency Statement on
Press the MENU/SELECT knob Press the MENU/SELECT knob page 13‑21 for information
when Unlock Feedback (Lights) is when Door Unlock Options is regarding Part 15 of the Federal
highlighted. Turn the knob to select highlighted. Turn the knob to select Communications Commission (FCC)
Flash Lights or Off. Press the knob All Doors or Driver Door Only. Press rules and Industry Canada
to confirm and go back to the the knob to confirm and go back to Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
last menu. the last menu.
Locking Feedback Return to Factory Settings Programming
This allows selection of what type of Select Return to Factory Settings to
feedback is given when unlocking return all of the vehicle
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. personalization to the default
Press the MENU/SELECT knob settings. Turn the knob to select Yes
when Locking Feedback is or No. Press the knob to confirm
highlighted. Turn the knob to select and go back to the last menu.
Lights and Horn, Lights Only, Horn
Only, or Off. Press the knob to If the vehicle has this feature, you
confirm and go back to the will see these buttons with one
last menu. indicator light below them in the
overhead console.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices:
openers, security systems, and park outside of the garage. Park 1. Hold the end of the hand-held
home automation devices. directly in line with and facing the transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to
Do not use the Universal Remote garage door opener motor-head or 3 in) away from the Universal
system with any garage door opener gate motor-head. Be sure that Remote system buttons while
that does not have the stop and people and objects are clear of the keeping the indicator light in
reverse feature. This includes any garage door or gate being view. The hand-held transmitter
garage door opener model programmed. was supplied by the
manufactured before April 1,1982. It is recommended that a new manufacturer of the garage door
Read the instructions completely battery be installed in the hand-held opener receiver
before attempting to program the transmitter for quicker and more (motor-head unit).
Universal Remote system. Because accurate transmission of the 2. At the same time, press and
of the steps involved, it may be radio-frequency signal. hold both the hand-held
helpful to have another person Programming the Universal transmitter button and one of the
available to assist with programming Remote System three Universal Remote system
the Universal Remote system. buttons to be used to operate
For questions or help programming the garage door. Do not release
Keep the original hand-held the Universal Remote system, call
transmitter for use in other vehicles the Universal Remote system
1-800-355-3515 or go to button or the hand-held
as well as for future Universal www.homelink.com.
Remote system programming. It is transmitter button until the
also recommended that upon the Programming a garage door opener indicator light changes from a
sale of the vehicle, the programmed involves time-sensitive actions, so slowly to a rapidly flashing light.
Universal Remote system buttons read the entire procedure before You now may release both
be erased for security purposes. starting. Otherwise, the device will buttons.
See “Erasing Universal Remote time out and the procedure will have Some entry gates and garage
System Buttons” later in this to be repeated. door openers may require
section. substitution of Step 2 with the
procedure noted in “Gate

. If the Universal Remote 5. Firmly press and release the
Operator and Canadian system indicator light blinks “Learn” or “Smart” button. After
Programming” later in this rapidly for two seconds, pressing this button, you will
section. then turns to a constant have 30 seconds to complete
light and the garage door Step 6.
3. Press and hold for five seconds does not move, continue
the newly trained Universal with programming 6. Immediately return to the
Remote system button (the Steps 4–6. vehicle. Firmly press and hold
button selected in Step 2) while for two seconds the Universal
observing the indicator light and It may be helpful to have Remote system button, selected
garage door activation. another person assist with in Step 2 to control the garage
the remaining Steps 4–6. door, and then release it. If the
. If the indicator light stays on
continuously or the garage garage door does not move or
door starts to move when the lamp on the garage door
the Universal Remote opener receiver (motor-head
system button is pressed unit) does not flash, press and
and released, then the hold the same button a second
programming is complete. time for two seconds, then
There is no need to release it. Again, if the door
continue programming does not move or the garage
Steps 4–6. door lamp does not flash, press
“Learn” or “Smart” Button and hold the same button a third
time for two seconds, then
4. After Steps 1–3 have been
release.
completed, locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button inside the garage The Universal Remote system
on the garage door opener should now activate the
receiver (motor-head unit). The garage door.
name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
To program the remaining two If you live in Canada, or you are Universal Remote System
Universal Remote system buttons, having difficulty programming a gate
begin with Step 1 of “Programming operator or garage door opener by
Operation
the Universal Remote System.” using the “Programming the Using the Universal Remote
Universal Remote System” System
Gate Operator and Canadian procedures, regardless of where
Programming you live, replace Step 2 under Press and hold the appropriate
If you have questions or need help “Programming the Universal Remote Universal Remote system button for
programming the Universal Remote System” with the following: at least half of a second. The
system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go indicator light will come on while the
Continue to press and hold the signal is being transmitted.
to www.homelink.com. Universal Remote system button
Canadian radio-frequency laws while you press and release every Erasing Universal Remote
require transmitter signals to time two seconds (cycle) the hand-held System Buttons
out or quit after several seconds of transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been All programmed buttons should be
transmission. This may not be long erased when the vehicle is sold or
enough for the Universal Remote successfully accepted by the
Universal Remote system. The the lease ends.
system to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S. Universal Remote system indicator To erase all programmed buttons on
gate operators are manufactured to light will flash slowly at first and then the Universal Remote system
time out in the same manner. rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under device:
“Programming the Universal Remote 1. Press and hold down the two
System” to complete. outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash.
This should take about
10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single
Button
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Remote system buttons:
1. Press and hold the desired
Universal Remote system
button. Do not release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, proceed
with Step 1 under “Programming
the Universal Remote System.”
If you have questions or need help
programming the Universal Remote
system, call 1-800-355-3515 or go
to www.homelink.com. You may
also call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer
Assistance Offices (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑5 or Customer
Assistance Offices (Mexico) on
page 13‑5.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic): Turns the

headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the
Exterior Lamp Controls following:
Exterior Lighting
. Parking Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam . Taillamps
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 . Sidemarker Lamps
Daytime Running . License Plate Lamps
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic Headlamp
. Instrument Panel Lights
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 AUTO also controls the Daytime
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 Running Lamps (DRL). See
Turn and Lane-Change Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on
The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 page 6‑2.
instrument panel, on the outboard
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
side of the steering wheel. ; (Parking Lamps): Turns the
Interior Lighting There are four positions: parking lamps on together with the
Instrument Panel Illumination following:
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 P (Off): Briefly turn to this position
to turn the automatic light control off
. Taillamps
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
or on again. When released, the . Sidemarker Lamps
Lighting Features control returns to the AUTO
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
. License Plate Lamps
position.
Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 . Instrument Panel Lights
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
6-2 Lighting
A warning chime sounds if the driver

. Instrument Panel Lights To flash the high beams, pull the
door is opened when the ignition See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. turn signal lever all the way toward
switch is off and the parking lamps you, then release it.
are on. Headlamp High/
5 (Headlamps): Turns the Low-Beam Changer Daytime Running
headlamps on together with the Lamps (DRL)
lamps listed below. Push the turn signal lever away
from you and release to turn the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
. Parking Lamps high beams on. To return to low make it easier for others to see the
. Taillamps beams, push the lever again or pull front of your vehicle during the day.
it toward you and release. Fully functional Daytime Running
. Sidemarker Lamps Lamps are required on all vehicles
. License Plate Lamps first sold in Canada.
. Instrument Panel Lights A light sensor on top of the
instrument panel makes the DRL
A warning chime sounds if the driver work, so be sure it is not covered.
door is opened when the ignition
switch is off and the headlamps The DRL system will make the
are on. low-beam headlamps come on at a
This indicator light turns on in the reduced brightness or for vehicles
# (Front Fog Lamps): Turns the instrument cluster when the with High Intensity Discharge (HID)
fog lamps on or off. The fog lamps high-beam headlamps are on. headlamps, the dedicated DRL
come on together with the following: lights will come on when the
. Parking Lamps Flash-to-Pass following conditions are met:
. Taillamps The flash-to-pass feature works with . The ignition is in the ON/RUN
the low beams or Daytime Running position.
. Sidemarker Lamps
Lamps (DRL) on or off.
. License Plate Lamps
Lighting 6-3
. The exterior lamps control is in
AUTO, or has been briefly
Automatic Headlamp
turned to P to turn the System
automatic light control on again. When it is dark enough outside and
. The engine is running. the headlamp switch is in AUTO,
the automatic headlamp system will
When the DRL are on, the turn on the headlamps at the normal
headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker brightness along with other lamps
lamps, instrument panel lights, and such as the taillamps, sidemarker
other lamps will not be on. lamps, parking lamps, license plate The vehicle has a light sensor on
The headlamps automatically lamps, and the instrument panel the top of the instrument panel. Do
change from DRL to the regular lights. The radio lights will also not cover this sensor or the system
headlamps depending on the be dim. will come on whenever the ignition
darkness of the surroundings. The To turn off the automatic headlamp is on.
other lamps that come on with the system, turn the exterior lamps The system may also turn on the
headlamps will also come on. switch to the P position and then headlamps when driving through a
When it is bright enough outside, release. For vehicles first sold in parking garage, heavy overcast
the headlamps will go off and the Canada, the transmission must be weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
DRL will come on. in the P (Park) position, before the There is a delay in the transition
To turn the DRL off or on again, turn automatic headlamp system can be between the daytime and nighttime
turned off. operation of the Daytime Running
the exterior lamps control to the P
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
position and then release. For
headlamp system so that driving
vehicles first sold in Canada, the
under bridges or bright overhead
DRL cannot be turned off.
street lights does not affect the
The regular headlamp system system. The DRL and automatic
should be turned on when needed. headlamp system will only be
6-4 Lighting
affected when the light sensor sees not operating, these lamps turn off. Turn and Lane-Change
a change in lighting lasting longer Move the exterior lamp control to P
than the delay.
Signals
or ; to disable this feature.
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp Hazard Warning Flashers
system comes on immediately. If it
is light outside when the vehicle
leaves the garage, there will be a
slight delay before the automatic
headlamp system changes to the
DRL. During that delay, the
instrument cluster may not be as
bright as usual. Make sure the Move the lever all the way up or
instrument panel brightness control down to signal a turn.
is in the full bright position. See
Instrument Panel Illumination An arrow on the instrument cluster
Control on page 6‑5. flashes in the direction of the turn or
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): lane change.
Lights On with Wipers Press this button to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on Raise or lower the lever until the
If the windshield wipers are and off. This warns others that you arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
activated in daylight with the engine are having trouble. Press again to change. Hold it there until the lane
on, and the exterior lamp control is turn the flashers off. change is completed. If the lever is
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking briefly pressed and released, the
lamps, and other exterior lamps turn signal flashes three times.
come on. The transition time for the
lamps coming on varies based on The lever returns to its starting
wiper speed. When the wipers are position whenever it is released.
Lighting 6-5
If after signaling a turn or lane # (Front Fog Lamps): Press to Interior Lighting
change the arrow flashes rapidly or turn the fog lamps on or off. An
does not come on, a signal bulb indicator light on the instrument
may be burned out. cluster comes on when the fog
Instrument Panel
Have any burned out bulbs lamps are on. Illumination Control
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out, The fog lamps come on together
check the fuse. See Electrical with the parking and sidemarker
System Overload on page 10‑41. lamps.
If the high-beam headlamps are
Front Fog Lamps turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
If the high-beam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn
back on again.
For vehicles with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps, the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
replace the fog lamps.
Some localities have laws that This feature controls the brightness
require the headlamps to be on of the instrument panel lights.
For vehicles with front fog lamps, along with the fog lamps.
the button is on the exterior lamp
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Move the
control, on the outboard side of the
thumbwheel up or down and hold, to
steering wheel.
brighten or dim the instrument panel
The ignition must be turned to ON/ lights.
RUN to turn on the fog lamps.
6-6 Lighting
Dome Lamps Lighting Features Battery Load

Management
Entry Lighting The vehicle has Electric Power
The lamps inside the vehicle come Management (EPM) that estimates
on when any door is opened. They the battery's temperature and state
stay on for about 20 seconds. When of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
all of the doors have been closed or for best performance and extended
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, life of the battery.
they gradually fade out. They also When the battery's state of charge
come on when K is pressed on the is low, the voltage is raised slightly
The dome lamp buttons are Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) to quickly bring the charge back up.
overhead near the rearview mirror. system transmitter. When the state of charge is high,
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on the voltage is lowered slightly to
To change the settings, press the
for about 20 seconds after the key is prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
following:
removed from the ignition to provide has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
( (Off): Turns the lamp off, even
light as you exit. display on the Driver Information
when a door is open. Center (DIC), you may see the
H (Door): Turns the lamp on voltage move up or down. This is
Theater Dimming normal. If there is a problem, an
automatically when a door is
opened. This feature allows for a three to five alert will be displayed.
second fade out of the courtesy The battery can be discharged at
' (On): Turns the lamp on. lamps instead of having them turn idle if the electrical loads are very
off immediately. high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
Lighting 6-7
enough at idle to produce all of the Normally, these actions occur in Battery Power Protection
power needed for very high steps or levels, without being
electrical loads. noticeable. In rare cases at the This feature shuts off the dome
highest levels of corrective action, lamp if it is left on for more than
A high electrical load occurs when 10 minutes when the ignition is in
several of the following are on, such this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a DIC message might LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent
as: headlamps, high beams, fog the battery from running down.
lamps, rear window defogger, be displayed, and it is
climate control fan at high speed, recommended that the driver reduce
heated seats, engine cooling fans, the electrical loads as much as
trailer loads, and loads plugged into possible. See Battery Voltage and
accessory power outlets. Charging Messages on page 5‑33.
EPM works to prevent excessive

discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1

. Set up the tone, speaker
Infotainment Introduction adjustments, and preset radio
System Infotainment
stations.
See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.
Read the following pages to
Notice: Contact your dealer
Introduction become familiar with the
before adding any equipment.
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 infotainment system features.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Adding audio or communication
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
{ WARNING equipment could interfere with
the operation of the engine, radio,
Taking your eyes off the road for or other systems, and could
Radio extended periods could cause a damage them. Follow federal
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 crash resulting in injury or death rules covering mobile radio and
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 telephone equipment.
to you or others. Do not give
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 extended attention to infotainment The vehicle has Retained
Diversity Antenna System . . . 7-13 tasks while driving. Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13 the infotainment system can play
even after the ignition is turned off.
This system provides access to
Audio Players See Retained Accessory Power
many audio and non-audio listings.
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 (RAP) on page 9‑21.
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 To minimize taking your eyes off the
The vehicle may have a base radio
road while driving, do the following
Phone that is included in this manual. See
while the vehicle is parked:
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-20 the separate infotainment manual
Bluetooth (Infotainment
. Become familiar with the for information on the connective
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 operation and controls of the radio and navigation system, audio
Bluetooth (Voice audio system. players, phone, and voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 recognition. There is also
7-2 Infotainment System
information on settings and Overview

downloadable applications (if
equipped).
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The theft-deterrent feature works by
learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to the
infotainment system. The
infotainment system does not
operate if it is stolen or moved to a
different vehicle.
1. VOL/ O 2. INFO
. Press: Turns the system on
. Radio: Shows available
or off. information about the
current station.
. Turn: Adjusts the volume.
. CD/MP3: Shows available
information about the
current track.
3. Buttons 1−6 7. X (CD Eject) 12. SEEK 6

. Radio: Saves and selects . Removes the CD from . Radio: Seeks the next
favorite stations. the slot. station.
4. FAV 8. CD/AUX . CD: Selects the next track
. Radio: Opens the . Selects between the CD or fast forwards within a
favorites list. player or a connected track.
5. MENU/SELECT external audio source. 13. CONFIG
. Press: Opens the menus 9. PHONE . Opens the Configuration
and selects menu items. . Opens the phone Settings menu.
. Turn: Highlights menu items main menu. 14. TONE
or sets values while in a . Mutes the audio system. . Opens the Tone
menu. Manually selects Settings menu.
radio stations while 10. SEEK 7
listening to the radio. . Radio: Seeks the previous
15. BACK /
6. RADIO/BAND station. . Menu: Moves one
. Changes the band while . CD: Selects the previous level back.
listening to the radio. track or rewinds within a . Character Input: Deletes
. Selects the radio when track. the last character.
listening to a different audio 11. CD Slot
source. . Insert a CD.

. Return from a submenu screen
Operation For vehicles without OnStar, press
to the previous menu screen.
PHONE to mute the infotainment
Controls system. Press PHONE again, . Delete the last character in a
The infotainment system is operated or turn VOL/O to cancel mute. sequence.
by using the pushbuttons, Selecting a Menu Option
multifunction knobs, and menus that
Menu System
are shown on the display, and Controls
steering wheel controls, if equipped.
The MENU/SELECT knob and the
Turning the System On or Off BACK / button are used to
navigate the menu system.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to
turn the system on and off. MENU/SELECT: Press to:
Automatic Off
. Enter the menu system. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
. Select or activate the highlighted move the highlighted bar.
If the infotainment system has been
turned on after the ignition is turned menu option. 2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
off, the system turns off . Confirm a set value. to select the highlighted option.
automatically after 10 minutes. Submenus
. Switch a system setting on
Volume Control or off.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to Turn to:
adjust the volume. . Highlight a menu option.
PHONE: For vehicles with . Select a value.
OnStar®, press and hold PHONE to
mute the infotainment system. Press BACK /: Press to:
and hold PHONE again, or turn . Exit a menu.
VOL/O to cancel mute.
An arrow on the right-hand edge of 2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob Press the BACK / button to delete
the menu indicates that it has a to confirm the setting. the last character or press and hold
submenu with other options.
Turning a Function On or Off BACK / to delete the entire
Activating a Setting character sequence.
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source.
To adjust the audio setting, press
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to the TONE button and select the
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to highlight the function. audio setting. Press the / BACK
highlight the setting. 2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob button to go back to the Tone
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to turn the function on or off. Settings menu.
to activate the setting.
Entering a Character Sequence To quickly reset an audio setting
Setting a Value value to 0:
1. Highlight the option.
2. Press and hold the MENU/
SELECT knob until the value
changes to 0.
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to

1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to highlight the character.
change the current value of the 2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
setting. to select the character.
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) 3. Select Radio Favorites.
and Bass For vehicles that have an equalizer: 4. Select the number of available
favorite pages.
5. Press the BACK / button to go
back to the System
Configuration menu.
Auto Volume
1. Select Treble, Midrange, The auto volume feature
1. Select EQ. automatically adjusts the radio
or Bass.
2. Select the setting. volume to compensate for road and
2. Select the value. wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
System Settings or slows down, so that the volume
Configuring the Number of level is consistent.
Favorite Pages The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
1. Select Fader or Balance.

2. Select the value.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages:
1. Press the CONFIG button. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Radio Settings. 2. Select Radio Settings.
3. Select Auto Volume. Radio station is available. In rare cases, a

4. Select the setting. radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
5. Press the BACK / button to go AM-FM Radio radio features to work improperly.
back to the System Control Buttons If this happens, contact the radio
Configuration menu. station.
The buttons used to control the
Maximum Startup Volume radio are: While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
The maximum volume played when RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the or call letters display.
the radio is first turned on can radio on and choose between AM,
be set. FM, and SiriusXM®, if equipped. Radio Menus
SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 : Press to Radio menus are available for AM,
FM, and SiriusXM, if equipped.
search for stations.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob to
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list. open the main radio menu for that
frequency.
1−6: Press to select preset
stations. Selecting a Band
MENU/SELECT: Turn to manually Press the RADIO/BAND button to
2. Select Radio Settings. search for stations. choose AM, FM, or SiriusXM,
3. Select Maximum Startup if equipped. The last station that
Volume.
RDS (Radio Data System) was playing starts playing again.
4. Select the setting. The radio may have RDS. The RDS
feature is available for use only on
5. Press the BACK / button to go FM stations that broadcast RDS
back to the System information. This feature only works
Configuration menu. when the information from the radio
Selecting a Station 2. Select AM or FM Station List. All Category Lists

receivable stations in the current Most stations that broadcast an
Seek Tuning reception area are displayed. RDS program type (PTY) code
Briefly press SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 If no station list has been specify the type of programming
to automatically search for the next created, an automatic station transmitted. Some stations change
available station. If a station is not search is done. the PTY code depending on the
found, the radio switches to a more 3. Select the station. content. The system stores the RDS
sensitive search level. If a station stations, sorted by program type, in
still is not found, the frequency that Updating Station and Category the FM category list.
was last active begins to play. Lists
To search for a programming type
If stations stored in the station list
Press and hold SEEK 7 or SEEK can no longer be received:
determined by station:
6 until the station on the display is 1. Select FM category list. A list of
reached, then release the button. 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. all programming types available
Manual Tuning 2. Select Update AM or FM Station displays.
List, if the stations stored in the 2. Select the programming type.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to station list are no longer
select the frequency on the display. A list of stations that transmit
received. A station search will be
programming of the selected
Favorites List completed and the first station in
type displays.
the updated list will play.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. 3. Select the station.
To cancel the station search, press
2. Select Favorites List. the MENU/SELECT knob. The category lists are updated when
3. Select the station. the corresponding station lists are
updated.
Station Lists
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
Storing and Retrieving Satellite Radio 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), and

Favorites www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079
Vehicles with an XM Satellite Radio (Canada).
Stations from all bands can be tuner and a valid SiriusXM® Satellite
stored in the favorite lists in any Radio subscription can receive Control Buttons
order. SiriusXM programming. The buttons used to control the
Up to six stations can be stored in SiriusXM Satellite Radio SiriusXM radio are:
each favorite page and the number Service RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
of available favorite pages can
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service radio on and choose between AM,
be set.
based in the 48 contiguous United FM, and SiriusXM.
Storing a Station as a Favorite States and 10 Canadian provinces. SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 : Press to
To store the station to a position in SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide search for stations.
the list, press the corresponding variety of programming and
numeric button 1−6 until the station commercial-free music, coast to FAV: Press to open the
can be heard again. coast, and in digital-quality sound. favorites list.
During your trial or when you 1−6: Press to select preset
Retrieving Stations subscribe, you will get unlimited stations.
Press the FAV button to open a access to SiriusXM Radio Online for
when you are not in the vehicle. MENU/SELECT: Turn to search for
favorite page or to switch to another
A service fee is required to receive stations.
favorite page. Briefly press one of
the 1−6 buttons to retrieve the the SiriusXM service. If SiriusXM Selecting the SiriusXM Band
station. service needs to be reactivated, the
radio will display "No Subscription Press the RADIO/BAND button to
Please Renew" on channel XM1. choose between the AM, FM, and
For more information, contact SiriusXM bands. The last station
SiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or played in that band begins to play
when that band is selected.
SiriusXM Categories . Press and hold SEEK 7 or Storing and Retrieving

SiriusXM stations are organized in SEEK 6 to scroll through the Favorites
categories. previous or next stations until Stations from all bands can be
the station is reached. stored in any order in the favorite
Removing or Adding Categories
To select an XM station using the pages.
1. Press the CONFIG button. MENU/SELECT knob: Up to six stations can be stored in
2. Select XM Categories. 1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to each favorite page and the number
3. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to highlight an XM station. of available favorite pages can
highlight the category. be set.
2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select the station, or leave the Storing a Station as a Favorite
to remove or add the category. station highlighted. To store the station to a position in
Selecting an SiriusXM Station To select a station using the menu: the list, press and hold the
corresponding 1−6 button until the
SiriusXM stations can be selected 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
station can be heard again.
by using SEEK 7 or SEEK 6, the 2. Select XM Stations List.
Retrieving Stations
MENU/SELECT knob, or the menu 3. Select the station.
system. Press the FAV button to open a
Selecting a Station by Category favorite page or to switch to another
To select an XM station using SEEK favorite page. Briefly press one of
7 or SEEK 6, do one of the 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
the 1−6 buttons to retrieve the
following: 2. Select XM Category List. A list of station.
all programming types available
. Press and release SEEK 7 or
displays.
SEEK 6 to go to the previous or
3. Select the programming type.
next station.
4. Select the station.
SiriusXM Messages No CAT Info: No category vehicles. If this message is received

information is available. after having the vehicle serviced,
XL (Explicit Language
No Information: No text or check with your dealer.
Channels): These channels, or any
others, can be blocked by request, informational messages are XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
by calling 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) available. this message alternates with the XM
and 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). No Subscription Please Renew: Radio eight-digit radio ID label. This
SiriusXM subscription needs to be label is needed to activate the
XM Updating: The encryption code
reactivated. Contact SiriusXM at service.
is being updated; no action is
required. www.siriusxm.com or Unknown: If this message is
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), and received when tuned to channel 0,
Loading XM: The audio system is
www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079 there could be a receiver fault.
acquiring and processing audio and
(Canada). Consult with your dealer.
text data; no action is needed.
No XM Signal: The vehicle may be Check XM Receiver: If this
Channel Off Air: This channel is
in a location that where the XM message does not clear within a
not currently in service.
signal is being blocked. When the short period of time, the receiver
Channel Unauth: This channel is vehicle is moved, the signal should could have a fault. Consult with your
blocked or cannot be received with return. dealer.
the XM subscription package.
CAT Not Found: There are no XM Not Available: If this message
Channel Unavail: This previously channels available for the selected does not clear within a short period
assigned channel is no longer category. of time, the receiver could have a
assigned. fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
No Artist Info: No artist in the vehicle may have been in
information is available. another vehicle. XM receivers Radio Reception
No Title Info: No song title cannot be swapped between Frequency interference and static
information is available. can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as phone
chargers, vehicle convenience SiriusXM Satellite Radio radio reception. For proper radio
accessories, and external electronic Service reception, the antenna connector
devices are plugged into the needs to be properly attached to the
accessory power outlet. If there is SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service post on the glass.
interference or static, unplug the provides digital radio reception. Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with If attaching a cell phone antenna to
item from the accessory power the glass, attach it between the grid
outlet. satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In lines.
FM addition, traveling or standing under Notice: Using a razor blade or
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, sharp object to clear the inside
FM signals only reach about 16 to
or tunnels may cause loss of the rear window can damage the rear
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
SiriusXM signal for a period of time. window antenna and/or the rear
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce Cell Phone Usage window defogger. Repairs would
interference, some static can occur, not be covered by the vehicle
especially around tall buildings or Cell phone usage, such as making warranty. Do not clear the inside
hills, causing the sound to fade in or receiving phone calls, charging, rear window with sharp objects.
and out. or just having the phone on may
cause static interference in the Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
glass tinting with metallic film.
AM radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off
if this happens. The metallic film in some tinting
The range for most AM stations is materials will interfere with or
greater than for FM, especially at distort the incoming radio
night. The longer range can cause Backglass Antenna reception. Any damage caused to
station frequencies to interfere with The AM-FM antenna is integrated the backglass antenna due to
each other. Static can also occur with the rear window defogger in the metallic tinting materials will not
when things like storms and power rear window. Do not scratch the be covered by the vehicle
lines interfere with radio reception. inside surface or damage the lines warranty.
When this happens, try reducing the in the glass. If the inside surface is
treble on the radio. damaged, it could interfere with
Diversity Antenna System Audio Players mild neutral detergent solution

mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
For vehicles with convertible tops, the disc from the center to the
the AM-FM antenna is a hidden CD Player outer edge.
self-tuning system, and is in the rear The CD player can play audio CDs
spoiler. It optimizes the AM and FM Care of the CD Player
and MP3 CDs.
signals relative to the vehicle's Do not add a label to a disc, as it
position and radio station source. The CD player will not play 8 cm could get caught in the CD player.
No maintenance or adjustments are (3 in) CDs. If a label is needed, label the top of
needed. Do not place loads on the Care of CDs the recorded disc with a
spoiler. If the spoiler is replaced, be marking pen.
sure it is replaced with the correct Sound quality can be reduced due
GM parts for the best AM and FM to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners
reception. quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the
how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage
Handle discs carefully and store the CD player.
Satellite Radio Antenna
them in their original cases or other Notice: If a label is added to a
For vehicles with XM Satellite Radio protective cases away from direct CD, more than one CD is inserted
Service, the antenna is located on sunlight and dust. If the bottom into the slot at a time, or an
the roof or on the trunk lid of the surface of a disc is damaged, the attempt is made to play scratched
vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of disc may not play properly or at all. or damaged CDs, the CD player
obstructions for clear radio Do not touch the bottom surface of could be damaged. While using
reception. a disc while handling it; this could the CD player, use only CDs in
damage the surface. Pick up discs good condition without any label,
by grasping the outer edges or the load one CD at a time, and keep
edge of the hole and the outer edge. the CD player and the loading slot
If the bottom surface of a disc is free of foreign materials, liquids,
dirty, take a soft lint-free cloth, and debris.
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
Control Buttons If the disc is not removed after it is Playing Tracks in Random Order
ejected, it is pulled back in after a Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
The buttons used to control the CD
few seconds. then set Shuffle Songs to On.
player are:
CD/AUX: Press to choose between Playing a CD or MP3 CD Fast Forward and Rewind
the CD and AUX player. Press the CD/AUX button if there is
Press and hold SEEK 7 or SEEK
a disc in the player; it begins
SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 : Press to 6 to fast forward or rewind within
playing.
select tracks or to fast forward or the current track.
rewind within a track. Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the Selecting an MP3 Track
MENU/SELECT: Turn to select display depending on the data
tracks. Using the control buttons:
stored.
INFO: Press to display additional Press SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 to
information about the CD that may Selecting a CD Track select the previous or next track.
be available. Using the control buttons: Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
X (Eject): Press to remove Press SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 to counterclockwise or clockwise to
the CD. select the previous or next track. select the previous or next track.
Inserting a CD Turn the MENU/SELECT knob Using the CD Menu:
With the printed side facing up, counterclockwise or clockwise to 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
insert a disc into the CD slot until it select the previous or next track.
2. Select Playlists/Folders.
is drawn in. Using the CD Menu:
3. Select the playlist or folder.
Removing a CD 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
4. Select the track.
Press X. 2. Select Tracks list.
The disc is pushed out of the
CD slot.
Searching for MP3 Tracks Auxiliary Devices 3.5 mm Jack

It is normal for the search feature to The AUX Input allows portable Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
take some time to display the devices to connect to the vehicle the auxiliary input jack to use a
information after reading the disc using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack, portable audio player.
due to the amount of information the USB port, if equipped, Playback of an audio device that is
stored on the disc. The infotainment or Bluetooth® wireless technology, connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
system automatically switches to if equipped. only be controlled using the controls
FM while the disc is being read.
Portable devices are controlled by on the device.
Tracks can be searched by: using the menu system described in Adjusting the Volume
. Playlists Operation on page 7‑4.
Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
. Artists
volume of the infotainment system
. Albums after the volume level has been set
. Song Titles on the portable audio device.
. Genres USB Port
. Folder View For vehicles with a USB port, the
following devices may be connected
To search for tracks:
and controlled by the infotainment
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. system.
2. Select Search. . iPods
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, . PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
Song Titles, Genres,
The AUX input is in the center . USB Drives
or Folder View.
console. . Zunes
Connecting and Controlling 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Connecting and Controlling a
an iPod® Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
Audiobooks, or Composers. or Zune™
Not all iPods can be controlled by
the infotainment system. 4. Select the track. Connecting a PFD or Zune
Connecting an iPod Shuffle Connect the PFD or Zune to the
Connect the iPod to the USB port Press the MENU/SELECT knob and USB port using the cable that came
using the cable that came with the set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On with the device.
device. or Off, then press the BACK / Searching for a Track
button to return to the main screen.
Searching for a Track Tracks can be searched for by:
On: Plays tracks in the current
Tracks can be searched for by: . Playlists
folder in random order.
. Playlists
Off: Plays tracks in the current
. Artists
. Artists folder in sequential order. . Albums
. Albums Repeat . Song Titles
. Song Titles Press the MENU/SELECT knob and . Podcasts
. Podcasts set Repeat to On or Off, then press . Genres
. Genres the BACK / button to return to the
main screen.
. Audiobooks 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
On: Repeats the current track.
. Composers 2. Select Search.
Off: Starts playback from the
To search for tracks: beginning of the current track after 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. the last track finishes. Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres
2. Select Search.
Shuffle Functionality When a device is not supported, the

. Genres
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and message “No supported data found. . Folder View
set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On You can safely disconnect the
device” appears. *This only displays if a playlist is
or Off. found on the device.
On: Plays current tracks in random Connecting a USB Drive
order. Connect the USB drive to the USB
Off: Plays current tracks in port using the cable that came with
sequential order. the device. 2. Select Search.
Searching for a Track 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Repeat Functionality
Song Titles, Genres,
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and It is normal for the search feature to or Folder View.
set Repeat to On or Off. take some time to display the
information after reading the disc 4. Select the track.
Repeat On: Repeats the current due to the amount of information
track. Shuffle Functionality
stored on the disc.
Repeat Off: Starts playback from Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
Files that do not have any meta set Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
the beginning of the current track data stored in the ID3 tag display as
after the last track finishes. or Off.
Unknown.
On: Plays current tracks in random
Connecting and Controlling a Tracks can be searched for by: order.
USB Drive . Playlists* Off: Plays current tracks in
The infotainment system can only . Artists sequential order.
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
a USB drive. . Albums Repeat Functionality
Only the first 10,000 songs are . Song Titles Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
recognized on the device. set Repeat to On or Off.
Repeat On: Repeats the current

. The infotainment system To select the Bluetooth Music Setup
track. automatically links with the first menu when a device is not attached
available paired device in the to the USB port, or when a device is
Repeat Off: Starts playback from order the device was paired.
the beginning of the current track attached to the USB port but not
after the last track finishes.
. Only one paired device can be active:
®
connected to the infotainment 1. Press the CD/AUX button until
Connecting a Bluetooth system at a time. AUX is the active source.
Device . Pairing should only need to be 2. Press the MENU/SELECT knob.
Before a Bluetooth device can be completed once, unless changes
connected to the infotainment to the pairing information have 3. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
system, it must first be paired to the been made or the device is To select the Bluetooth Music Setup
system. Not all Bluetooth devices deleted. menu when a Bluetooth device is
can be paired to the infotainment connected and active:
system. Before pairing the Bluetooth Bluetooth Setup Menu
device, become familiar with its user The Bluetooth Setup menu can be
guide for Bluetooth functions. The accessed with or without a device 2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup.
system only connects to Bluetooth attached to the USB port.
Pairing a Device
devices that support A2DP To select the Bluetooth Setup menu
(Advanced Audio Distribution 1. Select Connect To New Device
when a device is attached to the
Profile) version 1.2. from the Bluetooth Music
USB port and active:
Setup menu.
Pairing Information: 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
2. The system asks a series of
. Up to five devices can be paired while in the iPod, Zune, PFD,
Yes/No questions to determine
to the system. or USB device main menu.
what type of device is being
. The pairing process is disabled 2. Select Bluetooth Music Setup. paired.
when the vehicle is moving.
3. After the system determines 2. Select the new device. Changing the PIN
what type of Bluetooth device is To connect a paired device when To change the default PIN:
being paired, the Bluetooth another device is connected to the
device will need to be put into 1. Select Change Default PIN from
infotainment system: the Bluetooth Music
discovery mode.
1. Select the Select Device option Setup menu.
4. Some devices may require a from the Bluetooth Music
personal identification number 2. Select a pre-defined PIN,
Setup menu. or select Other to create a PIN.
(PIN) in order to complete the
pairing process. Locate the 2. Select the new device. To create a PIN:
device named “GMusicConnect” 3. The active device is
in the list on the Bluetooth 1. Select the length of the PIN.
disconnected from the system
device and follow the and the new device is 2. Enter the character sequence.
instructions on the device to connected.
enter the four-digit PIN provided Messages
by the infotainment system. Removing a Device The following messages may
Connecting to a Device 1. Select Remove Device from the appear on the infotainment screen.
Bluetooth Music Setup menu. Poor Bluetooth Signal Quality:
Once a device is paired to the
infotainment system, it can be 2. Select the device. This message displays when the
connected to the infotainment Bluetooth signal strength is low.
3. The device is removed from the
system. system. This Feature is Unavailable While
To connect a paired device when no Vehicle is Moving: This message
Before connecting to the removed displays when an action is not
other device is connected to the device again, it will need to paired
infotainment system: allowed while the vehicle is moving.
to the infotainment system.
1. Select the Select Device option
from the Bluetooth Music
Setup menu.
Controlling a Bluetooth®
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
Device
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
Bluetooth devices that support Bluetooth (Overview) this section.
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice
Control Profile) version 1.4 may be
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use
able to be controlled by the
interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the
infotainment system.
allowing: address book or contact list. See
Press and release SEEK 7 or . Placement and receipt of calls in “Voice Pass-Thru” in this
SEEK 6 to skip tracks. Press and a hands-free mode. section.
hold SEEK 7 or SEEK 6 to fast . Sharing of the cell phone’s
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone
forward or fast reverse within a address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section.
track. the vehicle.
Other Information To minimize driver distraction,
{ WARNING
before driving, and with the vehicle When using a cell phone, it can
The Bluetooth® word mark and parked:
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® be distracting to look too long or
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks . Become familiar with the too often at the screen of the
by General Motors is under license. features of the cell phone. phone or the infotainment
Other trademarks and trade names Organize the phone book and (navigation) system. Taking your
are those of their respective owners. contact lists clearly and delete eyes off the road too long or too
duplicate or rarely used entries. often could cause a crash
See Radio Frequency Statement on If possible, program speed dial
page 13‑21 for Federal resulting in injury or death. Focus
or other shortcuts. your attention on driving.
Communications Commission and
Industry Canada information. . Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
can use a Bluetooth-capable cell end a call, reject a call, or cancel an calm and natural voice.
phone with a Hands-Free Profile to operation.
make and receive phone calls. The Audio System
infotainment system and voice Infotainment System Controls When using the Bluetooth system,
recognition are used to control the If equipped, the infotainment system sound comes through the vehicle's
system. The system can be used allows certain controls to be front audio system speakers and
while in ON/RUN or ACC/ selected on the infotainment display. overrides the audio system. Use the
ACCESSORY. The range of the VOL/ O knob during a call to
Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m For information about how to
navigate the menu system using the change the volume level. The
(30 ft). Not all phones support all adjusted volume level remains in
functions and not all phones work infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 7‑4. memory for later calls. The system
with the Bluetooth system. See maintains a minimum volume level.
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more PHONE: Press to enter the Phone
information about compatible main menu. Other Information
phones.
Voice Recognition The Bluetooth® word mark and
Bluetooth Controls logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
The voice recognition system uses SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
Use the buttons on the infotainment commands to control the system by General Motors is under license.
system and the steering wheel to and dial phone numbers. Other trademarks and trade names
operate the Bluetooth system. are those of their respective owners.
Noise: The system may not
Steering Wheel Controls recognize voice commands if there See Radio Frequency Statement on
is too much background noise.
b / g (Push to Talk): Press to page 13‑21 for information
answer incoming calls, confirm When to Speak: A tone sounds to regarding Part 15 of the Federal
system information, and start voice indicate that the system is ready for Communications Commission (FCC)
recognition. a voice command. Wait for the tone rules and Industry Canada
and then speak. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

. The pairing process is disabled
Bluetooth (Infotainment when the vehicle is moving.
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
A four-digit Personal
Controls) . Identification Number (PIN)
Pairing only needs to be
For information about how to completed once, unless the appears on the display. The PIN
navigate the menu system using the pairing information on the cell is used in Step 6.
infotainment controls, see Operation phone changes or the cell phone 5. Start the pairing process on the
on page 7‑4. is deleted from the system. cell phone to be paired to the
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can vehicle. See the cell phone
be connected to the Bluetooth manufacturer's user guide for
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone information on this process.
system at a time.
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the . If multiple paired cell phones are 6. Locate the device named “Your
vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the Vehicle” in the list on the cell
your cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first phone. Follow the instructions
guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the on the cell phone to enter the
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired PIN provided in Step 4. After the
phone is not connected, calls will be to the system. To link to a PIN is successfully entered, the
made using OnStar Hands-Free different paired phone, see system prompts you to provide a
Calling, if available. See OnStar “Linking to a Different Phone” name for the paired cell phone.
Overview on page 14‑1. later in this section. This name will be used to
indicate which phones are
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone paired and connected to the
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 1. Press the CONFIG button. vehicle. The system responds
capability cannot be paired to with “<Phone name> has been
2. Select Phone Settings or successfully paired” after the
the vehicle as a phone and an Bluetooth Settings.
MP3 player at the same time. pairing process is complete.
3. Select Bluetooth. 7. Repeat Steps 1−6 to pair
. Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system. additional phones.
Listing All Paired and Connected 2. Select Phone Settings or The Phone Book menu allows you
Phones Bluetooth Settings. to access the phone book stored in
1. Press the CONFIG button. 3. Select Bluetooth. the cell phone to make a call.
2. Select Phone Settings or 4. Select Device List. The Call Lists menu allows you to
Bluetooth Settings. access the phone numbers from the
5. Select the new phone to link to Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and
3. Select Bluetooth. and follow the on screen Missed Calls menus on your cell
4. Select Device List. prompts. phone to make a call.
If delete is selected, the To make a call using the Phone
Deleting a Paired Phone highlighted phone will be Book menu:
1. Press the CONFIG button. deleted.
1. Press the PHONE button once
2. Select Phone Settings or Making a Call Using or twice.
Bluetooth Settings. Phone Book 2. Select Phone Book.
3. Select Bluetooth. For cell phones that support the 3. Search through the list by
4. Select Device List. phone book feature, the Bluetooth selecting the letter group the
system can use the contacts stored phone book entry begins with,
5. Select the phone to delete and
on your cell phone to make calls. or press the MENU/SELECT
follow the on screen prompts.
See your cell phone manufacturer‘s knob to scroll through the entire
Linking to a Different Phone user guide or contact your wireless list of names/numbers in the
provider to find out if this feature is phone book.
To link to a different phone, the new
supported by your phone.
phone must be in the vehicle and 4. Select the name or number you
available to be connected to the When a cell phone supports the want to call.
Bluetooth system before the phone book feature, the Phone
process is started. Book and Call Lists menus are
automatically available.
To make a call using the Call Accepting or Declining a Call Declining a Call
Lists menu: Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
When an incoming call is received,
1. Press the PHONE button once the infotainment system mutes and “Decline” and press the MENU/
or twice. a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. SELECT knob to decline the call.
2. Select Call Lists. Accepting a Call Switching Between Calls (Call
3. Select the Incoming Calls, Waiting Calls Only)
Outgoing Calls, or Missed “Answer” and press the MENU/ To switch between calls:
Calls list. SELECT knob to accept the call. 1. Turn or press the MENU/
4. Select the name or number you Declining a Call SELECT knob.
want to call.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to 2. Select Switch Call from
Making a Call “Decline” and press the MENU/ the menu.
To make a call: SELECT knob to decline the call. Conference Calling
1. Press the PHONE button once Call Waiting Conference calling and three-way
or twice. Call waiting must be supported on calling must be supported on the
2. Enter the character sequence. the Bluetooth phone and enabled by Bluetooth phone and enabled by the
See “Entering a Character the wireless service carrier to work. wireless service carrier to work.
Sequence” in Operation on To start a conference while in a
Accepting a Call
page 7‑4. current call:
3. Select Call to start dialing the 1. Turn or press the MENU/
“Answer” and press the MENU/
number. SELECT knob.
SELECT knob to accept the call.
2. Select Enter Number.
3. Enter the character sequence Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Pairing

then select Call. See “Entering a (DTMF) Tones A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
Character Sequence” in
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can must be paired to the Bluetooth
send numbers during a call. This is system and then connected to the
4. After the call has been placed, used when calling a menu-driven vehicle before it can be used. See
turn or press the MENU/ phone system. your cell phone manufacturer's user
SELECT knob and choose guide for Bluetooth functions before
Merge Calls. 1. Turn or press the MENU/
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
SELECT knob and select Enter
5. To add more callers to the phone is not connected, calls will be
Number.
conference call, repeat Steps 1 made using OnStar Hands-Free
−4. The number of callers that 2. Enter the character sequence. Calling, if available. See OnStar
can be added is limited by your See “Entering a Character Overview on page 14‑1.
wireless service carrier. Sequence” in Operation on
page 7‑4. Pairing Information
Ending a Call . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT Bluetooth (Voice capability cannot be paired to
knob and select Hang Up. Recognition) the vehicle as a phone and an
MP3 player at the same time.
Muting a Call Using Voice Recognition . Up to five cell phones can be
To Mute a Call To use voice recognition, press the paired to the Bluetooth system.
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT
b / g button on the steering wheel. . The pairing process is disabled
Use the commands below for the when the vehicle is moving.
knob and select Mute Call.
various voice features. For
To Cancel Mute additional information, say “Help”
. Pairing only needs to be
while you are in a voice completed once, unless the
Turn or press the MENU/SELECT pairing information on the cell
recognition menu.
knob and select Mute Call. phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone can 4. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected
be connected to the Bluetooth cell phone that you want to pair. Phones
system at a time. For help with this process, see The system can list all cell phones
. If multiple paired cell phones are your cell phone manufacturer's paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
within range of the system, the user guide. also connected to the vehicle, the
system connects to the first 5. Locate the device named “Your system responds with “is connected”
available paired cell phone in the Vehicle” in the list on the cell after that phone name.
order that they were first paired phone. Follow the instructions
to the system. To link to a on the cell phone to enter the 1. Press b / g. The system
different paired phone, see PIN provided in Step 3. After the responds “Ready,” followed by
“Linking to a Different Phone” PIN is successfully entered, the a tone.
later in this section. system prompts you to provide a 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Pairing a Phone name for the paired cell phone.
This name will be used to 3. Say “List.”
1. Press b / g. The system indicate which phones are Deleting a Paired Phone
responds “Ready,” followed by paired and connected to the
vehicle. The system responds If the phone name you want to
a tone.
with “<Phone name> has been delete is unknown, see “Listing All
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command Paired and Connected Phones.”
successfully paired” after the
can be skipped.
pairing process is complete. 1. Press b / g. The system
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds responds “Ready,” followed by
6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pair
with instructions and a four-digit a tone.
additional phones.
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
for which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command
To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers 1. Press b / g. The system
the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to 30 responds “Ready,” followed by
next available cell phone in the phone numbers as name tags in the a tone.
order in which all the available cell Hands-Free Directory that is shared
phones were paired. Depending on 2. Say “Store.”
between the Bluetooth and OnStar
which cell phone you want to systems. 3. Say the phone number or group
connect to, you may have to use of numbers you want to store all
this command several times. The following commands are used
at once with no pauses, then
to delete and store phone numbers.
follow the directions given by the
1. Press b / g. The system Store: This command will store a system to save a name tag for
responds “Ready,” followed by phone number, or a group of this number.
a tone. numbers as a name tag.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” Using the “Digit Store” Command
Digit Store: This command allows
3. Say “Change phone.” a phone number to be stored as a If an unwanted number is
name tag by entering the digits one recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is “Clear” at any time to clear the last
at a time.
found, the response will be number.
“<Phone name> is now Delete: This command is used to
connected.” delete individual name tags. To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is not Delete All Name Tags: This “Verify” at any time.
found, the original phone command deletes all stored name
remains connected. tags in the Hands-Free Calling 1. Press b / g. The system
Directory and the Destinations responds “Ready,” followed by
Directory. a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store.”
3. Say each digit, one at a time, To delete all name tags: Digit Dial: This command allows a
that you want to store. After phone number to be dialed by
each digit is entered, the system 1. Press b / g. The system entering the digits one at a time.
repeats back the digit it heard responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone. Re-dial: This command is used to
followed by a tone. After the last dial the last number used on the cell
digit has been entered, say 2. Say “Delete all name tags.” phone.
“Store,” and then follow the
directions given by the system to Listing Stored Numbers Using the “Dial” or “Call”
save a name tag for this number. The list command will list all the Command
Using the “Delete” Command stored numbers and name tags. 1. Press b / g. The system
Using the “List” Command responds “Ready,” followed by
1. Press b / g. The system
a tone.
responds “Ready,” followed by 1. Press b / g. The system
a tone. responds “Ready,” followed by 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
2. Say “Delete.” a tone. 3. Say the entire number without
2. Say “Directory.” pausing or say the name tag.
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete. 3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.” Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
Using the “Delete All Name Tags” 4. Say “List.” speakers.
Command
Making a Call Calling 911 Emergency
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands-Free Calls can be made using the 1. Press b / g. The system
Calling Directory and the following commands. responds “Ready,” followed by
Destinations Directory. Dial or Call: The dial or call a tone.
command can be used 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag. 3. Say “911”.
4. Say "Dial". System responds: followed by a tone. After the last Call Waiting
"OK, dialing 911". digit has been entered,
Call waiting must be supported on
say “Dial.”
Using the “Digit Dial” Command the cell phone and enabled by the
Once connected, the person called wireless service carrier.
The digit dial command allows a will be heard through the audio
phone number to be dialed by speakers.
. Press b / g to answer an
entering the digits one at a time. incoming call when another call
After each digit is entered, the Using the “Re-dial” Command is active. The original call is
system repeats back the digit it placed on hold.
heard followed by a tone. 1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by . Press b / g again to return to
If an unwanted number is a tone.
recognized by the system, say the original call.
“Clear” at any time to clear the last 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The . To ignore the incoming call, no
number. system dials the last number action is required.
called from the connected cell
To hear all of the numbers phone. . Press $ / i to disconnect the
recognized by the system, say current call and switch to the call
“Verify” at any time. Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio on hold.
1. Press b / g. The system speakers. Three-Way Calling
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone. Receiving a Call Three-way calling must be
When an incoming call is received, supported on the cell phone and
2. Say “Digit Dial.” enabled by the wireless service
the audio system mutes and a ring
3. Say each digit, one at a time, tone is heard in the vehicle. carrier.
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system . Press b / g to answer the call. 1. While on a call, press b / g.
repeats back the digit it heard 2. Say “Three-way call.”
. Press $ / i to ignore a call.
3. Use the dial or call command to The cell phone must be paired and Voice Pass-Thru
dial the number of the third party connected with the Bluetooth
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
to be called. system before a call can be
voice recognition commands on the
4. Once the call is connected, transferred. The connection process
cell phone. See your cell phone
can take up to two minutes after the
press b / g to link all callers ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
manufacturer's user guide to see if
together. the cell phone supports this feature.
To Transfer Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell
Ending a Call Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone:
Press $ / i to end a call. During a call with the audio in the
1. Press b / g. The system
vehicle:
Muting a Call responds “Ready,” followed by
During a call, all sounds from inside
1. Press b / g. a tone.
the vehicle can be muted so that the 2. Say “Transfer Call.” 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
person on the other end of the call can be skipped.
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
cannot hear them. 3. Say “Voice.” The system
System from a Cell Phone
To mute a call, press b / g , and responds “OK, accessing
During a call with the audio on the <phone name>.”
then say “Mute Call.” cell phone, press b / g. The audio
The cell phone's normal prompt
To cancel mute, press b / g , and transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
messages will go through their cycle
then say “Un-mute Call.” does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the cell according to the phone's operating
Transferring a Call phone. See your cell phone instructions.
Audio can be transferred between manufacturer's user guide for more

the Bluetooth system and the cell information.
phone.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Sending a Number or Name Tag Clearing the System
(DTMF) Tones During a Call
Unless information is deleted out of
The Bluetooth system can send 1. Press b / g. The system the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
numbers and the numbers stored as responds “Ready,” followed by will be retained indefinitely. This
name tags during a call. You can a tone. includes all saved name tags in the
use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing
2. Say “Dial.” information. See the previous
menu-driven phone system.
Account numbers can also be 3. Say the number or name tag sections on “Deleting a Paired
stored for use. to send. Phone” and “Deleting Name Tags.”
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can be
Climate Control Systems controlled with this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
1. Fan Control 8. Recirculation

2. Heated Seats (If Equipped) A (Fan Control): Turn to increase
3. Temperature Control or decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob to O to turn the fan off.
4. Air Delivery Mode Controls
Temperature Control: Turn to
5. Air Conditioning increase or decrease the
6. Defrost temperature inside the vehicle.
Maximum cooling occurs when the
7. Rear Window Defogger temperature knob is turned to MAX
8-2 Climate Controls
# and the air conditioning system For best results, clear all snow and Operation in the recirculation mode
is turned on and air is recirculated ice from the windshield before while the air conditioner is off
inside the vehicle. defrosting. increases humidity and may cause
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows to fog.
Air Delivery Mode Control: To
change the current mode, press one windows are clear. Recirculation is not available in the
of the following: defrost or defog modes.
Air Conditioning
F (Vent): Air is directed to the To improve fuel efficiency and to
instrument panel outlets.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to cool the vehicle faster, recirculation
turn the air conditioning on or off. An may be automatically selected in
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the indicator light turns on. If the fan is warm weather. The recirculation
instrument panel outlets and the turned off or the outside
floor outlets. temperature falls below freezing, the light will not come on. Press the )
air conditioning will not work. to select recirculation; press it again
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the to select outside air.
floor outlets. The air conditioning might
0 is Rear Window Defogger
W (Defog): Clears the windows of automatically come on when
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the selected. 1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turn
windshield and floor outlets. ) (Recirculation): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns off
0 (Defrost): Clears the on the recirculation. An indicator
automatically after about
windshield of fog or frost more light comes on. Air is recirculated
inside the vehicle. It helps to quickly 12 minutes. It can also be turned off
quickly. Air is directed to the
cool the air inside the vehicle or by turning the ignition to ACC/
windshield and side window outlets.
prevent outside air and odors from ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
entering. If turned on again it runs for about
six minutes before turning off. At
higher vehicle speeds, the rear
defogger can stay on continuously.
Climate Controls 8-3
Do not drive the vehicle until all

. Keep the path under the front
windows are clear.
Air Vents seats clear of objects to help
Use the air outlets in the center and circulate the air inside of the
Notice: Do not use a razor blade vehicle more effectively.
on the side of the instrument panel
or sharp object to clear the inside
to direct the airflow. Use the . Use of non-GM approved hood
rear window. Do not adhere
thumbwheels near the center air deflectors can adversely affect
anything to the defogger grid
outlets to direct airflow to the left or the performance of the system.
lines in the rear glass. These
right. Check with your dealer before
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be Operation Tips adding equipment to the outside
covered by your warranty. of the vehicle.
. In defog or defrost mode, warm
L / M (Heated Seats, If air flows from some air outlets.
Equipped): Press to turn on or off. To improve side window
See Heated Front Seats on defogging or defrosting, direct
page 3‑6. side air outlets toward the side
windows.
. Clear away any ice, snow,
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
8-4 Climate Controls
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The passenger compartment air
filter removes most of the pollen and
dust from the air that enters the
vehicle. The filter will need to be
replaced periodically. See
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑2.
Using the climate control system
without an air filter installed is not
recommended. Water or other
debris could enter the system and
result in leaks or noises. Always
install a new filter when removing
the old filter.
For more information on filter
replacement, see your dealer.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
Operating Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
9-22
9-23
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . .
9-37
9-38
Parking (Manual Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-39
Driving Information Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-42
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parking over Things Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-43
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-24 Cruise Control
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Object Detection Systems
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Running the Vehicle While Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-46
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Rear Vision
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Racing or Other Competitive Automatic Transmission
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-26 Fuel
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-9 Manual Transmission Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-50
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-32 California Fuel
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Brakes Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-51
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Antilock Brake Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Starting and Operating System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Filling a Portable Fuel
Front Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-36
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
9-2 Driving and Operating
Towing
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 distractions.
Driving Characteristics and Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Trailer Towing and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
(Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Trailer Towing (ZL1) . . . . . . . . . 9-58 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Conversions and Add-Ons governments have enacted laws driving.
Add-On Electrical
regarding driver distraction. Become
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59 . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
. Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
careless and make mistakes.

{ WARNING Anticipate what they might do WARNING (Continued)
and be ready.
Taking your eyes off the road too Do not drink and drive or ride with
long or too often could cause a
. Allow enough following distance a driver who has been drinking.
crash resulting in injury or death. between you and the driver in Ride home in a cab; or if you are
Focus your attention on driving. front of you. with a group, designate a driver
. Focus on the task of driving. who will not drink.
Refer to the infotainment section for
more information on using that Drunk Driving Control of a Vehicle
system, including pairing and using Death and injury associated with
a cell phone. drinking and driving is a global Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
If equipped, refer to the navigation tragedy.
control a vehicle while driving.
manual for information on that
system, including pairing and using { WARNING Braking
a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is very Braking action involves perception
Defensive Driving dangerous. Your reflexes, time and reaction time. Deciding to
perceptions, attentiveness, and push the brake pedal is perception
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even time. Actually doing it is
expect the unexpected.” The first reaction time.
a small amount of alcohol. You
step in driving defensively is to wear
can have a serious — or even Average driver reaction time is
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑8. fatal — collision if you drive after about three-quarters of a second. In
drinking. that time, a vehicle moving at
. Assume that other road users 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(Continued)
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and (66 ft), which could be a lot of
other drivers) are going to be distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind Steering Hydraulic Power Steering

include:
Electric Power Steering If the vehicle has hydraulic power
. Keep enough distance between steering, it may require
you and the vehicle in front If the vehicle has electric power maintenance. See Power Steering
of you. steering, it does not have power Fluid (L99, LS3 and ZL1) on
. Avoid needless heavy braking. steering fluid. Regular maintenance page 10‑30 or Power Steering Fluid
is not required. (LFX) on page 10‑29.
. Keep pace with traffic.
If power steering assist is lost due If power steering assist is lost
If the engine ever stops while the to a system malfunction, the vehicle because the engine stops or
vehicle is being driven, brake can be steered, but may require because of a system malfunction,
normally but do not pump the increased effort. See your dealer if the vehicle can be steered but may
brakes. Doing so could make the there is a problem. required increased effort.
pedal harder to push down. If the
engine stops, there will be some If the steering wheel is turned until it See your dealer if there is a
power brake assist but it will be reaches the end of its travel, and is problem.
held against that position for an
used when the brake is applied. Curve Tips
extended period of time, power
Once the power assist is used up, it
can take longer to stop and the steering assist may be reduced. . Take curves at a reasonable
brake pedal will be harder to push. Normal use of the power steering speed.
assist should return when the . Reduce speed before entering a
system cools down. curve.
See specific vehicle steering . Maintain a reasonable steady
messages under Vehicle Messages speed through the curve.
on page 5‑33. . Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery 3. Turn the steering wheel to go

straight down the roadway.
. There are some situations when
steering around a problem may
be more effective than braking. Loss of Control
. Holding both sides of the Skidding
steering wheel allows you to turn There are three types of skids that
180 degrees without removing correspond to the vehicle's three
a hand. control systems:
. The Antilock Brake System . Braking Skid — wheels are not
(ABS) allows steering while rolling.
braking.
. Steering or Cornering Skid —
too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and
The vehicle's right wheels can drop lose cornering force.
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Acceleration Skid — too much
these tips: throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
1. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the Defensive drivers avoid most skids
way, steer the vehicle so that it by taking reasonable care suited to
straddles the edge of the existing conditions, and by not
pavement. overdriving those conditions. But
skids are always possible.
2. Turn the steering wheel about
one-eighth of a turn, until the
right front tire contacts the
pavement edge.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help For racing or competitive driving, it
these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid. is recommended that the brake fluid
. Ease your foot off the be replaced with a high performance
accelerator pedal and steer the Racing or Other brake fluid that has a dry boiling
point greater than 279°C (534°F).
way you want the vehicle to go. Competitive Driving After conversion to the high
The vehicle may straighten out.
Racing or competitive driving may performance brake fluid, follow the
Be ready for a second skid if it
affect the vehicle warranty. See the brake fluid service
occurs.
warranty book before using the recommendations outlined by the
. Slow down and adjust your vehicle for racing or other fluid manufacturer. Do not use
driving according to weather competitive driving. silicone or DOT-5 brake fluids.
conditions. Stopping distance
Notice: If you use the vehicle for ZL1 and 1LE: For racing and
can be longer and vehicle
racing or other competitive competitive driving, the vehicle load
control can be affected when
driving, the engine may use more should be limited to the driver only
traction is reduced by water,
oil than it would with normal use. and no cargo. The tires should be
snow, ice, gravel, or other
Low oil levels can damage the inflated to at least 180 kPa (26 psi).
material on the road. Learn to
engine. For information on how to
recognize warning clues — such If the vehicle is used for racing or
add oil, see Engine Oil on
as enough water, ice, or packed other competitive driving, the rear
page 10‑13.
snow on the road to make a axle fluid temperatures may be
mirrored surface — and slow Be sure to check the oil level higher than would occur in normal
down when you have any doubt. often during racing or other driving. GM recommends that the
competitive driving and keep the rear axle fluid be drained and
. Try to avoid sudden steering,
level at or near the upper mark refilled with new fluid after every
acceleration, or braking,
that shows the proper operating 24 hours of racing or competitive
including reducing vehicle speed
range on the engine oil dipstick. driving. See Recommended Fluids
by shifting to a lower gear. Any
sudden changes could cause and Lubricants on page 11‑12.
the tires to slide.
For extended track use, GM Notice: These procedures are regarding motor vehicle operation.
recommends installing a rear specific to the ZL1 or Camaro SS Run this procedure only on dry
differential cooler to protect the rear brake package. This procedure pavement.
axle. This excludes the ZL1 as it should not be run on other
has a rear differential cooler as Camaro models as damage may Racing/Track Brake Burnish
Procedure
standard equipment. result.
Notice: Brake pedal fade will
For track use only, it is Notice: The new vehicle break‐in
occur during this track burnish
recommended that the oil control kit period should be completed
procedure and can cause brake
be installed to prevent excessive oil before performing the brake
pedal travel and force to increase.
consumption. This kit is available burnish procedure or damage
This could extend stopping
through your dealer. may occur to the powertrain/
distance until the brakes are fully
Notice: Extended track operation engine. See New Vehicle Break-In
burnished.
without this kit installed may on page 9‑16.
1. Apply the brakes 25 times
result in a low oil level and could When performed as instructed,
starting 100 km/h (60 mph) to
result in engine damage. these procedures will not damage
50 km/h (30 mph) while
To prepare the Camaro ZL1 or SS the brakes. During the burnishing
decelerating at 0.4 g. This is a
brake system for track events and procedure, the brake pads will
medium brake application. Drive
racing, the high performance brake smoke and produce an odor. The
for at least 1 km (0.6 mi)
burnish described below should be braking force and pedal travel may
between applying the brakes.
completed. increase. After the procedure is
This first step may be skipped if
complete, the brake pads may
there are more than 320 km
Brake Burnishing appear white at the rotor contact.
(200 miles) on the brake pads.
New brake pads must be burnished Run this procedure in a safe
2. Repeatedly apply the brakes
before racing or other competitive manner and in compliance with all
from 100 km/h (60 mph) to
driving. local and state ordinances/laws
25 km/h (15 mph) while
decelerating at 0.8 g. This is a
hard brake application, without
activating the Antilock Brake of driving conditions and avoid Hydroplaning

System (ABS). Drive for at least driving through large puddles and
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
1 km (0.6 mi) between stops. deep‐standing or flowing water.
can build up under the vehicle's
Repeat until the brake pedal
tires so they actually ride on the
travel starts to increase.
Depending on conditions, this
{ WARNING water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
should take no longer than 25 Wet brakes can cause crashes. enough. When the vehicle is
brake applications. They might not work as well in a hydroplaning, it has little or no
3. Cool down: Drive at 100 km/h quick stop and could cause contact with the road.
(60 mph) for approximately pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle. There is no hard and fast rule about
15 km (10 mi) without using
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
brakes. After driving through a large slow down when the road is wet.
4. Apply the brakes 25 times from puddle of water or a car/vehicle
100 km/h (60 mph) to 50 km/h wash, lightly apply the brake Other Rainy Weather Tips
(30 mph) while decelerating at pedal until the brakes work Besides slowing down, other wet
0.4 g. This is a medium brake normally. weather driving tips include:
application. Drive for at least
1 km (0.6 mi) between Flowing or rushing water creates . Allow extra following distance.
applications. strong forces. Driving through . Pass with caution.
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
. Keep windshield wiping
Driving on Wet Roads equipment in good shape.
happens, you and other vehicle
Rain and wet roads can reduce occupants could drown. Do not . Keep the windshield washer fluid
vehicle traction and affect your ignore police warnings and be reservoir filled.
ability to stop and accelerate. very cautious about trying to drive
Always drive slower in these types
. Have good tires with proper
through flowing water. tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑49.

. Turn off cruise control. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and WARNING (Continued)
Highway Hypnosis transmission.
they would not work well. You
Always be alert and pay attention to . Shift to a lower gear when going
would then have poor braking or
your surroundings while driving. down steep or long hills.
even none going down a hill.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a Steering may also be affected
safe place to park the vehicle { WARNING when ignition is off. You could
and rest. crash. Always have the engine
If you do not shift down, the
Other driving tips include: running and the vehicle in gear
brakes could get so hot that they
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. would not work well. You would when going downhill.
. Keep the interior then have poor braking or even
temperature cool. none going down a hill. You could . Stay in your own lane. Do not
crash. Shift down to let the engine swing wide or cut across the
. Keep your eyes moving — scan center of the road. Drive at
assist the brakes on a steep
the road ahead and to the sides. speeds that let you stay in your
downhill slope.
. Check the rearview mirror and own lane.
vehicle instruments often. . Be alert on top of hills;
something could be in your lane
Hill and Mountain Roads { WARNING (stalled car, accident).
Driving on steep hills or through Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) . Pay attention to special road
mountains is different than driving or with the ignition off is signs (falling rocks area, winding
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for dangerous. The brakes will have roads, long grades, passing or
driving in these conditions include: to do all the work of slowing down no-passing zones) and take
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in and they could get so hot that appropriate action.
good shape. (Continued)
Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS) Blizzard Conditions

improves vehicle stability during
Driving on Snow or Ice Being stuck in snow can be a
hard stops on slippery roads, but
serious situation. Stay with the
Drive carefully when there is snow apply the brakes sooner than when
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
or ice between the tires and the on dry pavement. See Antilock
If possible, use Roadside
road, creating less traction or grip. Brake System (ABS) on page 9‑34.
Assistance. See Roadside
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C Allow greater following distance on Assistance Program (Mexico) on
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to any slippery road and watch for page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance
fall, resulting in even less traction. slippery spots. Icy patches can Program (U.S. and Canada) on
Avoid driving on wet ice or in occur on otherwise clear roads in page 13‑11. To get help and keep
freezing rain until roads can be shaded areas. The surface of a everyone in the vehicle safe:
treated with salt or sand. curve or an overpass can remain icy . Turn on the hazard warning
Drive with caution, whatever the when the surrounding roads are
flashers.
condition. Accelerate gently so clear. Avoid sudden steering
traction is not lost. Accelerating too maneuvers and braking while . Tie a red cloth to an outside
quickly causes the wheels to spin on ice. mirror.
and makes the surface under the Turn off cruise control on slippery
tires slick, so there is even less surfaces. { WARNING
traction.
Snow can trap engine exhaust
Try not to break the fragile traction. under the vehicle. This may
If you accelerate too fast, the drive cause exhaust gases to get
wheels will spin and polish the inside. Engine exhaust contains
surface under the tires even more. carbon monoxide (CO) which
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See wheels to free the vehicle when
cause unconsciousness and even “Climate Control Systems” in stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
death. the Index.
If stuck too severely for the traction
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about system to free the vehicle, turn the
carbon monoxide, see Engine traction system off and use the
. Clear away snow from around
Exhaust on page 9‑25. rocking method. See Traction
the base of your vehicle,
Control System (TCS) on
especially any that is blocking
page 9‑37.
the exhaust pipe. To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
. Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does the vehicle and then shut the engine { WARNING
not collect there. off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this If the vehicle's tires spin at high
. Open a window about 5 cm until help arrives but only when you speed, they can explode, and you
(2 in) on the side of the feel really uncomfortable from the or others could be injured. The
vehicle that is away from the cold. Moving about to keep warm vehicle can overheat, causing an
wind to bring in fresh air. also helps. engine compartment fire or other
. Fully open the air outlets on damage. Spin the wheels as little
If it takes some time for help to
or under the instrument as possible and avoid going
arrive, now and then when you run
panel. the engine, push the accelerator above 56 km/h (35 mph).
. Adjust the climate control pedal slightly so the engine runs
system to a setting that faster than the idle speed. This
circulates the air inside the keeps the battery charged to restart
vehicle and set the fan speed the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
(Continued) as possible to save fuel.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits WARNING (Continued)

it Out
It is very important to know how
Turn the steering wheel left and much weight the vehicle can vehicle handles. This could
right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the cause loss of control and a
front wheels. Turn off any traction crash. Overloading can also
vehicle capacity weight and
system. Shift back and forth shorten the life of the vehicle.
between R (Reverse) and a low includes the weight of all
forward gear, spinning the wheels occupants, cargo and all
as little as possible. To prevent nonfactory-installed options. Tire and Loading Information
transmission wear, wait until the Two labels on the vehicle show Label
wheels stop spinning before shifting how much weight it may
gears. Release the accelerator properly carry, the Tire and
pedal while shifting, and press Loading Information label and
lightly on the accelerator pedal the Certification label.
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions { WARNING
causes a rocking motion that could Do not load the vehicle any
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
heavier than the Gross
might need to be towed out. If the Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle does need to be towed out, (GVWR), or either the
see Towing the Vehicle on maximum front or rear Gross
page 10‑88. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Label Example
This can cause systems to A vehicle-specific Tire and
break and change the way the Loading Information label is
(Continued) attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver Rating (GAWR) for the front and there will be five 150 lb
door open, the label is attached rear axle. See “Certification passengers in your vehicle,
near the door lock post. The Tire Label” later in this section. the amount of available cargo
and Loading Information label and luggage load capacity is
Steps for Determining Correct
shows the number of occupant 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
Load Limit
seating positions (1), and the = 650 lbs).
maximum vehicle capacity 1. Locate the statement “The
5. Determine the combined
weight (2) in kilograms and combined weight of
weight of luggage and cargo
pounds. occupants and cargo should
being loaded on the vehicle.
The Tire and Loading never exceed XXX kg or
That weight may not safely
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
Information label also shows the exceed the available cargo
placard.
tire size of the original and luggage load capacity
equipment tires (3) and the 2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4.
recommended cold tire inflation weight of the driver and
6. If your vehicle will be towing
pressures (4). For more passengers that will be riding
a trailer, the load from your
information on tires and inflation in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to
see Tires on page 10‑49 and 3. Subtract the combined your vehicle. Consult this
Tire Pressure on page 10‑56. weight of the driver and manual to determine how this
There is also important loading passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo
information on the Certification XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity of
label. It tells you the Gross 4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) the available amount of cargo See Trailer Towing (Except ZL1)
and the Gross Axle Weight and luggage load capacity. on page 9‑57 or Trailer Towing
For example, if the “XXX” (ZL1) on page 9‑58 for important
amount equals 1400 lbs and
information on towing a trailer,

towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
Example 1 (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
Example 1 = 453 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (750 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight =
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs).
(300 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
3. Available Occupant and Loading Information label for
Cargo Weight = 317 kg specific information about the
(700 lbs). vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined Rating (GVWR). The GVWR

weight of the driver, passengers, includes the weight of the WARNING (Continued)
and cargo should never exceed vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cause loss of control and a
the vehicle's capacity weight. cargo. Never exceed the GVWR crash. Overloading can also
for the vehicle, or the Gross shorten the life of the vehicle.
Certification Label
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
either the front or rear axle.
If you put things inside the
And, if there is a heavy load, it vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
should be spread out. See packages, or anything
“Steps for Determining Correct else — they will go as fast as the
Load Limit” earlier in this vehicle goes. If you have to stop
section. or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any { WARNING
heavier than the Gross Things inside the vehicle can
Label Example Vehicle Weight Rating strike and injure people in a
A vehicle-specific Certification (GVWR), or either the sudden stop or turn, or in a
label is attached to the vehicle's maximum front or rear Gross crash.
center pillar (B-pillar). With the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
. Put things in the cargo
driver door open, the label is
break and change the way the area of the vehicle. In the
attached near the door lock
vehicle handles. This could cargo area, put them as
post. The label tells the gross
weight capacity of the vehicle, (Continued) (Continued)
called the Gross Vehicle Weight

. Do not let the engine labor.
WARNING (Continued) Starting and Never lug the engine in high
Operating gear at low speeds. With a
far forward as possible. manual transmission, shift to
Try to spread the weight New Vehicle Break-In the next lower gear. This rule
evenly. applies at all times, not just
Notice: Follow these during the break-in period.
. Never stack heavier recommended guidelines during
things, like suitcases,
. Do not participate in racing
the first 2 414 km (1,500 mi) of
inside the vehicle so that events, sport driving
driving this vehicle. Parts have a
schools, or similar activities
some of them are above break-in period and performance
during this break-in period.
the tops of the seats. will be better in the long run.
. Check engine oil with every
. Do not leave an . For the first
refueling and add if
unsecured child restraint 2 414 km (1,500 mi):
necessary. Oil and fuel
in the vehicle. . Avoid full throttle starts and consumption may be higher
abrupt stops. than normal during the first
. Secure loose items in the
. Do not exceed 4000 2 414 km (1,500 mi).
vehicle.
engine rpm. . To break in new tires, drive at
. Do not leave a seat folded moderate speeds and avoid
down unless needed.
. Avoid driving at any one
constant speed, fast or slow. hard cornering for the first
322 km (200 mi). New tires do
. Do not drive above not have maximum traction
129 km/h (80 mph). and may tend to slip.
. Avoid downshifting to brake . New brake linings also need
or slow the vehicle when the a break-in period. Avoid
engine speed will exceed making hard stops during
4,000 rpm.
the first 322 km (200 mi). This Ignition Positions To shift out of P (Park), turn the
is recommended every time ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
brake linings are replaced. brake pedal.
. Should the vehicle be used 1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/
for racing or competitive OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,
driving (after break-in), the turn the ignition switch to LOCK/
rear axle lubricant must be OFF to turn the engine off. Retained
replaced before hand. Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
See Racing or Other Competitive active. See Retained Accessory
Driving on page 9‑6. Power (RAP) on page 9‑21.
This is the only position from which
Front Fascia the key can be removed. This locks
the steering wheel, ignition, and
The vehicle is equipped with a front automatic transmission.
fascia which has minimal ground The ignition switch has four different
clearance. On vehicles with an automatic
positions. transmission, the shift lever must be
Use care when approaching curbs, Notice: Using a tool to force the in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
bumps or objects on road surfaces key to turn in the ignition could to the LOCK/OFF position.
and avoid them when possible. cause damage to the switch or Do not turn the engine off when the
break the key. Use the correct vehicle is moving. This will cause a
key, make sure it is all the way in, loss of power assist in the brake
and turn it only with your hand. and steering systems and disable
If the key cannot be turned by the airbags.
hand, see your dealer.
The ignition switch can bind in the
The key must be fully extended to LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
start the vehicle. turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from right ventilation fan and 12-volt power
to left while turning the key to ACC/ { WARNING outlet, as well as to display some
ACCESSORY. If this does not work, warning and indicator lights. This
then the vehicle needs service. Turning off the vehicle while position can also be used for
moving may cause loss of power service and diagnostics, and to
If the vehicle must be shut off in an assist in the brake and steering
emergency: verify the proper operation of the
systems and disable the airbags. malfunction indicator lamp as may
1. Brake using a firm and steady While driving, only shut the be required for emission inspection
pressure. Do not pump the vehicle off in an emergency. purposes. The transmission is also
brakes repeatedly. This may unlocked in this position on
deplete power assist, requiring automatic transmission vehicles.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
increased brake pedal force.
and must be shut off while driving, The battery could be drained if the
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This turn the ignition to ACC/ key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
can be done while the vehicle is ACCESSORY. or ON/RUN position with the engine
moving. After shifting to neutral, off. The vehicle might not start if the
2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
continue to firmly apply the battery is allowed to drain for an
position provides power to some of
brakes and steer the vehicle to a extended period of time.
the electrical accessories. It unlocks
safe location.
the steering wheel and ignition. To 4 (START): This position starts the
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift move the key from ACC/ engine. When the engine starts,
to P (Park) with an automatic ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, push release the key. The ignition switch
transmission, or Neutral with a in the key and then turn it to will return to ON/RUN for normal
manual transmission. Turn the LOCK/OFF. driving.
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
3 (ON/RUN): The ignition switch A warning tone sounds when the
4. Set the parking brake. See stays in this position when the driver door is opened if the ignition
Parking Brake on page 9‑35. engine is running. This position can is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the
be used to operate the electrical
accessories, including the
key is in the ignition. If the ignition uncharged battery or a battery with Notice: Do not try to shift to
becomes difficult to turn, see Keys low voltage, try charging or jump P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
on page 2‑1. starting the battery. See Jump If you do, you could damage the
Starting on page 10‑85. transmission. Shift to P (Park)
Key Lock Release only when the vehicle is stopped.
If charging or jump starting the
battery does not work, locate the Manual Transmission
hole below the ignition lock. Insert a
flat bladed tool or another key from The shift lever should be in Neutral
the key chain into the opening. and the parking brake engaged.
When the lever can be felt, actuate Hold the clutch pedal down to the
the lever toward the driver and floor and start the engine. The
remove the key from the ignition. vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down.
Starting the Engine Starting Procedure
Place the transmission in the 1. With your foot off the accelerator
proper gear. pedal, turn the ignition key to
START. When the engine starts,
Automatic Transmission let go of the key. The idle speed
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission are equipped with an Move the shift lever to P (Park) or will go down as the engine
electronic key lock release system. N (Neutral). The engine will not start warms. Do not race the engine
The key lock release is designed to in any other position. To restart the immediately after starting it.
prevent ignition key removal unless vehicle when it is already moving, Allow the oil to warm up and
the shift lever is in P (Park). use N (Neutral) only. lubricate all moving parts.
The key lock release is always The vehicle has a
functional except in the case of an Computer-Controlled Cranking
uncharged or low voltage (less than System. This feature assists in
9-volt) battery. If the vehicle has an starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is 2. If the engine does not start after Notice: If you add electrical parts
turned to the START position, five to 10 seconds, especially in or accessories, you could change
and then released when the very cold weather (below −18°C the way the engine operates. Any
engine begins cranking, the or 0°F), it could be flooded with resulting damage would not be
engine will continue cranking for too much gasoline. Push the covered by the vehicle warranty.
a few seconds or until the accelerator pedal all the way to See Add-On Electrical Equipment
vehicle starts. If the engine does the floor and hold it there as you on page 9‑59.
not start and the key is held in hold the key in START for a
START for many seconds, maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at Engine Heater
cranking stops after 15 seconds least 15 seconds between each
to prevent cranking motor try, to allow the cranking motor The engine coolant heater,
damage. To prevent gear to cool. When the engine starts, if available, can help in cold weather
damage, this system also let go of the key and accelerator. conditions at or below −18°C (0°F)
prevents cranking if the engine If the vehicle starts briefly but for easier starting and better fuel
is already running. Engine then stops again, repeat the economy during engine warm-up.
cranking can be stopped by procedure. This clears the extra Plug in the coolant heater at least
turning the ignition switch to gasoline from the engine. Do not four hours before starting the
ACC/ACCESSORY or race the engine immediately vehicle. An internal thermostat in
LOCK/OFF. after starting it. Operate the the plug-end of the cord will prevent
engine and transmission gently engine coolant heater operation at
Notice: Cranking the engine for temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
long periods of time, by returning until the oil warms up and
the key to the START position lubricates all moving parts.
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
Using the Engine Coolant Retained Accessory

Heater { WARNING Power (RAP)
1. Turn off the engine. Plugging the cord into an These vehicle accessories may be
2. Open the hood and unwrap the ungrounded outlet could cause an used for up to 10 minutes after the
electrical cord. electrical shock. Also, the wrong engine is turned off:
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
. Audio System
could be seriously injured. Plug . Power Windows
the cord into a properly grounded . Sunroof (if equipped)
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a The power windows and sunroof will
heavy-duty three-prong extension continue to work for up to
cord rated for at least 15 amps. 10 minutes or until any door is
opened. The radio will work when
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
4. Before starting the engine, be ACCESSORY. Once the key is
sure to unplug and store the turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
cord as it was before to keep it the radio will continue to work for
away from moving engine parts. 10 minutes, or until the driver door is
The electrical cord is on the If you do not it could be opened or the key is removed from
passenger side of the engine damaged. the ignition.
compartment, next to the engine The length of time the heater should
compartment fuse block for remain plugged in depends on
V6 models. several factors. Ask a dealer in the
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded area where you will be parking the
110-volt AC outlet. vehicle for the best advice on this.
Shifting Into Park Leaving the Vehicle with the If you have to leave the vehicle with
Engine Running the engine running, the vehicle must
Use this procedure to shift into be in P (Park) and the parking
P (Park): brake set.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
{ WARNING
Release the button and check that
set the parking brake. It can be dangerous to leave the the shift lever cannot be moved out
See Parking Brake on page 9‑35 vehicle with the engine running. of P (Park).
for more information. It could overheat and catch fire.
Torque Lock
2. Hold the button on the shift lever It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully Torque lock is when the weight of
and push the lever toward the
in P (Park) with the parking brake the vehicle puts too much force on
front of the vehicle into P (Park).
the parking pawl in the
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
transmission. This happens when
4. Remove the key. Do not leave the vehicle when the parking on a hill and shifting the
engine is running. If you have left transmission into P (Park) is not
the engine running, the vehicle done properly and then it is difficult
can move suddenly. You or others to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
could be injured. To be sure the torque lock, set the parking brake
vehicle will not move, even when and then shift into P (Park). To find
you are on fairly level ground, out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
always set the parking brake and listed previously.
move the shift lever to P (Park). If torque lock does occur, the
See Shifting Into Park on vehicle may need to be pushed
page 9‑22. If you are towing a uphill by another vehicle to relieve
trailer, see Driving Characteristics the parking pawl pressure, so you
and Towing Tips on page 9‑54. can shift out of P (Park).
Shifting out of Park 2. Turn the key to the ON/RUN moved from the P (Park) position.
position. If the battery has lost power, the
This vehicle is equipped with an shift lever cannot be moved from
electronic shift lock control system. 3. Release the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑35. P (Park) unless the shift lock manual
The shift lock release is release is disengaged manually.
designed to: 4. Press the shift lever button.
To access the shift lock manual
. Prevent ignition key removal 5. Move the shift lever to the release:
unless the shift lever is in desired position.
P (Park) with the shift lever 1. Apply the parking brake.
button fully released. If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
. Prevent movement of the shift
button.
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN and the 2. Hold the brake pedal down and
brake pedal is applied. press the shift lever button
again.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an 3. Move the shift lever to the
uncharged or low voltage (less than desired position.
9-volt) battery. If the shift lever still cannot be
If the vehicle has an uncharged moved from P (Park), see “Shift
battery or a battery with low voltage, Lock Manual Release” following.
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on Shift Lock Manual Release 2. Pull the passenger side console
page 10‑85. The transmission has an electric trim away from the front half of
To shift out of P (Park): park lock called a shift lock manual the console to expose the shift
release. The key must be in the ON/ lever mechanism.
1. Apply the brake pedal. RUN position, and the brake pedal
pressed so the shift lever can be
8. Place the console trim panel in Parking over Things

the original position, aligning the
fasteners on the trim panel with
That Burn
the slots in the console. Press in
the side trim until it clicks in { WARNING
place.
Things that can burn could touch
The shift lever locks if it is moved hot exhaust parts under the
back to the P (Park) position. vehicle and ignite. Do not park
3. Remove the retainer and the over papers, leaves, dry grass,
Parking (Manual or other things that can burn.
shift lock manual release cover.
Transmission)
4. Push and hold the manual
release lever toward the rear of If the vehicle has a manual Active Fuel Management®
the vehicle. transmission, before getting out of
the vehicle, move the shift lever into Vehicles with V8 engines and an
5. Press the select button and R (Reverse), and firmly apply the automatic transmission, except ZL1,
move the shift lever to the parking brake. Once the shift lever have Active Fuel Management®.
N (Neutral) position. has been placed into R (Reverse) This system allows the engine to
6. Release the lever. with the clutch pedal pressed in, operate on either all or half of its
turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF, cylinders, depending on the driving
7. After the vehicle has been conditions.
remove the key, and release the
moved, align the shift lock
clutch.
manual release cover plate and
install the retainer so the If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
automatic transmission can is pulling a trailer, see Driving
operate properly. Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑54.
When less power is required, such Engine Exhaust

as cruising at a constant vehicle WARNING (Continued)
speed, the system will operate in
the half cylinder mode, allowing the { WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
vehicle to achieve better fuel
economy. When greater power Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
demands are required, such as monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
accelerating from a stop, passing, seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
or merging onto a freeway, the can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
system will maintain full-cylinder even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
operation. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic P (Park): This position locks the

rear wheels. It is the best position to
While Parked Transmission use when starting the engine
It is better not to park with the because the vehicle cannot move
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
engine running. easily.
displays the current gear selected in
If the vehicle is left with the engine the lower left corner. When Sport
running, follow the proper steps to Mode is active, an S is displayed. { WARNING
be sure the vehicle will not move. If Manual Mode or Electronic Range
See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑22 Select (ERS) Mode are active, an M It is dangerous to get out of the
and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑25. and the current gear selected (Tap vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
If the vehicle has a manual Shift) or the maximum gear allowed in P (Park) with the parking brake
transmission, see Parking (Manual (ERS Mode) are displayed next to firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Transmission) on page 9‑24. the M. Do not leave the vehicle when the
If parking on a hill and pulling a engine is running. If you have left
trailer, see Driving Characteristics the engine running, the vehicle
and Towing Tips on page 9‑54. can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑22 and Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips
on page 9‑54.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in To rock the vehicle back and forth to Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
P (Park) before starting the engine. get out of snow, ice, or sand without N (Neutral) with the engine
The vehicle has an automatic damaging the transmission, see If running at high speed may
transmission shift lock control the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11. damage the transmission. The
system. The regular brake must be N (Neutral): In this position, the repairs would not be covered by
fully applied first and then the shift engine does not connect with the the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
lever button pressed before shifting wheels. To restart the engine when engine is not running at high
from P (Park) when the ignition key the vehicle is already moving, use speed when shifting the vehicle.
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out N (Neutral) only. Also, use D (Drive): This position is for
of P (Park), ease pressure on the N (Neutral) when the vehicle is normal driving. It provides the best
shift lever, then push the shift lever being towed. fuel economy. When the ZL1 is in
all the way into P (Park) as you D (Drive), the first shift after start will
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and { WARNING be from 1 (First) gear. Following
starts will begin in 2 (Second) gear.
move the shift lever into another
Shifting into a drive gear while the If more power is needed for
gear. See Shifting out of Park on
page 9‑23. engine is running at high speed is passing, and the vehicle is:
dangerous. Unless your foot is
R (Reverse): Use this gear to firmly on the brake pedal, the
. Going less than 56 km/h
back up. vehicle could move very rapidly. (35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) You could lose control and hit
while the vehicle is moving people or objects. Do not shift . Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
forward could damage the into a drive gear while the engine more, push the accelerator all
transmission. The repairs would is running at high speed. the way down.
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
Powertrain Braking (V6 and M (Manual Mode): This position transmission may remain in a gear
V8 Engines Except ZL1) allows the driver to select gears longer than it would in the normal
When driving on steep descents appropriate for current driving driving mode based on throttle input
with the shift lever in D (Drive) or conditions. and vehicle lateral acceleration.
M (Manual Mode) where frequent With the shift lever in M (Manual If there is a rapid reduction in
braking is required, the transmission Mode) position, vehicles with axle throttle from a heavy throttle
will shift down a gear to help hold code GW8 will enter ERS Mode. position, the transmission will
vehicle speed and reduce brake See Manual Mode on page 9‑29. maintain the current gear up to near
wear. If the driver continues to press redline rpm. While braking, the
With the shift lever in M (Manual transmission will automatically
the brake, the transmission will Mode) position, and without using
downshift until 3 (Third) gear is downshift to the next lower gear
the Tap Shift controls on the keeping engine speed above
reached. steering wheel, vehicles with any approximately 3000 rpm. If the
If the brake is released for some axle other than GW8 will be in Sport vehicle is then driven for a short
time, the transmission will upshift a Mode. Sport Mode provides firmer, time at a steady speed, and without
gear. If the road levels out and the quicker shifting. The transmission high cornering loads, the
accelerator pedal is pressed, the will shift automatically until the Tap transmission will up-shift one gear
transmission will upshift until the Shift controls are used. Tap Shift at a time, until 6 (Sixth) gear. After
appropriate gear is reached. activates driver manual gear shifting to 6 (Sixth) gear, or coming
Notice: If the vehicle seems to selection. See Manual Mode on to a complete stop, the transmission
accelerate slowly or not shift page 9‑29. will return to normal Sport Mode
gears when you go faster, and V6 Models without Axle GW8, V8 shifting.
you continue to drive the vehicle Models Except ZL1 ZL1
that way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle While driving in Sport Mode, if Tap While driving in Sport Mode, if Tap
serviced right away. Shift has not been activated, the Shift has not been activated, the
transmission determines when the transmission determines when the
vehicle is being driven in a vehicle is being driven in a
competitive manner. The competitive manner, in a straight
line or while turning. The a lower gear to near redline rpm, to 2. Press the plus/minus paddles on
transmission may remain in a gear aid in vehicle handling balance and the back of the steering wheel,
longer than it would in the normal to improve corner exit speeds. to increase or decrease the gear
driving mode based on throttle input range available.
and vehicle lateral acceleration. Manual Mode When you shift from D (Drive) to
If there is a rapid reduction in M (Manual Mode), the transmission
throttle from a heavy throttle Electronic Range Select
will shift to a lower gear range. The
position, the transmission will (ERS) Mode highest gear available for this range
maintain the current gear up to Vehicles with axle code GW8 have is displayed next to the M in the
approximately 4600 rpm. While an ERS Mode. ERS Mode allows DIC. The number displayed in the
braking, the transmission will you to choose the top-gear limit of DIC is the highest gear that the
automatically downshift to the next the transmission with fully automatic transmission will be allowed to
lower gear keeping engine speed gear selection. This can help control operate in. This means that all
below approximately 3000 rpm. the vehicle's speed while driving gears below that number are
If the vehicle is then driven for a downhill or towing a trailer. The available. For example, when
short time at a steady speed, and vehicle has an electronic shift 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,
without high cornering loads, the position indicator within the 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
transmission will up-shift one gear instrument cluster. When using the automatically shifted by the vehicle.
at a time, until 6 (Sixth) gear. After ERS mode a number will display The transmission will not shift into
shifting to 6 (Sixth) gear, or coming next to the M, indicating the current 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) paddle is
to a complete stop, the transmission maximum gear allowed. Vehicles used or you shift back into D (Drive).
will return to normal sport mode with this feature have indicators on
shifting. While in M (Manual Mode), the
the steering wheel. The controls are transmission will prevent shifting to
If the vehicle detects aggressive on the back of the steering wheel. a lower gear range if the engine
cornering, even without a heavy To use this feature: speed is too high. The DIC will still
application of the throttle, the indicate the lower gear range
transmission will downshift and hold 1. Move the shift lever to
M (Manual Mode). selected, but the transmission will
not initiate the downshift until the the right control to upshift. The DIC
vehicle has met a minimum speed display indicates the gear the
requirement. vehicle is in.
Tap Shift While in M (Manual Mode), the
transmission will prevent shifting to
a lower gear if the engine speed is
too high. If the tap down − (Minus) English
paddle is held while the vehicle
slows down, the M in the DIC will
flash, and the downshift will be
allowed when vehicle speed is low
enough. Continuing to hold the tap
down − (Minus) paddle will not
cause the transmission to continue
downshifting. Each downshift must Metric
be requested separately by ZL1 vehicles equipped with a
releasing and reapplying the tap Head-Up Display (HUD) also have
down − (Minus) paddle. shift timing lights across the top of
Vehicles with any axle other than
GW8 have a Tap Shift Mode. Tap the display. As you approach a shift
Shift allows the driver to manually point, the rows of lights grow closer
control the automatic transmission. together. The transmission should
To use Tap Shift, the shift lever must be shifted before the lights come
be in M (Manual Mode). Vehicles together in the middle of the display.
with this feature have indicators on If the lights begin flashing, you have
the steering wheel. The controls are exceeded the shift point. Shift
on the back of the steering wheel. immediately.
Tap the left control to downshift, and
See Driver Information Center (DIC) The driver may use this for sport When coasting to a stop in Tap Shift
on page 5‑25 and Head-Up Display driving or when climbing or Mode, the V6 transmission will
(HUD) on page 5‑28. descending hills, to stay in gear automatically downshift to 1 (First)
When in Tap Shift Mode, the driver longer, or to downshift for more gear, and the V8 transmission will
can exit Tap Shift by holding the power or engine braking. The automatically downshift to
right (upshift) control for transmission will only allow you to 2 (Second) gear. A 1 (First) gear
two seconds. The transmission will shift into gears appropriate for the start can be selected using the Tap
return to automatic shifting. vehicle speed and engine Shift controls on V8 models. When
revolutions per minute (rpm). The accelerating from a stop, the
The driver may choose to briefly transmission will not automatically transmissions will hold these gears
enter Tap Shift Mode while in shift to the next higher gear if the until the driver manually selects
D (Drive). Tapping either the upshift engine rpm is too high. If shifting is higher gears using the Tap Shift
or downshift control will place the prevented for any reason, the controls.
transmission in Tap Shift Mode. The message SHIFT DENIED will
driver may then exit Tap Shift Mode When accelerating the vehicle from
appear in the DIC, indicating that a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
by holding the upshift control for the transmission has not shifted
two seconds. The system will return you may want to shift into
gears. While in the Tap Shift Mode, 2 (Second) gear. A higher gear ratio
to automatic shifting after the transmission will not
10 seconds of cruising at a steady allows you to gain more traction on
automatically downshift on hard slippery surfaces. ZL1 vehicles may
speed, or when the vehicle comes acceleration.
to a stop. also be shifted into 3 (Third) gear.
Manual Transmission Shift Pattern (V6 Engine) You can shift into 1 (First) when you
are going less than 64 km/h
Shift Pattern (V8 Engines) (40 mph). If you come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into
1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral
and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift
into 1 (First).
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
as you let up on the accelerator
pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
These are the shift patterns for the 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and
six-speed manual transmissions. 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
To operate the transmission: 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) the
same way you do for 2 (Second).
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly you press the accelerator pedal.
let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator One to Four Shift Message After shifting to 4 (Fourth), you may
pedal and press the brake pedal. (V8 Only) downshift to a lower gear if you
Just before the vehicle stops, press prefer.
the clutch pedal and the brake Notice: Forcing the shift lever
pedal, and shift to Neutral. into any gear except 4 (Fourth)
Neutral: Use this position when when the 1 — 4 SHIFT message
you start or idle the engine. The comes on may damage the
shift lever is in Neutral when it is transmission. Shift only from
centered in the shift pattern, not in 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when the
any gear. message comes on.
R (Reverse): To back up, press This message will come on when:
down the clutch pedal and shift into . The engine coolant temperature
R (Reverse). On V8 models, apply is higher than 76°C (169°F).
pressure to get the lever past
5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) into Driver Information Center . The vehicle is accelerating from
R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch a stop and going 24 to 31 km/h
When this message comes on, you (15 to 19 mph).
pedal slowly while pressing the
can only shift from 1 (First) to
accelerator pedal. . The vehicle is at 21 percent
4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to
2 (Second). The message will be throttle or less.
displayed in the Driver Information
Center.
You must complete the shift into
4 (Fourth) to turn off this feature.
This helps you get the best possible
fuel economy.
ZL1 vehicles equipped with a Brakes

Head-Up Display (HUD) also have
shift timing lights across the top of
the display. As you approach a shift Antilock Brake
point, the rows of lights grow closer System (ABS)
together. The transmission should
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
English be shifted before the lights come
System (ABS), an advanced
together in the middle of the display.
electronic braking system that helps
If the lights begin flashing, you have
prevent a braking skid.
exceeded the shift point. Shift
immediately. When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
checks itself. A momentary motor or
on page 5‑25 and Head-Up Display
clicking noise might be heard while
(HUD) on page 5‑28.
Metric this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑21.
If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
to each wheel, as required, faster normal.
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard. ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many To apply the parking brake, pull up
As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help
computer keeps receiving updates on the parking brake handle. It is
more than even the very best not necessary to push in on the
on wheel speed and controls braking.
braking pressure accordingly. release button while applying the
parking brake. If the ignition is in the
Remember: ABS does not change ON/RUN position, the brake system
the time needed to get a foot up to warning light will come on. See
the brake pedal or always decrease Brake System Warning Light on
stopping distance. If you get too page 5‑20.
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to To release the parking brake:
apply the brakes if that vehicle 1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Pull the parking brake handle up Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA)
until you can press the release
button. This vehicle has a brake assist Manual transmission vehicles have
feature designed to assist the driver a Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature,
3. Hold the release button in as in stopping or decreasing vehicle which may be useful when the
you move the brake handle all speed in emergency driving vehicle is stopped on a grade. This
the way down. conditions. This feature uses the feature is designed to prevent the
Notice: Driving with the parking stability system hydraulic brake vehicle from rolling, either forward or
brake on can overheat the brake control module to supplement the rearward, during vehicle drive off.
system and cause premature power brake system under HSA will be automatically activated
wear or damage to brake system conditions where the driver has after completely stopping the
parts. Make sure that the parking quickly and forcefully applied the vehicle, with the clutch in, on a
brake is fully released and the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly grade. During the transition from
brake warning light is off before stop or slow down the vehicle. The releasing the brake pedal to
driving. stability system hydraulic brake accelerating to drive off on a grade,
control module increases brake HSA holds the braking pressure to
Driving with the parking brake
pressure at each corner of the prevent rolling. The brakes will
applied will cause a warning chime
vehicle until the ABS activates. automatically release when the
to sound and the RELEASE
Minor brake pedal pulsation or accelerator pedal is applied within
PARKING BRAKE message to
pedal movement during this time is the two-second window. HSA will
appear in the DIC. The message will
normal and the driver should not activate if the vehicle is in a
remain on until:
continue to apply the brake pedal as drive gear and facing downhill or if
. The parking brake is released. the driving situation dictates. The the vehicle is facing uphill and in
. The vehicle comes to a stop. brake assist feature will R (Reverse).
automatically disengage when the
If you are towing a trailer and brake pedal is released or brake
parking on a hill, see Driving pedal pressure is quickly
Characteristics and Towing Tips on decreased.
page 9‑54.
Ride Control Systems TCS automatically comes on

whenever the vehicle is started. To
limit wheel spin, especially in
Traction Control slippery road conditions, the system
System (TCS) should always be left on, but it may
be necessary to turn the system off
The vehicle has a Traction Control
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
flashes when the TCS is limiting or snow and rocking the vehicle is
The system utilizes engine and
wheel spin. required. Also, turn TCS off while in
braking controls to control wheel
deep snow or on loose gravel, to
spin during acceleration at all The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light assist vehicle motion at lower
driving speeds for maximum driver comes on solid if there is a problem speeds. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
control regardless of conditions. with the traction control system. See on page 9‑11. See also Winter
When the system senses impending Traction Control System (TCS)/ Driving on page 9‑10 for information
wheel slip during acceleration, it StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑22. on using TCS when driving in snowy
signals the throttle control to reduce If the light stays on, see your dealer or icy conditions.
drive wheel torque. Under extreme for service. When the TCS/
situations, such as going from StabiliTrak warning light is on, the
pavement to ice during acceleration, system will not limit wheel spin.
the system will selectively apply the Adjust your driving accordingly.
brakes to maintain control. The
system may be heard or felt while it
is working, but this is normal.
To turn the system off, press and

release the TCS/StabiliTrak button
on the console in front of the shift
lever.
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer

the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.
If cruise control is being used when
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
The TCS warning light comes on Press the cruise control button to When the system activates, the
when the TCS is off. Press and reengage when road conditions TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
release the button again to turn the allow. See Cruise Control on flashes on the instrument cluster.
system back on. For information on page 9‑44. You may also hear a noise or feel
turning StabiliTrak off and on, see vibration in the brake pedal. This is
“StabiliTrak System” following. normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the intended direction.
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has an electronic
stability control system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that The Traction Control System (TCS)/
assists with directional control of the StabiliTrak button is on the console
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. in front of the shift lever.
If there is a problem detected with
StabiliTrak activates when the StabiliTrak, a SERVICE
computer senses a discrepancy STABILITRAK message displays on
between the intended path and the the DIC and the StabiliTrak/TCS
direction the vehicle is actually warning light on the instrument
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively cluster comes on. When this
applies braking pressure at any one message and warning light display,
the system is not operational.
Driving should be adjusted If the system has been turned off, suspension performance. These
accordingly. See Ride Control press and release the TCS/ modes are for use at a closed
System Messages on page 5‑38 StabiliTrak button to turn both course race track and are not
and Traction Control System (TCS)/ systems back on. intended for use on public roads.
StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑22. They will not compensate for a
Engine Drag Control (EDC) driver’s inexperience or lack of
EDC improves vehicle stability by familiarity with the race track.
sensing if there is a difference in Drivers who prefer to allow the
speed between the free rolling front system to have more control of the
wheels and the rear drive wheels engine, brake, and suspension are
that often occurs when the driver advised to turn the normal TCS and
takes their foot off the accelerator StabiliTrak systems on.
pedal on slippery surfaces (snow, Notice: Do not attempt to shift
ice, etc.). When this is detected, when the drive wheels are
EDC sends more torque to the rear spinning and do not have
wheels to make sure all four wheels traction. This may cause damage
are spinning at similar speeds, to the transmission. Damage
making the vehicle more stable. caused by misuse of the vehicle
is not covered by the vehicle
StabiliTrak comes on automatically Competitive Driving Mode warranty. See the warranty book
whenever the vehicle is started. The for additional information.
system should be left on to help Competitive Driving Mode,
assist with directional control of the Performance Traction Management Competitive Driving Mode (SS
vehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to be (PTM), and Launch Control are and ZL1 Convertible Only)
turned off, press and hold the TCS/ systems designed to allow
StabiliTrak button until the Traction increased performance while Competitive Driving Mode allows full
Control Off light and the StabiliTrak accelerating and/or cornering. This engine power while the StabiliTrak
Off light come on in the instrument is accomplished by regulating and system helps maintain directional
cluster. TCS will also be turned off. optimizing the engine, brakes, and control of the vehicle by selective
brake application. In this mode, TCS This optional handling mode can be
is off and Launch Control is selected by pressing the TCS/
available. Adjust your driving style StabiliTrak button on the console
to account for the available engine quickly two times. The appropriate
power. See “Launch Control (V8 message displays in the Driver
with Manual Transmissions Only)” Information Center (DIC). See Ride
later in this section. Control System Messages on
page 5‑38.
When the TCS/StabiliTrak button is
pressed again, the TCS and
StabiliTrak systems are on. The
appropriate message displays
briefly in the DIC.
These lights are on when the
Performance Traction vehicle is in the PTM Mode.
Management (PTM) (ZL1 This optional handling mode can be
Coupe Only) selected by pressing the TCS/
PTM integrates the TCS, StabiliTrak button on the console
StabiliTrak, and Selective Ride quickly two times. The appropriate
Control systems to provide message displays in the DIC. See
improved and consistent Ride Control System Messages on
These lights are on when the page 5‑38.
vehicle is in the Competitive performance when cornering. The
Driving Mode. amount of available engine power is To experience the performance
based on the mode selected, track benefit of this system, after entering
conditions, driver skill, and the a curve and at the point where the
radius of each corner. driver would normally start to
increase acceleration, the
accelerator pedal can be fully
pressed. The PTM system will PERF TRACTION 1 – WET /

. Requires more driving skill than
modify the level of engine power for ACTIVE HANDLING ON mode 2.
a smooth and consistent corner exit. . Dry conditions only.
. Intended for all driver skill levels.
. Wet or damp conditions only —
. StabiliTrak is on and more
not intended for use in heavy engine power is available than in
rain or standing water. mode 2.
. StabiliTrak is on and engine PERF TRACTION 4 – SPORT 2
power is reduced based on / ACTIVE HANDLING OFF
conditions. . For use by drivers who are
PERF TRACTION 2 – DRY / familiar with the track.
ACTIVE HANDLING ON . Requires more driving skill than
To select a mode while in PTM, modes 2 or 3.
. For use by less experienced
push the Selective Ride Control/
drivers or while learning a new . Dry conditions only.
PTM − TOUR or + SPORT button
track. . StabiliTrak is off and available
on the center console.
. Dry conditions only. engine power is the same as
The PTM system contains five
. StabiliTrak is on and engine mode 3.
modes. These modes are selected
by pressing the Selective Ride power is slightly reduced based PERF TRACTION 5 – RACE /
Control/PTM − TOUR or + SPORT on conditions. ACTIVE HANDLING OFF
button on the center console. The
driver scrolls up or down through
PERF TRACTION 3 – SPORT 1 . For use by drivers who are
modes 1–5 by pressing the − TOUR / ACTIVE HANDLING ON familiar with the track.
or + SPORT button. . For use by drivers who are . Requires more driving skill than
The following is a DIC display familiar with the track. other modes.
description and the recommended . Dry conditions only.
usage of each mode.

. StabiliTrak is off and engine Launch Control is only available Competitive Driving Mode, PTM,
power is available for maximum when the following criteria are met: and Launch Control are systems
cornering speed. designed for a closed course race
. Competitive Driving Mode is
Use mode 5 for most consistent selected or any of the PTM track and not intended for use on
performance during drag strip use. modes are selected. public roads. The systems are not
intended to compensate for lack of
When the TCS/StabiliTrak button is . The vehicle is not moving. driver experience or familiarity with
pressed again, the vehicle exits the race track.
PTM mode and the TCS and
. The steering wheel is pointing
StabiliTrak systems are on. straight. ZL1 Coupe Only
. The clutch is pressed and the Use mode 5 for the most consistent
Launch Control (V8 with vehicle is in 1 (First) gear.
Manual Transmissions Only) performance during drag strip use.
. The accelerator pedal is rapidly
A Launch Control feature is applied to wide open throttle. Limited-Slip Rear Axle
available, within Competitive Driving
Mode or PTM, on vehicles with a The Launch Control feature will Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
manual transmission to allow the initially limit engine speed as the can give more traction on snow,
driver to achieve high levels of driver rapidly applies the accelerator mud, ice, sand, or gravel. When
vehicle acceleration in a straight pedal to wide open throttle. traction is low, this feature allows
line. Launch Control is a form of A smooth, quick release of the the drive wheel with the most
traction control that manages tire clutch, while maintaining the fully traction to move the vehicle. The
spin while launching the vehicle. pressed accelerator pedal, will limited-slip rear axle also gives the
This feature is intended for use manage wheel slip. Complete shifts driver enhanced control when
during closed course race events are described in Manual cornering hard or completing a
where consistent zero to sixty Transmission on page 9‑32. maneuver, such as a lane change.
and quarter mile times are After the vehicle is launched, the
desirable. system continues in Competitive
Driving Mode or PTM.
Selective Ride Control The Selective Ride buttons are on The Selective Ride button indicator
the center console. Press to select lights will not illuminate when any
ZL1 Only the suspension of your choice. The PTM mode is selected. When this
The vehicle has a ride control indicator light will illuminate the mode is selected, pressing the
system called Magnetic Selective current suspension setting. Selective Ride button will change
Ride Control. The system provides TOUR: Use for normal city and the PTM mode and the suspension
the following performance benefits: highway driving. The TOUR button setting will be determined
selects a suspension and Electric automatically. See Competitive
. Reduced Impact Harshness Driving Mode on page 9‑39.
Power Steering (EPS) calibration
. Improved Road Isolation that provides a smooth, soft ride. If a malfunction occurs with the
. Improved High-Speed Stability SPORT: Use where road conditions Selective Ride Control system, the
or personal preference demand appropriate messages will be
. Improved Handling Response displayed in the DIC. See Ride
more control. The SPORT button
. Better Control of Body Ride selects a suspension and EPS Control System Messages on
Motions calibration that provides more “feel,” page 5‑38.
or response to the road conditions.
The setting can be changed at any
time. Based on road conditions,
steering wheel angle, and the
vehicle speed, the system
automatically adjusts to provide the
best handling while providing a
smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
modes will feel similar on a smooth
road. Select a new setting whenever
driving conditions change.
Cruise Control SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the

thumbwheel down to set a speed or
With cruise control, the vehicle can to make the vehicle decelerate.
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more without keeping Setting Cruise Control
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise If 5 is on when not in use, it could
control does not work at speeds get bumped and go into cruise when
below 40 km/h (25 mph). not desired. Keep the cruise control
switch off when cruise is not
{ WARNING being used.
Cruise control can be dangerous 1. Press 5 to turn cruise
where you cannot drive safely at control on.
a steady speed. So, do not use 5 (On/Off): Turns the cruise 2. Get to the speed desired.
the cruise control on winding control system on and off. A white
roads or in heavy traffic. indicator light comes on in the 3. Press the thumbwheel toward
instrument cluster. SET/− and release it.
Cruise control can be dangerous
\ (Cancel): Press to disengage 4. Take your foot off the accelerator
on slippery roads. On such roads,
cruise control without erasing the pedal.
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and set speed from memory. When the cruise control has been
you could lose control. Do not use RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate): set to the desired speed, a green
cruise control on slippery roads. Move the thumbwheel up to make cruise control indicator appears on
the vehicle resume to a previously the instrument cluster.
set speed or to accelerate to a When the brakes are applied, the
higher speed. cruise control shuts off.
Resuming a Set Speed Increasing Speed While Using

. To slow down in small amounts,
Cruise Control press the thumbwheel toward
If the cruise control is set at a SET/− briefly. Each time this is
desired speed and then the brakes If the cruise control system is done, the vehicle goes about
are applied, the cruise control is already activated: 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
disengaged without erasing the set . Press the thumbwheel up toward
speed from memory. Passing Another Vehicle While
RES/+ and hold it until the
Using Cruise Control
The indicator light on the instrument vehicle accelerates to the
cluster goes out when the cruise is desired speed, and then Use the accelerator pedal to
no longer engaged. Once the release it. increase the vehicle speed. When
vehicle speed reaches about you take your foot off the pedal, the
. To increase the speed in small
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press the vehicle will slow down to the
amounts, press the thumbwheel
thumbwheel up toward RES/+ previous set cruise control speed.
up toward RES/+ briefly and
briefly on the steering wheel. The then release it. Each time this is Using Cruise Control on Hills
vehicle returns to the previous set done, the vehicle goes about
speed and stays there. How well the cruise control works
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
on hills depends upon the vehicle's
Reducing Speed While Using speed, load, and the steepness of
Cruise Control the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
If the cruise control system is
accelerator pedal to maintain the
already activated:
vehicle speed. When going
. Press the thumbwheel toward downhill, you might have to brake or
SET/− and hold until the desired shift to a lower gear to maintain the
lower speed is reached, then vehicle speed. When the brakes are
release it. applied the cruise control is
disengaged.
Ending Cruise Control Object Detection WARNING (Continued)

There are three ways to end the
cruise control:
Systems check the area around the vehicle
. To disengage cruise control, and check all mirrors before
Ultrasonic Parking Assist backing.
step lightly on the brake pedal or
clutch. The indicator light on the The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
instrument cluster goes out. (URPA) system assists the driver
with parking and avoiding objects How the System Works
. Press \ on the steering wheel. while in R (Reverse). URPA URPA comes on automatically when
. To turn off cruise control, press operates at speeds less than 8 km/h the shift lever is moved into
5 on the steering wheel. (5 mph). The sensors on the rear R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
bumper detect objects up to 2.5 m to indicate the system is working.
Erasing Speed Memory (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least
URPA operates only at speeds less
The cruise control set speed is 20 cm (8 in) off the ground.
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
erased from memory if 5 is pressed
or if the vehicle is turned off. { WARNING An obstacle is indicated by audible
beeps. The interval between the
The URPA system does not beeps becomes shorter as the
detect children, pedestrians, vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
bicyclists, animals, or objects When the distance is less than
below the bumper or that are too 30 cm (12 in), the beeping is a
close or too far from the vehicle. continuous tone for five seconds.
It is not available at speeds To be detected, objects must be at
greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To least 20 cm (8 in) off the ground and
prevent injury, death, or vehicle below trunk level. Objects must also
damage, even with URPA, always be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear
(Continued)
bumper. The distance objects can ice, and slush. For cleaning
. An object was hanging out of the
be detected may be less during instructions, see Exterior Care trunk during the last drive cycle.
warmer or humid weather. on page 10‑89. Once the object is removed,
URPA will return to normal
Turning the System On and Off . The park assist sensors are operation.
covered by frost or ice. Frost or
The URPA system can be turned on ice can form around and behind
. The bumper is damaged. Take
and off using the infotainment the sensors and may not always the vehicle to your dealer to
system controls. See Vehicle be seen; this can occur after repair the system.
Personalization on page 5‑43. washing the vehicle in cold . Other conditions, such as
When the system is off, PARK weather. The message may not vibrations from a jackhammer or
ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver clear until the frost or ice has the compression of air brakes on
Information Center (DIC). The melted. a very large truck, are affecting
message disappears after a short If the above conditions do not exist, system performance.
period of time. take the vehicle to your dealer to
URPA defaults to the on setting repair the system. Rear Vision
each time the vehicle is started. PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPA Camera (RVC)
When the System Does Not system does not activate due to a Read this entire section before
Seem to Work Properly temporary condition, the message using the RVC system.
displays on the DIC. This can occur
The following messages may be under the following conditions:
displayed on the DIC: . The driver has disabled the
{ WARNING
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: If system. The RVC system does not display
this message occurs, check the children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
following conditions: animals, or any other object
. The ultrasonic sensors are not located outside the camera's field
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear (Continued)
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
Rear Vision Camera Location

WARNING (Continued)
of view, below the bumper,
or under the vehicle. Perceived
distances may be different from
actual distances. Do not back the
vehicle using only the RVC
screen, during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers,
or where there could be cross
traffic. Failure to use proper care
before backing may result in 1. View displayed by the camera.
injury, death, or vehicle damage.
Always check behind and around
The camera is above the license
the vehicle before backing.
plate.
The area displayed by the camera is
The rear vision camera system is limited. It does not display objects
designed to help the driver when that are close to either corner or
backing up by displaying a view of under the bumper and can vary
the area behind the vehicle. When depending on vehicle orientation or
the key is in ON/RUN and the driver road conditions. The distance of the
shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), image that appears on the screen is 1. View displayed by the camera.
the video image automatically different from the actual distance.
appears on the infotainment screen 2. Corner of the rear bumper.
in the center stack. Once the driver The following illustration shows the
shifts out of R (Reverse), the video field of view that the camera
image automatically disappears. provides.
When the System Does Not Fuel

Seem to Work Properly
Use of the recommended fuel is an
The RVC system may not work important part of the proper
properly or display a clear image if: maintenance of this vehicle. To help
. It is dark. keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
. The sun or the beam of
recommend the use of gasoline
headlamps are shining directly
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
into the camera lens.
Gasoline.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
builds up on the camera lens.
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
Clean the lens, rinse it with
enhanced detergency standards The eighth digit of the Vehicle
water, and wipe it with a soft
developed by auto companies. A list Identification Number (VIN) shows
cloth.
of marketers providing TOP TIER the code letter or number that
. The back of the vehicle is in an Detergent Gasoline can be found at identifies the vehicle's engine. The
accident. The position and www.toptiergas.com. TOP TIER VIN is at the top left of the
mounting angle of the camera gasoline is only available in the U.S. instrument panel. See Vehicle
can change or the camera can and Canada. Identification Number (VIN) on
be affected. Be sure to have the page 12‑1.
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your Recommended Fuel
dealer.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine
(VIN Code 3), use regular unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, an audible knocking
noise, commonly referred to as engine. If heavy knocking is heard Gasoline Specifications

spark knock, might be heard when when using gasoline rated at
driving. If this occurs, use a 87 octane or higher, the engine At a minimum, gasoline should meet
gasoline rated at 87 octane or needs service. ASTM specification D 4814. Some
higher as soon as possible. If heavy gasolines contain an
knocking is heard when using Required Fuel (ZL1 Only) octane-enhancing additive called
gasoline rated at 87 octane or If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
higher, the engine needs service. (VIN Code P), use premium tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
unleaded gasoline with a posted against the use of gasolines
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
(VIN Code W) or the 6.2L V8 engine octane rating of 91 or higher. For
best performance, use premium on page 9‑51.
(VIN Code J), use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. For octane rating of 93. You can also California Fuel
best performance, use premium use regular unleaded gasoline rated Requirements
unleaded gasoline with a posted at 87 octane or higher, but the
vehicle's acceleration could be If the vehicle is certified to meet
octane rating of 93. You can also California Emissions Standards, it is
use regular unleaded gasoline rated slightly reduced, and a slight audible
knocking noise, commonly referred designed to operate on fuels that
at 87 octane or higher, but the meet California specifications. See
vehicle's acceleration could be to as spark knock, might be heard.
If the octane rating is less than 87, a the underhood emission control
slightly reduced, and a slight audible label. If this fuel is not available in
knocking noise, commonly referred heavy knocking noise might be
heard when driving. If this occurs, states adopting California Emissions
to as spark knock, might be heard. Standards, the vehicle will operate
If the octane rating is less than 87, a use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. satisfactorily on fuels meeting
heavy knocking noise might be federal specifications, but emission
heard when driving. If this occurs, Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If heavy knocking is heard control system performance might
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or be affected. The malfunction
higher as soon as possible. when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine indicator lamp could turn on and the
Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
needs service.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on emission control system to work gasoline additive recommended by
page 5‑17. If this occurs, return to properly. In most cases, nothing General Motors. It is available at
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. should have to be added to the fuel. your dealer.
If it is determined that the condition However, some gasolines contain Gasolines containing oxygenates,
is caused by the type of fuel used, only the minimum amount of such as ethers and ethanol, and
repairs might not be covered by the additive required to meet U.S. reformulated gasolines might be
vehicle warranty. Environmental Protection Agency available in your area. We
regulations. To help keep fuel recommend that you use these
Fuels in Foreign injectors and intake valves clean gasolines, if they comply with the
and avoid problems due to dirty
Countries injectors or valves, look for gasoline
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
Never use leaded gasoline or any that is advertised as TOP TIER other fuels containing more than
other fuel not recommended in the Detergent Gasoline. Look for the 15% ethanol must not be used in
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to vehicles that were not designed for
caused by use of improper fuel ensure gasoline meets enhanced those fuels.
would not be covered by the vehicle detergency standards developed by
warranty. the auto companies. A list of Notice: This vehicle was not
marketers providing TOP TIER designed for fuel that contains
To check the fuel availability, ask an
Detergent Gasoline can be found at methanol. Do not use fuel
auto club, or contact a major oil
www.toptiergas.com. containing methanol. It can
company that does business in the
corrode metal parts in the fuel
country where you will be driving. For customers who do not use TOP system and also damage plastic
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, and rubber parts. That damage
Fuel Additives one bottle of GM Fuel System would not be covered under the
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel vehicle warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines tank at every engine oil change, can
in the United States are now help clean deposits from fuel Some gasolines that are not
required to contain additives that injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel reformulated for low emissions can
help prevent engine and fuel system System Treatment PLUS is the only contain an octane-enhancing
deposits from forming, allowing the
additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese WARNING (Continued)
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
. Keep sparks, flames, and
fuel contains MMT. We recommend smoking materials away
against the use of such gasolines. from fuel.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce . Do not leave the fuel pump
spark plug life and affect emission unattended.
control system performance. The . Do not reenter the vehicle
malfunction indicator lamp might while pumping fuel.
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service. . Keep children away from the
fuel pump and never let
children pump fuel. The fuel cap is behind a hinged fuel
Filling the Tank door on the passenger side of the
. Fuel can spray out if the fuel vehicle. To open the fuel door, push
{ WARNING cap is opened too quickly.
This spray can happen if the
the rearward center edge in and
release and it will open.
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn tank is nearly full, and is
violently and can cause injury or more likely in hot weather. To unlock the fuel cap on vehicles
death. Open the fuel cap slowly and equipped with the locking fuel cap,
wait for any hiss noise to stop use the key that is part of the
. To help avoid injuries to you then unscrew the cap all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
and others, read and follow the way transmitter.
all the instructions on the fuel
pump island. When reinstalling the cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks, otherwise
. Turn off the engine when the malfunction indicator lamp may
refueling. turn on. See Malfunction Indicator
(Continued) Lamp on page 5‑17.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not Notice: If a new fuel cap is

top off or overfill the tank and wait a needed, be sure to get the right WARNING (Continued)
few seconds after you have finished type of cap from your dealer. The
pumping before removing the wrong type of fuel cap might not
. Remove container from
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted fit properly, might cause the vehicle, trunk, or pickup bed
surfaces as soon as possible. See malfunction indicator lamp to before filling.
Exterior Care on page 10‑89. light, and could damage the fuel . Place container on the
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it tank and emissions system. See ground.
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure Malfunction Indicator Lamp on . Place the nozzle inside the fill
the cap is fully installed. The page 5‑17. opening of the container
diagnostic system can determine if before dispensing fuel, and
the fuel cap has been left off or Filling a Portable Fuel keep it in contact with the fill
improperly installed. This would Container opening until filling is
allow fuel to evaporate into the complete.
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17.
{ WARNING . Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
Filling a portable fuel container
{ WARNING while it is in the vehicle can cause
fuel vapors that can ignite either
If a fire starts while you are by static electricity or other
refueling, do not remove the means. You or others could be
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by badly burned and the vehicle
shutting off the pump or by could be damaged. Always:
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
. Use approved fuel
containers.
(Continued)
Towing Driving Characteristics

and Towing Tips
{ WARNING
General Towing When towing a trailer, exhaust
Driving with a Trailer gases may collect at the rear of
Information
When towing a trailer: the vehicle and enter if the
Only use towing equipment that has liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
been designed for the vehicle.
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply window is open.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing specifically to trailer towing. When towing a trailer:
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read . Do not tow a trailer during the . Do not drive with the liftgate,
the entire section before towing a first 800 km (500 mi), to prevent trunk/hatch, or rear-most
trailer. damage to the engine, axle or window open.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see other parts. . Fully open the air outlets on
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑88. . Then, during the first 800 km or under the instrument
For towing the vehicle behind (500 mi) trailer towing, do not panel.
another vehicle such as a motor drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and
home, see Recreational Vehicle do not make starts at full throttle.
. Also adjust the Climate
Towing on page 10‑88. Control system to a setting
. Vehicles with automatic that brings in only outside air.
transmissions can tow in D See “Climate Control
(Drive) but M (Manual Mode) is Systems” in the Index.
recommended. See Manual
Mode on page 9‑29. Use a lower For more information about
gear if the transmission shifts Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
too often. For vehicles with a Exhaust on page 9‑25.
manual transmission, it is better
not to use the highest gear.
Towing a trailer requires a certain trailer, which mainly occurs during Making Turns
amount of experience. The cornering. This is normal when
Notice: Making very sharp turns
combination you are driving is towing heavier trailers.
while trailering could cause the
longer and not as responsive as the
Following Distance trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
vehicle. The vehicle could be
the handling and braking of the rig Stay at least twice as far behind the damaged. Avoid making very
before setting out for the open road. vehicle ahead as you would when sharp turns while trailering.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations When turning with a trailer, make
parts and attachments, safety
that require heavy braking and wider turns than normal so the
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
sudden turns. trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
curbs, road signs, trees or other
electric brakes, start the Passing objects. Use the turn signal well in
combination moving and then apply
More passing distance is needed advance and avoid jerky or sudden
the trailer brake controller by hand
when towing a trailer. Because the maneuvers.
to be sure the brakes work.
rig is longer, it is necessary to go Turn Signals When Towing a
During the trip, check occasionally farther beyond the passed vehicle
to be sure that the load is secure before returning to the lane.
Trailer
and the lamps and any trailer The turn signal indicators on the
brakes still work. Backing Up instrument cluster flash whenever
Towing with a Stability Control Hold the bottom of the steering signaling a turn or lane change.
System wheel with one hand. To move the Properly hooked up, the trailer
trailer to the left, move your hand to lamps also flash, telling other
When towing, the sound of the the left. To move the trailer to the drivers the vehicle is turning,
stability control system might be right, move your hand to the right. changing lanes or stopping.
heard. The system is reacting to the Always back up slowly and, When towing a trailer, the arrows on
vehicle movement caused by the if possible, have someone the instrument cluster flash for turns
guide you. even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Check occasionally to turning the engine off. If the 3. When the wheel chocks are in
be sure the trailer bulbs are still overheat warning comes on, see place, release the brake pedal
working. Engine Overheating on page 10‑28. until the chocks absorb the load.
Driving on Grades Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
Reduce speed and shift to a lower into P (Park) for vehicles with an
gear before starting down a long or { WARNING automatic transmission or into
steep downgrade. If the gear for vehicles with a manual
transmission is not shifted down, the Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be transmission.
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no dangerous. If something goes 5. Release the brake pedal.
longer work well. wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
the vehicle and the trailer can be
Use a lower gear if the transmission while you:
damaged. When possible, always
shifts too often.
park the rig on a flat surface. . Start the engine.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, engine coolant . Shift into a gear.
boils at a lower temperature than at If parking the rig on a hill: . Release the parking brake.
normal altitudes. If the engine is 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
turned off immediately after towing not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
at high altitude on steep uphill the wheels into the curb if facing 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
grades, the vehicle could show downhill or into traffic if facing clear of the chocks.
signs similar to engine overheating. uphill.
To avoid this, let the engine run 4. Stop and have someone pick up
2. Have someone place chocks and store the chocks.
while parked, preferably on level
under the trailer wheels.
ground, with the transmission in
P (Park) for a few minutes before
Maintenance When Trailer Trailer Towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated

Towing assuming only the driver is in the
(Except ZL1) tow vehicle and it has all the
The vehicle needs service more Before pulling a trailer, there are required trailering equipment. The
often when pulling a trailer. See the three important considerations that weight of additional optional
Maintenance Schedule on have to do with weight: equipment, passengers, and cargo
page 11‑2. Things that are in the tow vehicle must be
especially important in trailer . The weight of the trailer.
subtracted from the maximum trailer
operation are automatic . The weight of the trailer tongue. weight.
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
. The total weight on your
lubricant, belts, cooling system and Ask your dealer for trailering
brake system. Inspect these before vehicle's tires. information or advice, or write us at
and during the trip. our Customer Assistance Offices.
Weight of the Trailer See Customer Assistance Offices
Check periodically to see that all How heavy can a trailer safely be? (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Customer Assistance Offices
It should never weigh more than
Engine Cooling When Trailer 454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
Towing can be too heavy. Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The cooling system may temporarily It depends on how the rig is used. The tongue load (1) of any trailer is
overheat during severe operating For example, speed, altitude, road an important weight to measure
conditions. See Engine Overheating grades, outside temperature, and because it affects the total gross
on page 10‑28. how much the vehicle is used to pull weight of the vehicle. The Gross
a trailer are all important. It can Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
depend on any special equipment curb weight of the vehicle, any
on the vehicle, and the amount of cargo carried in it, and the people
tongue weight the vehicle can carry. who will be riding in the vehicle.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” If there are a lot of options,
later in this section. equipment, passengers, or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue proper. If they are not, adjustments Towing Equipment
weight the vehicle can carry, which might be made by moving some
will also reduce the trailer weight the items around in the trailer. Hitches
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, Use the correct hitch equipment.
the tongue load must be added to Total Weight on Your Vehicle's
Tires See your dealer or a hitch dealer for
the GVW because the vehicle will assistance.
be carrying that weight, too. See Be sure the vehicle's tires are
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12. inflated to the upper limit for cold
. The rear bumper on the vehicle
tires. These numbers can be found is not intended for hitches. Do
on the Tire and Loading Information not attach rental hitches or other
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on bumper-type hitches to it. Use
page 9‑12. Make sure not to go over only a frame-mounted hitch that
the GVW limit for the vehicle, does not attach to the bumper.
including the weight of the trailer . Will any holes be made in the
tongue. body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If so,
Trailer Towing (ZL1) seal the holes when the hitch is
removed. If the holes are not
The vehicle is neither designed nor sealed, dirt, water, and deadly
intended to tow a trailer. carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle.
The trailer tongue (1) should weigh See Engine Exhaust on
10 to 15 percent of the total loaded page 9‑25.
trailer weight (2).
After loading the trailer, weigh the
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
Safety Chains Conversions and

Always attach chains between the Add-Ons
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue Add-On Electrical
from contacting the road if it Equipment
becomes separated from the hitch.
Notice: Some electrical
Leave enough slack so the rig can
equipment can damage the
turn. Never allow safety chains to
vehicle or cause components to
drag on the ground.
not work and would not be
Trailer Brakes covered by the warranty. Always
check with your dealer before
Does the trailer have its own adding electrical equipment.
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes Add-on equipment can drain the
so they are installed, adjusted, and vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
maintained properly. vehicle is not operating.
Because the vehicle has antilock The vehicle has an airbag system.
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's Before attempting to add anything
brake system. If this is done, both electrical to the vehicle, see
brake systems will not work well, Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
or at all. Vehicle on page 3‑27 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑28.
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Park Brake and P (Park)

Vehicle Care (ZL1 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-35
Cooling System (Except ZL1 Wiper Blade
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
General Information Cooling System (ZL1 Windshield Replacement . . . 10-36
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Engine Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
California Proposition Cooling System Headlamp Aiming
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 (Intercooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
California Perchlorate Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Bulb Replacement
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-28 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Accessories and Power Steering
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Fluid (LFX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 High Intensity Discharge
Vehicle Checks Power Steering Fluid (L99, (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Doing Your Own LS3 and ZL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Headlamps, Front Turn
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Signal and Parking Lamps
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 (Base Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Compartment Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Headlamps, Front Turn
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Signal and Parking Lamps
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 (Uplevel Vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-34 Daytime Running
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-15 Automatic Transmission Shift Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Automatic Transmission Lock Control Function Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Manual Transmission Ignition Transmission Lock Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-40
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(Except ZL1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10-2 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Electrical System Tire Pressure for High-Speed Tire Sealant and
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Fuses and Circuit Tire Pressure Monitor Storing the Tire Sealant and
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Engine Compartment Fuse Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-84
Instrument Panel Fuse Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Jump Starting
Rear Compartment Fuse When It Is Time for New Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Towing
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Wheels and Tires Different Size Tires and
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Recreational Vehicle
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Uniform Tire Quality
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Appearance Care
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Wheel Alignment and Tire Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-51 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-69 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Tire Terminology and Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Vehicle Care 10-3
General Information California Proposition Accessories and

For service and parts needs, visit 65 Warning Modifications
your dealer. You will receive Most motor vehicles, including this Adding non‐dealer accessories or
genuine GM parts and GM-trained one, contain and/or emit chemicals making modifications to the vehicle
and supported service people. known to the State of California to can affect vehicle performance and
Genuine GM parts have one of cause cancer and birth defects or safety, including such things as
these marks: other reproductive harm. Engine airbags, braking, stability, ride and
exhaust, many parts and systems, handling, emissions systems,
many fluids, and some component aerodynamics, durability, and
wear by-products contain and/or electronic systems like antilock
emit these chemicals. brakes, traction control, and stability
control. These accessories or
California Perchlorate modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
Materials Requirements by the vehicle warranty.
Certain types of automotive
Damage to vehicle components
applications, such as airbag
resulting from modifications or the
initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
installation or use of non‐GM
and lithium batteries contained in
certified parts, including control
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
module or software modifications, is
may contain perchlorate materials.
not covered under the terms of the
Special handling may be necessary.
vehicle warranty and may affect
For additional information, see
remaining warranty coverage for
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
affected parts.
perchlorate.
10-4 Vehicle Care
GM Accessories are designed to Vehicle Checks This vehicle has an airbag system.
complement and function with other Before attempting to do your own
systems on the vehicle. See your service work, see Servicing the
dealer to accessorize the vehicle Doing Your Own Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
using genuine GM Accessories Service Work page 3‑27.
installed by a dealer technician. Keep a record with all parts receipts
Also, see Adding Equipment to the { WARNING and list the mileage and the date of
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on any service work performed. See
page 3‑28. It can be dangerous to work on Maintenance Records on
your vehicle if you do not have page 11‑16.
the proper knowledge, service
manual, tools, or parts. Always Notice: Even small amounts of
contamination can cause damage
follow owner manual procedures
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
and consult the service manual
contaminants to contact the
for your vehicle before doing any fluids, reservoir caps,
service work. or dipsticks.
If doing some of your own service

work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑17.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood
To open the hood:
2. Push the secondary hood

release to the right. The lever is
near the middle of the hood.
1. Pull the release handle below 3. Lift the hood.
the instrument panel to the left of Before closing the hood, be sure all
the steering wheel. filler caps are on properly. Then lift
the hood to relieve pressure. Pull
the hood down on the passenger
side to close it firmly.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
3.6L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Underhood Electrical Center. 5. Radiator Fill Cap (Out of View). 9. Brake Master Cylinder and
See Engine Compartment Fuse See Engine Coolant on Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (if
Block on page 10‑42. page 10‑23. equipped with manual
2. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle 6. Power Steering Reservoir and transmission). See Brakes on
and Cap. See Engine Coolant Cap (Out of View). See Power page 10‑31 or Hydraulic Clutch
on page 10‑23. Steering Fluid (L99, LS3 and on page 10‑17.
3. Engine Cover on page 10‑12. ZL1) on page 10‑30 or Power 10. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
Steering Fluid (LFX) on See Battery on page 10‑33.
4. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of page 10‑29.
View). See Cooling System 11. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(Except ZL1 Engine) on 7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine (Except ZL1) on page 10‑17 or
page 10‑20 or Cooling System Oil on page 10‑13. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1
(ZL1 Engine Only) on 8. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Only) on page 10‑19.
page 10‑21 or Cooling System View). See Engine Oil on 12. Windshield Washer Fluid
(Intercooler) on page 10‑22. page 10‑13. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on page 10‑30.
10-8 Vehicle Care
6.2L V8 Engine (L99 Engine Shown, LS3 Similar)

Vehicle Care 10-9
1. Underhood Electrical Center. 6. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of 9. Brake Master Cylinder and
See Engine Compartment Fuse View). See Cooling System Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (if
Block on page 10‑42. (Except ZL1 Engine) on equipped with manual
2. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle page 10‑20 or Cooling System transmission). See Brakes on
and Cap. See Engine Coolant (ZL1 Engine Only) on page 10‑31 or Hydraulic Clutch
on page 10‑23. page 10‑21 or Cooling System on page 10‑17.
(Intercooler) on page 10‑22. 10. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑13. 7. Radiator Fill Cap (Out of View). See Battery on page 10‑33.
See Engine Coolant on 11. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of page 10‑23.
View). See Engine Oil on (Except ZL1) on page 10‑17 or
page 10‑13. 8. Power Steering Reservoir and Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1
Cap (Under Engine Cover) (if Only) on page 10‑19.
5. Engine Cover on page 10‑12. equipped). See Power Steering 12. Windshield Washer Fluid
Fluid (L99, LS3 and ZL1) on Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
page 10‑30 or Power Steering on page 10‑30.
Fluid (LFX) on page 10‑29.
10-10 Vehicle Care
6.2L V8 Engine (ZL1)

Vehicle Care 10-11
1. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle 6. Radiator Fill Cap. See Engine 9. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Except
and Cap. See Engine Coolant Coolant on page 10‑23. ZL1) on page 10‑17 or Engine
on page 10‑23. 7. Intercooler Fill Cap (Out of Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1 Only) on
2. Underhood Electrical Center. View). See Cooling System page 10‑19.
See Engine Compartment Fuse (Except ZL1 Engine) on 10. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
Block on page 10‑42. page 10‑20 or Cooling System See Battery on page 10‑33.
3. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine (ZL1 Engine Only) on 11. Brake Master Cylinder and
Oil on page 10‑13. page 10‑21 or Cooling System Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (if
(Intercooler) on page 10‑22. equipped with manual
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on 8. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of transmission). See Brakes on
page 10‑13. View). See Cooling System page 10‑31 or Hydraulic Clutch
(Except ZL1 Engine) on on page 10‑17.
5. Engine Cover on page 10‑12. page 10‑20 or Cooling System 12. Windshield Washer Fluid
(ZL1 Engine Only) on Reservoir. See Washer Fluid
page 10‑21 or Cooling System on page 10‑30.
(Intercooler) on page 10‑22.
10-12 Vehicle Care
Engine Cover 3. Pull the engine cover forward to 2. Lift the engine cover (2) to
disengage it from the two disengage the two front
3.6L V6 Engine Cover rear tabs. attachment points.
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall 3. Pull the engine cover forward to
the engine cover. disengage it from the horizontal
rear attachments.
6.2L V8 Engine Cover (L99
Engine Shown, LS3 Similar) 4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall
the engine cover.
6.2L V8 Engine Cover
(ZL1 Only)
1. Engine Cover
2. Engine Oil Fill Cap
To remove:
1. Remove the engine oil
fill cap (2). 1. Engine Oil Fill Cap
2. Lift the engine cover (1) to 2. Engine Cover
disengage one front attachment To remove:
point. 1. Engine Oil Fill Cap
1. Remove the engine oil
fill cap (1). 2. Engine Cover
Vehicle Care 10-13
To remove:
. Check the engine oil level Obtaining an accurate oil level
regularly and maintain the reading is essential:
1. Remove the engine oil proper oil level. See “Checking
fill cap (1). Engine Oil” and “When to Add 1. If the engine has been running
2. Lift the engine cover (2) to Engine Oil” in this section. recently, turn off the engine and
disengage from the five allow several minutes for the oil
. Change the engine oil at the to drain back into the oil pan.
attachment points. appropriate time. See Engine Oil Checking the oil level too soon
3. Pull the engine cover forward to Life System on page 10‑15. after engine shutoff will not
disengage and remove. . Always dispose of engine oil provide an accurate oil level
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall properly. See “What to Do with reading.
the engine cover. Used Oil” in this section.
Checking Engine Oil
{ WARNING
Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine The engine oil dipstick handle
To ensure proper engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to may be hot; it could burn you.
performance and long life, careful get an accurate reading, the vehicle Use a towel or glove to touch the
attention must be paid to engine oil. must be on level ground. The dipstick handle.
Following these simple, but engine oil dipstick handle is a loop.
important steps will help protect See Engine Compartment Overview
your investment: 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
with a paper towel or cloth, then
. Always use engine oil approved engine oil dipstick.
push it back in all the way.
to the proper specification and of Remove it again, keeping the tip
the proper viscosity grade. See down, and check the level.
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.
10-14 Vehicle Care
When to Add Engine Oil area that shows the proper approved certification mark. This
operating range, the engine could certification mark indicates that the
be damaged. You should drain oil has been approved to the dexos1
out the excess oil or limit driving specification.
of the vehicle and seek a service
professional to remove the
excess amount of oil.
See Engine Compartment Overview
If the oil is below the cross-hatched on page 10‑6 for the location of the
area at the tip of the dipstick, add engine oil fill cap.
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil Add enough oil to put the level
and then recheck the level. See Notice: Failure to use the
somewhere in the proper operating
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in recommended engine oil or
range. Push the dipstick all the way
this section for an explanation of equivalent can result in engine
back in when through.
what kind of oil to use. For engine damage not covered by the
oil crankcase capacity, see Selecting the Right Engine Oil vehicle warranty. Check with your
Capacities and Specifications on dealer or service provider on
Selecting the right engine oil whether the oil is approved to the
page 12‑2. depends on both the proper oil dexos1 specification.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. specification and viscosity grade.
Oil levels above or below the See Recommended Fluids and Viscosity Grade
acceptable operating range Lubricants on page 11‑12. SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
shown on the dipstick are harmful Specification grade for the vehicle. Do not use
to the engine. If you find that you other viscosity grade oils such as
have an oil level above the Use and ask for licensed engine oils SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
operating range, i.e., the engine with the dexos1® approved
has so much oil that the oil level certification mark. Engine oils
gets above the cross-hatched meeting the requirements for the
vehicle should have the dexos1
Vehicle Care 10-15
Cold Temperature Operation: In an What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System
area of extreme cold, where the
Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil
temperature falls below −29°C
elements that can be unhealthy for
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be This vehicle has a computer system
your skin and could even cause
used. An oil of this viscosity grade that indicates when to change the
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
will provide easier cold starting for engine oil and filter. This is based
your skin for very long. Clean your
the engine at extremely low on a combination of factors which
skin and nails with soap and water,
temperatures. When selecting an oil include engine revolutions, engine
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
of the appropriate viscosity grade, temperature, and miles driven.
properly dispose of clothing or rags
always select an oil of the correct Based on driving conditions, the
containing used engine oil. See the
specification. See “Specification” mileage at which an oil change is
manufacturer's warnings about the
earlier in this section for more indicated can vary considerably. For
use and disposal of oil products.
information. the oil life system to work properly,
Used oil can be a threat to the
Engine Oil Additives/Engine the system must be reset every time
environment. If you change your the oil is changed.
Oil Flushes own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
Do not add anything to the oil. The from the filter before disposal. Never When the system has calculated
recommended oils with the dexos dispose of oil by putting it in the that oil life has been diminished, it
specification and displaying the trash or pouring it on the ground, indicates that an oil change is
dexos certification mark are all that into sewers, or into streams or necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
is needed for good performance and bodies of water. Recycle it by taking OIL SOON message comes on. See
engine protection. it to a place that collects used oil. Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑36.
Change the oil as soon as possible
Engine oil system flushes are not within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
recommended and could cause It is possible that, if driving under
engine damage not covered by the the best conditions, the oil life
vehicle warranty. system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a
year. The engine oil and filter must
10-16 Vehicle Care
be changed at least once a year 2. Fully press and release the The vehicle is not equipped with a
and, at this time, the system must accelerator pedal three times transmission fluid level dipstick.
be reset. Your dealer has trained within five seconds. There is a special procedure for
service people who will perform this The system is reset when the checking and changing the
work and reset the system. It is also CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON transmission fluid. Because this
important to check the oil regularly message goes off. procedure is difficult, this should be
over the course of an oil drain done at the dealer. Contact the
interval and keep it at the proper If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON dealer for additional information or
level. message comes back on when the the procedure can be found in the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life service manual. To purchase a
If the system is ever reset system has not been reset. Repeat
accidentally, the oil must be service manual, see Service
the procedure. Publications Ordering Information
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change. on page 13‑17.
Remember to reset the oil life Automatic Transmission Change the fluid and filter at the
system whenever the oil is changed. Fluid intervals listed in Maintenance
Schedule on page 11‑2, and be sure
How to Reset the Engine Oil How to Check Automatic to use the fluid listed in
Life System Transmission Fluid Recommended Fluids and
Reset the system whenever the It is not necessary to check the Lubricants on page 11‑12.
engine oil is changed so that the transmission fluid level.
system can calculate the next A transmission fluid leak is the only Manual Transmission
engine oil change. To reset the reason for fluid loss. If a leak Fluid
system: occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer and have it repaired as soon It is not necessary to check the
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with manual transmission fluid level.
as possible.
the engine off. A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
Vehicle Care 10-17
dealer and have it repaired as soon When to Check and What Do not remove the cap to check the
as possible. See Recommended to Use fluid level or to top‐off the fluid level.
Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12 Remove the cap only when
for the proper fluid to use. necessary to add the proper fluid
until the level reaches the MIN line.
Hydraulic Clutch
For vehicles with a manual
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
transmission, it is not necessary to (Except ZL1)
regularly check brake/clutch fluid See Engine Compartment Overview
unless there is a leak suspected. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this symbol on it. on page 10‑6 for the location of the
Adding fluid will not correct a leak. engine air cleaner/filter.
A fluid loss in this system could The common hydraulic clutch and
indicate a problem. Have the brake master cylinder fluid reservoir When to Inspect the Engine Air
system inspected and repaired. is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as Cleaner/Filter
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview on Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
page 10‑6 for reservoir location. scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the appropriate
How to Check and Add Fluid interval. See Maintenance Schedule
Visually check the brake/clutch fluid on page 11‑2 for more information.
reservoir to make sure the fluid level If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the inspect the filter at each engine oil
side of the reservoir. The brake/ change.
hydraulic clutch fluid system should
be closed and sealed.
10-18 Vehicle Care
How to Inspect the Engine Air 3. Loosen the clamp at the duct of
Cleaner/Filter the air cleaner/filter housing.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 4. Unlatch the retaining clips on the
remove the filter from the vehicle air cleaner/filter housing.
and lightly shake the filter to release 5. Lift the cover at the retaining clip
loose dust and dirt. If the filter location high enough to clear the
remains covered with dirt, a new retaining clips and pull the cover
filter is required. outward to remove it from the air
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter housing hinges.
cleaner/filter: 6. Pull straight up on the cover;
1. Open the hood. See Hood on while holding the cover, remove
page 10‑5. the air filter.
2. Locate the air filter housing on 7. Inspect or replace the air filter.
the front of the driver side of the See Maintenance Replacement
engine compartment. See Parts on page 11‑14.
Engine Compartment Overview 8. Reverse Steps 1–6 to reinstall
on page 10‑6. the cover.
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
3.6L V6 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter others to be burned. The air
Housing Shown (6.2L V8 Engines cleaner not only cleans the air; it
Similar) (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-19
When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the engine air
WARNING (Continued) Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter:
helps to stop flames if the engine Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
backfires. Use caution when scheduled maintenance intervals
working on the engine and do not and replace it at the appropriate
drive with the air cleaner/filter off. interval. See Maintenance Schedule
on page 11‑2 for more information.
If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is inspect the filter at each engine oil
off, dirt can easily get into the change.
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter How to Inspect the Engine Air
in place when you are driving. Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter remove the filter from the vehicle
(ZL1 Only) 1. Air Duct Clamp
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter 2. Screws
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the remains covered with dirt, a new 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
engine air cleaner/filter. filter is required. page 10‑5.
2. Disconnect the outlet duct by
loosening the screw on the air
duct clamp.
3. Remove the two screws
securing the cover on the air
cleaner/filter housing.
10-20 Vehicle Care
4. Pull straight up on the cover; Cooling System (Except

while holding the cover, remove
the air filter.
ZL1 Engine)
5. Inspect or replace the air filter.
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 11‑14.
6. Reverse Steps 2–5 to reinstall
the cover.
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air 6.2L V8 Engines (L99 Shown, LS3
cleaner/filter off can cause you or Similar)
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it 3.6L V6 Engine 1. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle
helps to stop flames if the engine 2. Electric Cooling Fans (Out
backfires. Use caution when 1. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle
of View)
working on the engine and do not 2. Electric Cooling Fans (Out
3. Radiator Cap (Out of View)
drive with the air cleaner/filter off. of View)
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is

3. Radiator Cap (Under Engine
Cover)
{ WARNING
off, dirt can easily get into the An electric engine cooling fan
engine, which could damage it. under the hood can start up even
Always have the air cleaner/filter when the engine is not running
in place when you are driving. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-21
Always use DEX-COOL

WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
and can cause injury. Keep Do not run the engine if there is a
hands, clothing, and tools away leak. If you run the engine, it
from any underhood electric fan. could lose all coolant. That could
Cooling System (ZL1
cause an engine fire, and you Engine Only)
If the coolant inside the engine could be burned. Get any leak
coolant recovery bottle is boiling, do fixed before you drive the vehicle.
not do anything else until it cools
down. The vehicle should be parked If there seems to be no leak, with
on a level surface. the engine on, check to see if the
The coolant level should be electric engine cooling fans are
between the MIN and MAX lines. running. If the engine is
If it is not, the vehicle may have a overheating, the fans should be
leak at the radiator hoses, heater running. If it is not, the vehicle
hoses, radiator, water pump, needs service. Turn off the engine.
or somewhere else in the cooling Notice: Using coolant other than
system. DEX-COOL® can cause premature
6.2L V8 Engine
engine, heater core, or radiator
{ WARNING corrosion. In addition, the engine 1. Engine Coolant Recovery Bottle
coolant could require changing 2. Electric Cooling Fans (Out
Heater and radiator hoses, and sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) of View)
other engine parts, can be very or 24 months, whichever occurs
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, first. Any repairs would not be 3. Radiator Cap
you can be burned. covered by the vehicle warranty.
(Continued)
10-22 Vehicle Care
or 24 months, whichever occurs

{ WARNING { WARNING first. Any repairs would not be
An electric engine cooling fan Heater and radiator hoses, and Always use DEX-COOL
under the hood can start up even other engine parts, can be very (silicate-free) coolant in the
when the engine is not running hot. Do not touch them. If you do, vehicle.
and can cause injury. Keep you can be burned.
hands, clothing, and tools away Do not run the engine if there is a Cooling System
from any underhood electric fan. leak. If you run the engine, it (Intercooler)
could lose all coolant. That could
If the coolant inside the engine cause an engine fire, and you Intercooler ZL1 Only
coolant recovery bottle is boiling, do could be burned. Get any leak The 6.2L LSA supercharged
not do anything else until it cools fixed before you drive the vehicle. V8 engine has an intercooler
down. The vehicle should be parked cooling system.
on a level surface.
If there seems to be no leak, with
The coolant level should be the engine on, check to see if the
between the MIN and MAX lines. electric engine cooling fans are
If it is not, the vehicle may have a running. If the engine is
leak at the radiator hoses, heater overheating, the fans should be
hoses, radiator, water pump, running. If it is not, the vehicle
or somewhere else in the cooling needs service. Turn off the engine.
system.
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
1. Intercooler Fill Cap
Vehicle Care 10-23
2. Intercooler Fill Neck Engine Coolant WARNING (Continued)

1. Open the hood and remove the The cooling system in the vehicle is
engine cover. See Engine Cover filled with DEX-COOL® engine mixture, the engine could get too
on page 10‑12. coolant. This coolant is designed to hot but you would not get the
2. Turn the intercooler fill neck (2) remain in the vehicle for 5 years or overheat warning. The engine
to the vertical position. 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever could catch fire and you or others
occurs first. could be burned. Use a 50/
3. Remove the intercooler
fill cap (1). The following explains the cooling 50 mixture of clean, drinkable
system and how to check and add water and DEX-COOL coolant.
4. Check to see if coolant is visible
coolant when it is low. If there is a
near the top of the opening.
problem with engine overheating, Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
5. If coolant is not visible, see see Engine Overheating on drinkable water and DEX-COOL
dealer for service. page 10‑28. coolant. If using this mixture,
6. Reverse Steps 1–3 to install What to Use nothing else needs to be added.
intercooler fill cap and turn the This mixture:
intercooler fill neck.
{ WARNING . Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
The intercooler cooling system has
a special procedure for draining and Adding only plain water or some temperature.
adding coolant. Because this other liquid to the cooling system . Gives boiling protection up to
procedure is difficult, see the dealer can be dangerous. Plain water 129°C (265°F), engine
for service if the intercooler is low and other liquids, can boil before temperature.
on coolant. The procedure can also the proper coolant mixture will.
be found in the service manual. To
. Protects against rust and
The coolant warning system is set
purchase a service manual, see corrosion.
for the proper coolant mixture.
Service Publications Ordering With plain water or the wrong . Will not damage aluminum parts.
Information on page 13‑17.
(Continued)
10-24 Vehicle Care

. Helps keep the proper engine Checking Coolant
temperature.
The vehicle must be on a level
Notice: If an improper coolant surface when checking the coolant
mixture is used, the engine could level.
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be Check coolant as follows:
covered by the vehicle warranty. 1. Turn the ignition off.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine, 2. Locate the engine coolant
radiator, heater core, and other recovery bottle. See Engine
parts. Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6.
Never dispose of engine coolant by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on 4. There are maximum and
the ground, or into sewers, streams, minimum markings on the
or bodies of water. Have the coolant dipstick. When the engine is
changed by an authorized service cold, the coolant level should be
center, familiar with legal at or above the MIN mark on the
requirements regarding used dipstick. After the vehicle has
coolant disposal. This will help been driven and the engine is at
protect the environment and your 3. Turn the coolant dipstick cap normal operating temperature,
health. counterclockwise and slowly pull the level should be somewhere
out the dipstick. between half full and the
maximum mark.
5. If the coolant level is correct,
replace the dipstick and turn the
cap clockwise to secure.
Vehicle Care 10-25
How to Add Coolant to the Add coolant as follows: could cause the engine to
Coolant Recovery Bottle 1. Turn the engine coolant recovery overheat and be severely
bottle dipstick cap damaged.
{ WARNING counterclockwise and slowly pull
{ WARNING
out the dipstick.
You can be burned if you spill
2. Pour the coolant into the engine An electric engine cooling fan
coolant on hot engine parts.
coolant recovery bottle. under the hood can start up even
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts 3. When the level is correct, when the engine is not running
are hot enough. Do not spill replace the dipstick and turn the and can cause injury. Keep
coolant on a hot engine. cap clockwise to secure. hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
How to Add Coolant to the
Notice: This vehicle has a Radiator
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure { WARNING { WARNING
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely You can be burned if you spill Steam and scalding liquids from a
damaged. coolant on hot engine parts. hot cooling system can blow out
Notice: If an improper coolant Coolant contains ethylene glycol and burn you badly. They are
mixture is used, the engine could and it will burn if the engine parts under pressure, and if you turn
overheat and be badly damaged. are hot enough. Do not spill the surge tank pressure
The repair cost would not be coolant on a hot engine. cap — even a little — they can
covered by the vehicle warranty. come out at high speed. Never
Too much water in the mixture turn the cap when the cooling
Notice: This vehicle has a system, including the surge tank
can freeze and crack the engine, specific coolant fill procedure.
radiator, heater core, and other Failure to follow this procedure (Continued)
parts.
10-26 Vehicle Care
6. With the engine idling, continue

WARNING (Continued) to add coolant through the
radiator cap opening until full.
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank Wait 30 seconds for the coolant
pressure cap to cool if you ever to settle and top off, if the level
have to turn the pressure cap. drops.
3. Cover the radiator cap with a
7. Once the system is full, put the
thick cloth and turn it slowly
If coolant is needed, add the proper radiator cap back on by turning
counterclockwise and remove.
mixture directly to the radiator, but clockwise.
4. If there is no coolant visible or
be sure the cooling system is cool 8. With the engine still running,
the level is low, slowly fill the
before this is done. raise the engine to 2500 rpm for
system through the radiator cap
If no coolant is visible in the engine 30–40 seconds.
opening with a 50/50 mixture of
coolant recovery bottle, add coolant DEX-COOL and clean drinkable 9. Turn the engine off.
as follows: water. 10. Repeat Steps 2–7 then turn the
3.6L V6 Engine Fill Procedure Wait 30 seconds for coolant to engine off.
settle and continue filling if the 11. Allow engine to cool for
1. Locate the radiator cap. See
level drops. 45 minutes. Top off coolant
Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6. Do not spill coolant on the through the radiator cap
accessory drive belts. opening and reinstall the
2. Remove the engine cover to
radiator cap.
access the radiator cap. See If a spill occurs, rinse the belt
Engine Cover on page 10‑12. with fresh water. 12. Reinstall the engine cover. See
Engine Cover on page 10‑12.
5. Start the engine.
Vehicle Care 10-27
5. With the engine idling, top off the

coolant through the radiator cap
opening until full.
Wait 30 seconds for the coolant
to settle and top off, if the level
drops.
2. Cover the radiator cap with a
6. Once the system is full, put the
thick cloth and turn it slowly
radiator cap back on by turning
counterclockwise and remove.
clockwise.
3. If there is no coolant visible or
7. Turn the engine off.
the level is low, slowly fill the
system through the radiator cap
13. Check the coolant level in the opening with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant recovery bottle clean, drinkable water and
and fill it until the level is at the DEX-COOL coolant until full.
top symbol on the dipstick.
Wait 30 seconds for coolant to
6.2L V8 Engine Fill Procedure settle and top off if the level
1. Locate the radiator cap. See drops.
Engine Compartment Overview Do not spill coolant on the
on page 10‑6. accessory drive belts.
If a spill occurs, rinse the belt
with fresh water.
4. Start the engine. 8. Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant recovery bottle
and fill it until the level is at the
top mark on the dipstick.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the pressure cap is not Then check to see if the engine
tightly installed, coolant loss and cooling fans are running. If the WARNING (Continued)
possible engine damage may engine is overheating, both fans
occur. Be sure the cap is properly should be running. If they are not, steam coming from it. Just turn it
and tightly secured. do not continue to run the engine off and get everyone away from
and have the vehicle serviced. the vehicle until it cools down.
Engine Overheating Wait until there is no sign of
Notice: Engine damage from steam or coolant before you open
The vehicle has an indicator to warn running the engine without the hood.
of engine overheating. coolant is not covered by the
warranty. If you keep driving when the
There is an engine coolant engine is overheated, the liquids
temperature gauge on the vehicle Notice: If the engine catches fire
because of being driven with no in it can catch fire. You or others
instrument panel. See Engine could be badly burned. Stop the
Coolant Temperature Gauge on coolant, the vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs engine if it overheats, and get out
page 5‑13.
would not be covered by the of the vehicle until the engine
If the decision is made not to lift the vehicle warranty. is cool.
hood when this warning appears,
but instead get service help right If Steam Is Coming from the
away. See Roadside Assistance Engine Compartment If No Steam Is Coming from
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑7 or the Engine Compartment
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑11.
{ WARNING If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
If the decision is made to lift the Steam from an overheated engine or heard, the problem may not be
hood, make sure the vehicle is can burn you badly, even if you too serious. Sometimes the engine
parked on a level surface. just open the hood. Stay away can get a little too hot when the
from the engine if you see or hear vehicle:
(Continued) . Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Vehicle Care 10-29

. Stops after high-speed driving. If the warning continues, pull over, When to Check Power Steering
. Idles for long periods in traffic. stop, and park the vehicle Fluid
.
right away.
Tows a trailer. It is not necessary to regularly
If there is no sign of steam, idle the check power steering fluid unless
If the overheat warning is displayed engine for three minutes while
with no sign of steam: you suspect there is a leak in the
parked. If the warning is still system or an unusual noise is
1. Turn the air conditioning off. displayed, turn off the engine until it heard. A fluid loss in this system
cools down. could indicate a problem. Have the
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest system inspected and repaired.
fan speed. Open the windows as Power Steering
How to Check Power Steering
necessary. Fluid (LFX) Fluid
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
Check the level after the vehicle has
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
been driven for at least 20 minutes
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
so the fluid is warm.
road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the To check the power steering fluid:
engine idle. 1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/
If the temperature overheat gauge is OFF and let the engine
no longer in the overheat zone or an The power steering fluid reservoir is compartment cool down.
overheat warning no longer under the engine cover on the driver
side toward the front of the engine 2. Remove the engine cover. See
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Engine Cover on page 10‑12.
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly compartment. See Engine
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe Compartment Overview on 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the
vehicle distance from the vehicle in page 10‑6. reservoir clean.
front. If the warning does not come 4. Turn the cap counterclockwise
back on, continue to drive normally. and pull it straight up.
10-30 Vehicle Care
5. Wipe the dipstick with a Power Steering Fluid Adding Washer Fluid
clean rag.
(L99, LS3 and ZL1)
6. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it. The vehicle has electric power
steering and does not use power
7. Remove the cap again and look steering fluid.
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
Washer Fluid
What to Use Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
When windshield washer fluid is the reservoir is full. See Engine
needed, be sure to read the Compartment Overview on
manufacturer's instructions before page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
use. If operating the vehicle in an
When the engine is hot, the level Notice
area where the temperature can fall
should be at the hot MAX level. below freezing, use a fluid that has . When using concentrated
When the engine is cold, the sufficient protection against washer fluid, follow the
fluid level should be between freezing. manufacturer instructions for
MIN and MAX on the dipstick. adding water.
What to Use . Do not mix water with
To determine what kind of fluid to ready-to-use washer fluid.
use, see Recommended Fluids and Water can cause the solution
Lubricants on page 11‑12. Always to freeze and damage the
use the proper fluid. washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Vehicle Care 10-31

. Fill the washer fluid tank only Brake linings should always be
three-quarters full when it is { WARNING replaced as complete axle sets.
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing The brake wear warning sound Brake Pedal Travel
occurs, which could damage means that soon the brakes will See your dealer if the brake pedal
the tank if it is not work well. That could lead to does not return to normal height,
completely full. a crash. When the brake wear or if there is a rapid increase in
. Do not use engine coolant warning sound is heard, have the pedal travel. This could be a sign
(antifreeze) in the windshield vehicle serviced. that brake service might be
washer. It can damage the required.
windshield washer system Notice: Continuing to drive with
and paint. Brake Adjustment
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair. Every time the brakes are applied,
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc can cause a brake squeal when the
brake pads have built-in wear brakes are first applied or lightly Replacing Brake System Parts
indicators that make a high-pitched applied. This does not mean
The braking system on a vehicle is
warning sound when the brake pads something is wrong with the brakes.
complex. Its many parts have to be
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are of top quality and work well together
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake if the vehicle is to have really good
heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, braking. The vehicle was designed
moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and and tested with top-quality brake
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the parts. When parts of the braking
proper sequence to torque system are replaced, be sure to get
specifications in Capacities and new, approved replacement parts.
Specifications on page 12‑2. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
10-32 Vehicle Care
installing disc brake pads that are There are only two reasons why the
wrong for the vehicle, can change fluid level in the reservoir might { WARNING
the balance between the front and go down:
rear brakes — for the worse. The If too much brake fluid is added, it
. The fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn,
braking performance expected can because of normal brake lining
change in many other ways if the if the engine is hot enough. You
wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and
wrong replacement brake parts are installed, the fluid level goes
installed. the vehicle could be damaged.
back up. Add brake fluid only when work is
Brake Fluid . A fluid leak in the brake/clutch done on the brake/clutch
hydraulic system can also cause hydraulic system.
a low fluid level. Have the brake/
clutch hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a
or later the brakes and/or clutch low level, the brake warning light
will not work well. comes on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 5‑20.
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. What to Add
The brake/clutch master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake If fluid is added when the linings are Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
fluid as indicated on the reservoir worn, there will be too much fluid from a sealed container. See
cap. See Engine Compartment when new brake linings are Recommended Fluids and
Overview on page 10‑6 for the installed. Add or remove brake fluid, Lubricants on page 11‑12.
location of the reservoir. as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake/clutch hydraulic Always clean the brake/clutch fluid
system. reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
Vehicle Care 10-33
spill brake fluid on the Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING vehicle. If you do, wash it off
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
immediately. { WARNING
brake/clutch hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
Battery Batteries have acid that can burn
Refer to the replacement number you and gas that can explode.
could cause a crash. Always use
shown on the original battery label You can be badly hurt if you are
the proper brake/clutch fluid.
when a new battery is needed. See not careful. See Jump Starting on
Engine Compartment Overview on page 10‑85 for tips on working
Notice page 10‑6 for battery location. around a battery without
. Using the wrong fluid can getting hurt.
badly damage brake/clutch
hydraulic system parts. For
{ WARNING
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
example, just a few drops of Battery posts, terminals, and black, negative (−) cable from the
mineral-based oil, such as related accessories contain lead battery to keep the battery from
engine oil, in the brake and lead compounds, chemicals running down.
hydraulic system can known to the State of California to
damage brake hydraulic Extended Storage: Remove the
cause cancer and reproductive
system parts so badly that black, negative (−) cable from the
harm. Wash hands after handling. battery or use a battery trickle
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in charger.
the wrong kind of fluid.
. If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to
10-34 Vehicle Care
Rear Axle 2. Firmly apply both the parking Automatic Transmission

brake and the regular brake.
When to Check Lubricant See Parking Brake on
Shift Lock Control
It is not necessary to regularly page 9‑35. Function Check
check the rear axle fluid, unless Do not use the accelerator
there a leak is suspected or an pedal, and be ready to turn off { WARNING
unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss the engine immediately if it
could indicate a problem. Have it starts. When you are doing this
inspected and repaired by your inspection, the vehicle could
3. For automatic transmission move suddenly. If the vehicle
dealer. vehicles, try to start the engine moves, you or others could be
in each gear. The vehicle should injured.
Starter Switch Check start only in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
{ WARNING in any other position, contact 1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
When you are doing this around the vehicle. It should be
For manual transmission
inspection, the vehicle could parked on a level surface.
vehicles, put the shift lever in
move suddenly. If the vehicle 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Neutral, push the clutch pedal
moves, you or others could be down halfway, and try to start See Parking Brake on
injured. the engine. The vehicle should page 9‑35.
start only when the clutch pedal Be ready to apply the regular
1. Before starting this check, be is pushed down all the way to brake immediately if the vehicle
sure there is enough room the floor. If the vehicle starts begins to move.
around the vehicle. when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down, 3. With the engine off, turn the
contact your dealer for service. ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
Vehicle Care 10-35

. To check the P (Park)
shift lever out of P (Park) with Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to
your dealer for service. P (Park). Then release the
{ WARNING parking brake followed by the
Ignition Transmission regular brake.
When you are doing this check,
Lock Check Contact your dealer if service is
the vehicle could begin to move. required.
While parked, and with the parking You or others could be injured
brake set, try to turn the ignition to and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position. of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be
roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear and cracking.
. The ignition should turn to See Maintenance Schedule on
LOCK/OFF only when the shift brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move. page 11‑2 for more information.
lever is in P (Park).
Replacement blades come in
. The ignition key should come different types and are removed in
out only in LOCK/OFF. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping different ways. For proper type and
Contact your dealer if service is your foot on the regular brake, set length, see Maintenance
required. the parking brake. Replacement Parts on page 11‑14.
. To check the parking brake's To replace the windshield wiper
holding ability: With the engine blade:
running and the transmission in 1. Pull the windshield wiper
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot assembly away from the
pressure from the regular brake windshield.
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
10-36 Vehicle Care
4. Remove the wiper blade. Headlamp Aiming

Allowing the wiper blade arm to
Headlamp aim has been preset and
touch the windshield when no
should need no further adjustment.
wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
damage that occurs would not the headlamp aim may be affected.
be covered by the vehicle If adjustment to the headlamps is
warranty. Do not allow the wiper necessary, see your dealer.
blade arm to touch the
windshield.
5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiper
blade replacement.
2. Lift up on the latch in the middle
of the wiper blade where the Windshield Replacement
wiper arm attaches.
If the Head-Up display (HUD)
3. With the latch open, pull the
system and the windshield need to
wiper blade down toward the
be replaced, get one that is
windshield far enough to release
designed for HUD or the HUD
it from the J-hooked end of the
image may look out of focus.
wiper arm.
Vehicle Care 10-37
Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge Headlamps, Front Turn

For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting Signal and Parking
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Lamps (Base Vehicle)
page 10‑41. { WARNING The base model vehicle has a
For any bulb‐changing procedure The high intensity discharge halogen headlamp and a turn
not listed in this section, contact lighting system operates at a very signal/parking lamp on the
your dealer. headlamp assembly.
high voltage. If you try to service
any of the system components,
Halogen Bulbs you could be seriously injured.
Have your dealer or a qualified
{ WARNING technician service them.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you After an HID headlamp bulb has
drop or scratch the bulb. You or been replaced, the beam might be a
others could be injured. Be sure slightly different shade than it was
to read and follow the instructions originally. This is normal.
on the bulb package.
1. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

2. Halogen Headlamp
10-38 Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs: 5. Push the new bulb into the
1. Open the hood. See Hood on socket and reinstall the socket
page 10‑5. into the headlamp assembly by
turning it clockwise.
6. Reconnect the electrical
connector.
7. Pull the duct back out of the air
cleaner/filter housing until the
tabs snap the duct back into
position.
Headlamps, Front Turn

2. Press in on the tabs on the sides
Signal and Parking of the duct, and then push the
Lamps (Uplevel Vehicle) duct rearward into the air
cleaner/filter housing.
The uplevel model vehicle has an
2. Press in on the tabs on the sides HID headlamp and a turn signal
of the duct, and then push the lamp on the headlamp assembly.
duct rearward into the air The parking lamp is also the
cleaner/filter housing. function of the HID headlamp. See
3. Disconnect the wiring harness High Intensity Discharge (HID)
and turn the bulb socket Lighting on page 10‑37.
counterclockwise to remove it To replace the turn signal bulb:
from the headlamp assembly.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
4. Pull the bulb straight out from page 10‑5.
the socket.
Vehicle Care 10-39
7. Pull the duct back out of the air 1. Locate the bulb assembly under
cleaner/filter housing until the the front fascia.
tabs snap the duct back into 2. Disconnect the electrical
position. connector from the bulb
assembly and pull out the bulb
Daytime Running assembly.
Lamps (DRL) 3. Push in the new bulb assembly
The uplevel model vehicle may to lock it into place.
have daytime running lamps in the 4. Reconnect the electrical
front fascia. connector to the bulb assembly.
To replace the DRL bulb in a ZL1, The base model vehicle daytime
3. Disconnect the wiring harness see your dealer. running lamps are the low beam on
and turn the bulb socket To replace one of these bulbs: the halogen headlamp. If one these
counterclockwise to remove it lamps fails, see Headlamps, Front
from the headlamp assembly. Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
4. Pull the bulb straight out from (Uplevel Vehicle) on page 10‑38 or
the socket. Headlamps, Front Turn Signal and
Parking Lamps (Base Vehicle) on
5. Push the new bulb into the page 10‑37 for replacement
socket and reinstall the socket information.
into the headlamp assembly by
turning it clockwise. Fog Lamps
This vehicle may have fog lamps in
connector.
the front fascia.
To replace the fog lamp bulb in a
ZL1, see your dealer.
10-40 Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs: License Plate Lamp

1. Locate the bulb assembly under To replace one of these bulbs:
the front fascia.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb
assembly and pull out the bulb
assembly.
3. Push in the new bulb assembly
to lock it into place.
connector to the bulb assembly.
2. Remove the close out panel
Taillamps, Turn Signal, retainers to gain access to the
bulb socket connectors.
and Stoplamps
3. Turn the bulb socket 1. Unclip the license plate lamp
To replace a taillamp, turn signal, counterclockwise to remove it. from the fascia opening.
or stoplamp bulb:
4. Pull the old bulb straight out of 2. Pull the license plate lamp down
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on the bulb socket. through the fascia opening.
page 2‑8.
5. Push the new bulb straight into 3. Turn the bulb socket
the bulb socket until it clicks. counterclockwise and pull the
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise bulb straight out of the lamp
to reinstall. socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
Vehicle Care 10-41
5. Push the bulb straight into the Electrical System Headlamp Wiring
socket and turn clockwise to
An electrical overload may cause
reinstall.
Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
6. Reinstall the license plate lamp some cases to remain off. Have the
by lifting it through the fascia
Overload headlamp wiring checked right away
opening until the clip is in place. The vehicle has fuses and circuit if the lamps go on and off or
breakers to protect against an remain off.
Replacement Bulbs electrical system overload.
Windshield Wipers
Bulb When the current electrical load is
Exterior Lamp too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to
Number
and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield
Daytime Running PSX26W until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools
Lamp (Uplevel normal or the problem is fixed. This and will then restart.
vehicles) greatly reduces the chance of circuit Although the circuit is protected
Fog Lamp PSX26W overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload
(Except ZL1) electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may
Front Park and Turn 3457NAK Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage.
Signal Lamp power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
Halogen Headlamp H13 Replace a bad fuse with a new one windshield wipers.
of the identical size and rating.
License Plate Lamp W5W If the overload is caused by an
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or
Rear Turn Signal 3157K a fuse needs to be replaced, the
and Taillamps ice, be sure to get it fixed.
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
For replacement bulbs not listed the vehicle that is not needed to use
here, contact your dealer. and replace it as soon as possible.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment

Breakers Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can To remove the hinged fuse block
be temporarily borrowed from cover, press the clip at the front of
another fuse location, if a fuse goes the cover, and swing it up.
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
possible. Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
To identify and check fuses, circuit vehicle may damage it. Always
breakers, and relays, see Engine keep the covers on any electrical
Compartment Fuse Block on component.
page 10‑42, Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 10‑45, and Rear
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 10‑47.
Vehicle Care 10-43
J-Case Usage
Fuses
6 Wiper
12 Starter
22 Brake
Vacuum Pump
25 Power
Windows Rear
26 Power Windows
Front
27 Rear Defog
41 Cooling Fan High
43 Antilock Brake
System Pump
44 Cooling Fan Low
Mini Fuses Usage

1 Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
2 Transmission
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features Control Module
shown. 3 Intercooler Pump
10-44 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

5 Engine Control 19 Transmission 51 Horn
Module Main Control Module/
52 Spare
Ignition
7 Pre-Catalytic
55 High-Beam
Converter Oxygen 20 Engine Control
Headlamp – Right
Sensor Module/Ignition
Front
8 Post-Catalytic 31 Outside Rearview
56 High-Beam
Converter Oxygen Mirror
Headlamp – Left
Sensor
32 Canister Vent Front
9 Fuel Injectors Solenoid
61 Heated Mirror
– Even
33 Body Control
10 Fuel Injectors – Odd Module 6 Mini Relays Usage
11 Cooling Fan Relay 34 Sunroof K26 Powertrain
14 Manifold Air Flow/ 35 Front Heated Seats K50 Run/Crank
Chassis Control
38 Washer Pump Front K55 Rear Defog
15 Ignition
40 Antilock Brake K612 Cooling Fan High
16 Run/Crank IP System Valves
K614 Cooling Fan Control
17 Sensing Diagnostic 46 HID Headlamp –
Module/Ignition Left Front
Micro Usage
18 Run/Crank Body 47 HID Headlamp – Relays
Right Front
K61 Starter
50 Fog Lamps
Vehicle Care 10-45
Micro Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

Relays Block
K69 Wiper Control
K613 Cooling Fan Low
K617 Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
K619 Wiper Speed
K627 High Intensity
Discharge
Headlamps
K632 Brake
Vacuum Pump
K641 Intercooler Pump The instrument panel fuse block is
on the end of the instrument panel,
on the driver side of the vehicle. To
access the fuses, open the fuse
panel door by pulling out.
To reinstall the door, push the door
back into its original location.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
F6 Body Control
Module 2
F8 Battery
F9 Spare
F10 Spare
F11 Spare
F12 Spare
F13 Display
F14 OnStar® Universal
Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped)
F15 Body Control
Module 3
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage
with all of the fuses, relays, and F16 Body Control
features shown. F3 Airbag Module 4
Fuses Usage F4 Cluster F17 Power Outlet 1
F1 Discrete Logic F5 Heating Ventilation F18 Power Outlet 2
Ignition Switch Air Conditioning F19 Steering Wheel
Controller Controls Backlight
F2 Diagnostic Link
Connector F20 Spare
Vehicle Care 10-47
Fuses Usage Relays Usage net retainers, the rear sill plate, and
the passenger side trim retainers,
F21 Spare K10 Retained Accessory then swing the trim out of the way.
Power
F22 Spare
K609 Trunk
F23 Trunk
SPARE SPARE
F24 Automatic Occupant
Sensing
Rear Compartment Fuse
F25 Body Control
Module 1 Block
F27 Body Control
Module 8
F28 Front Heater,
Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning
F29 Body Control
Module 5
F30 Body Control
Module 7
Circuit Usage
Breakers The rear compartment fuse block is
on the right side of the trunk behind
CB7 Passenger Seat
a cover. Remove the convenience
CB26 Driver Seat
10-48 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
F7 Real Time Damping
F8 Active Exhaust
Flapper
F9 Spare 4
F10 Engine Control
Module/Battery
F11 Regulated Voltage
Control
F12 Fuel System Control
Module
Relays Usage
R1 Spare
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage R2 Active Exhaust
with all of the fuses, relays, and Flapper
features shown. F2 Amplifier
Fuses Usage F3 Radio
F1 Universal Garage F4 Convertible Top 1
Door Opener/Ultra– F5 Convertible Top 2
sonic Rear Parking
Assist/Inside F6 Spare 1
Rearview Mirror
Vehicle Care 10-49
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can
Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread
high-quality tires made by a page 9‑12. is badly worn,
leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose replace them.
the warranty manual for the same danger as . Replace any tires that
information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The have been damaged by
warranty and where to get resulting crash could impacts with potholes,
service. For additional cause serious injury. curbs, etc.
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently . Improperly repaired tires
manufacturer. to maintain the can cause a crash. Only
recommended pressure. the dealer or an
{ WARNING Tire pressure should be authorized tire service
checked when the tires center should repair,
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are replace, dismount, and
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires.
likely to be cut, punctured, . Do not spin the tires in
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a excess of 56 km/h
impact— such as when (35 mph) on slippery
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout surfaces such as snow,
tires at the recommended mud, ice, etc. Excessive
(Continued) pressure. spinning may cause the
(Continued) tires to explode.
10-50 Vehicle Care

. Use only radial ply tires of the
All-Season Tires Winter Tires same size, load range, and
This vehicle may come with This vehicle was not, originally, speed rating as the original
all-season tires. These tires are equipped with winter tires. Winter equipment tires.
designed to provide good overall tires are designed for increased
Winter tires with the same speed
performance on most road surfaces traction on snow and ice-covered
rating as the original equipment tires
and weather conditions. Original roads. Consider installing winter
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
equipment tires designed to GM's tires on the vehicle if frequent
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
specific tire performance criteria driving on snow or ice-covered
tires with a lower speed rating are
have a TPC specification code roads is expected. See your dealer
chosen, never exceed the tire's
molded onto the sidewall. Original for details regarding winter tire
maximum speed capability.
equipment all-season tires can be availability and proper tire selection.
identified by the last two characters Also, see Buying New Tires on
of this TPC code, which will page 10‑65. Summer Tires
be “MS.” With winter tires, there may be This vehicle may come with high
Consider installing winter tires on decreased dry road traction, performance summer tires. These
the vehicle if frequent driving on increased road noise, and shorter tires have a special tread and
snow or ice-covered roads is tread life. After changing to winter compound that are optimized for
expected. All-season tires provide tires, be alert for changes in vehicle maximum dry and wet road
adequate performance for most handling and braking. performance. This special tread and
winter driving conditions, but they compound will decrease
If using winter tires: performance in cold climates, and
may not offer the same level of
traction or performance as winter . Use tires of the same brand and on ice and snow. We recommend
tires on snow or ice-covered roads. tread type on all four wheel installing winter tires on the vehicle
See Winter Tires on page 10‑50. positions. if frequent driving in cold
temperatures or on snow or ice
covered roads is expected. See
Winter Tires on page 10‑50.
Vehicle Care 10-51
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the digits represent the week (01–
“Tire Size” illustration later in this 52) and the last two digits, the
Useful information about a tire is section. year. For example, the third
molded into its sidewall. The week of the year 2010 would
examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date
passenger vehicle tire and a of 0310.
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to (4) Tire Identification Number
GM's specific tire performance (TIN): The letters and numbers
criteria have a TPC specification following the DOT (Department
code molded onto the sidewall. of Transportation) code are the
GM's TPC specifications meet or Tire Identification Number (TIN).
exceed all federal safety The TIN shows the
guidelines. manufacturer and plant code,
(3) DOT (Department of tire size, and date the tire was
Transportation): The manufactured. The TIN is
Department of Transportation molded onto both sides of the
(DOT) code indicates that the tire, although only one side may
tire is in compliance with the have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
U.S. Department of (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
(1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle of cord and number of plies in
combination of letters and Safety Standards. the sidewall and under the tread.
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of (6) Uniform Tire Quality
aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four Grading (UTQG): Tire
digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufacturers are required to
manufactured date. The first two grade tires based on three
10-52 Vehicle Care
performance factors: treadwear, (2) Temporary Use Only: The (4) Maximum Cold Inflation
traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary Load Limit: Maximum load that
resistance. For more information use tire should not be driven at can be carried and the
see Uniform Tire Quality speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). maximum pressure needed to
Grading on page 10‑67. The compact spare tire is for support that load.
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular (5) Tire Inflation: The
Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone temporary use tire or compact
can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire should be inflated to
maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
support that load. Tire on page 10‑84 and If a Tire information on tire pressure and
Goes Flat on page 10‑70. inflation see Tire Pressure on
(3) Tire Identification Number page 10‑56.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (6) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code are the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number (TIN). construction type, and service
The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary
manufactured. The TIN is use only.
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may (7) TPC Spec (Tire
Compact Spare Tire Example Performance Criteria
have the date of manufacture.
(1) Tire Ply Material : The type Specification): Original
of cord and number of plies in equipment tires designed to
the sidewall and under the tread. GM's specific tire performance
Vehicle Care 10-53
criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches.
GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association. (6) Service Description: These
exceed all federal safety (2) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load
guidelines. number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
Tire Size (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed
number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a
The following is an example of a
height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load.
typical passenger vehicle
tire size. For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Tire Terminology and
item 3 of the illustration, it would Definitions
mean that the tire's sidewall is Air Pressure: The amount of
60 percent as high as it is wide. air inside the tire pressing
(4) Construction Code: A letter outward on each square inch of
code is used to indicate the type the tire. Air pressure is
of ply construction in the tire. expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: or psi (pounds per square inch).
The United States version of a The letter R means radial ply
metric tire sizing system. The construction; the letter D means Accessory Weight: The
letter P as the first character in diagonal or bias ply combined weight of optional
the tire size means a passenger construction; and the letter B accessories. Some examples of
means belted-bias ply optional accessories are
construction. automatic transmission, power
10-54 Vehicle Care
steering, power brakes, power before a tire has built up heat GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure Rating for the front axle. See
conditioning. on page 10‑56. Vehicle Load Limits on
Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a page 9‑12.
of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the Rating for the rear axle. See
cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, Vehicle Load Limits on
tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without page 9‑12.
steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo. Intended Outboard Sidewall :
materials. DOT Markings: A code molded The side of an asymmetrical tire,
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire that must always face outward
steel wires wrapped by steel signifying that the tire is in when mounted on a vehicle.
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
the rim. Department of Transportation unit for air pressure.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification tire used on light duty trucks and
alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric some multipurpose passenger
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also vehicles.
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer, Load Index: An assigned
Cold Tire Pressure: The production plant, brand, and number ranging from 1 to 279
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production. that corresponds to the load
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight carrying capacity of a tire.
or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑12.
Vehicle Care 10-55
Maximum Inflation Pressure: outward when mounted on a Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
The maximum air pressure to vehicle. The side of the tire that tire in which the ply cords that
which a cold tire can be inflated. contains a whitewall, bears extend to the beads are laid at
The maximum air pressure is white lettering, or bears 90 degrees to the centerline of
molded onto the sidewall. manufacturer, brand, and/or the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is Rim: A metal support for a tire
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same and upon which the tire beads
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall are seated.
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A between the tread and the bead.
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and Speed Rating: An
weight, accessory weight, alphanumeric code assigned to
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
a tire indicating the maximum
production options weight. Recommended Inflation speed at which a tire can
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle operate.
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown Traction: The friction between
is designed to seat multiplied by the tire and the road surface.
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑56 and The amount of grip provided.
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Vehicle Load Limits on Tread: The portion of a tire that
Occupant Distribution : page 9‑12. comes into contact with
Designated seating positions. the road.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
side of an asymmetrical tire that bands, sometimes called wear
has a particular side that faces bars, that show across the tread
10-56 Vehicle Care
of a tire when only 1.6 mm Vehicle Maximum Load on the . Tire overloading and
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See Tire: Load on an individual tire overheating which could
When It Is Time for New Tires due to curb weight, accessory lead to a blowout.
on page 10‑64. weight, occupant weight, and . Premature or
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality cargo weight. irregular wear.
Grading Standards): A tire Vehicle Placard: A label . Poor handling.
information system that provides permanently attached to a
consumers with ratings for a vehicle showing the vehicle
. Reduced fuel economy.
tire's traction, temperature, and capacity weight and the original Overinflated tires, or tires that
treadwear. Ratings are equipment tire size and have too much air, can
determined by tire recommended inflation pressure. result in:
manufacturers using See “Tire and Loading . Unusual wear.
government testing procedures. Information Label” under Vehicle
The ratings are molded into the Load Limits on page 9‑12. . Poor handling.
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform . Rough ride.
Tire Quality Grading on Tire Pressure
page 10‑67.
. Needless damage from
Tires need the correct amount of road hazards.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The air pressure to operate
number of designated seating effectively. The Tire and Loading
positions multiplied by Information label on the vehicle
Notice: Neither tire indicates the original equipment
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated underinflation nor
cargo load. See Vehicle Load tires and the correct cold tire
overinflation is good. inflation pressures. The
Limits on page 9‑12. Underinflated tires, or tires recommended pressure is the
that do not have enough air, minimum air pressure needed to
can result in: support the vehicle's maximum
Vehicle Care 10-57
load carrying capacity. See the vehicle has not been driven Tire Pressure for
Vehicle Load Limits on for at least three hours or no High-Speed Operation
page 9‑12. more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
How the vehicle is loaded Remove the valve cap from the { WARNING
affects vehicle handling and ride tire valve stem. Press the tire
comfort. Never load the vehicle gauge firmly onto the valve to Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
with more weight than it was get a pressure measurement. (100 mph) or higher, puts an
designed to carry. If the cold tire inflation pressure additional strain on tires.
matches the recommended Sustained high-speed driving
When to Check causes excessive heat buildup
pressure on the Tire and
Check the tires once a month or and can cause sudden tire failure.
Loading Information label, no
You could have a crash and you
more. Do not forget the compact further adjustment is necessary. or others could be killed. Some
spare, if the vehicle has one. If the inflation pressure is low, high-speed rated tires require
The cold compact spare tire add air until the recommended inflation pressure adjustment for
pressure should be at 420 kPa pressure is reached. If the high-speed operation. When
(60 psi). See Compact Spare inflation pressure is high, press speed limits and road conditions
Tire on page 10‑84. on the metal stem in the center are such that a vehicle can be
How to Check of the tire valve to release air. driven at high speeds, make sure
Recheck the tire pressure with the tires are rated for high-speed
Use a good quality pocket-type operation, in excellent condition,
gauge to check tire pressure. the tire gauge.
and set to the correct cold tire
Proper tire inflation cannot be Return the valve caps on the inflation pressure for the
determined by looking at the tire. valve stems to prevent leaks vehicle load.
Check the tire inflation pressure and keep out dirt and moisture.
when the tires are cold, meaning
10-58 Vehicle Care
Vehicles with 245/45ZR20 103Y, Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more
P245/50ZR19 104W, 275/ of your tires is significantly
40ZR20 106Y, 285/35ZR20 (100Y),
System under-inflated.
and 305/35ZR20 (104Y) size tires, The Tire Pressure Monitor System Accordingly, when the low tire
have tires capable of high (TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale illuminates, you
speed use. technology to check tire pressure should stop and check your tires as
Make sure vehicles with 245/ levels. The TPMS sensors monitor soon as possible, and inflate them
45ZR20 103Y, P245/50ZR19 104W the air pressure in your tires and to the proper pressure. Driving on a
and 275/40ZR20 106Y size tires are transmit tire pressure readings to a significantly under-inflated tire
inflated to the recommended cold receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can
inflation pressures before operating Each tire, including the spare (if lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
the vehicle at speeds over 160 km/h provided), should be checked also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
(100 mph). See Vehicle Load Limits monthly when cold and inflated to tread life, and may affect the
on page 9‑12 and Tire Pressure on the inflation pressure recommended vehicle's handling and stopping
page 10‑56. by the vehicle manufacturer on the ability.
Make sure vehicles with 285/ vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is not a
35ZR20 (100Y), and 305/35ZR20 pressure label. (If your vehicle has substitute for proper tire
(104Y) size tires are inflated to tires of a different size than the size maintenance, and it is the driver's
300 kPa (44 psi) before operating indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire
the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h tire inflation pressure label, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
(100 mph) or higher. should determine the proper tire not reached the level to trigger
inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire
Return the tires to the
recommended cold tire inflation As an added safety feature, your pressure telltale.
pressure when high-speed driving vehicle has been equipped with a Your vehicle has also been
has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
on page 9‑12 and Tire Pressure on (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the
page 10‑56. system is not operating properly.
Vehicle Care 10-59
The TPMS malfunction indicator is Federal Communications

combined with the low tire pressure Commission (FCC) Rules and
telltale. When the system detects a with Industry Canada
malfunction, the telltale will flash for Standards
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. See Radio Frequency Statement on
This sequence will continue upon page 13‑21 for information
When a low tire pressure condition
subsequent vehicle start-ups as regarding Part 15 of the Federal
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
long as the malfunction exists. Communications Commission (FCC)
the low tire pressure warning light
Rules and with Industry Canada
When the malfunction indicator is located on the instrument cluster.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
illuminated, the system may not be If the warning light comes on, stop
able to detect or signal low tire as soon as possible and inflate the
pressure as intended. TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitor tires to the recommended pressure
malfunctions may occur for a variety Operation shown on the Tire and Loading
of reasons, including the installation Information label. See Vehicle Load
This vehicle may have a Tire
of replacement or alternate tires or Limits on page 9‑12.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
wheels on the vehicle that prevent The TPMS is designed to warn the A message to check the pressure in
the TPMS from functioning properly. driver when a low tire pressure a specific tire displays in the Driver
Always check the TPMS malfunction condition exists. TPMS sensors are Information Center (DIC) display.
telltale after replacing one or more mounted onto each tire and wheel The low tire pressure warning light
tires or wheels on your vehicle to assembly, excluding the spare tire and the DIC warning message come
ensure that the replacement or and wheel assembly. The TPMS on at each ignition cycle until the
alternate tires and wheels allow the sensors monitor the air pressure in tires are inflated to the correct
TPMS to continue to function the tires and transmit the tire inflation pressure. Using the DIC,
properly. pressure readings to a receiver tire pressure levels can be viewed.
See Tire Pressure Monitor located in the vehicle. For additional information and
10-60 Vehicle Care
details about the DIC operation and Notice: Tire sealant materials are TPMS Malfunction Light and
displays see Driver Information not all the same. A non-approved Message
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25. tire sealant could damage the
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor The TPMS will not function properly
The low tire pressure warning light if one or more of the TPMS sensors
may come on in cool weather when damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not are missing or inoperable. When the
the vehicle is first started, and then system detects a malfunction, the
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use only the low tire warning light flashes for
could be an early indicator that the about one minute and then stays on
air pressure is getting low and must GM-approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or for the remainder of the ignition
be inflated to the proper pressure. cycle. A DIC warning message also
included in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information label displays. The malfunction light and
shows the size of the original Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits DIC warning message come on at
equipment tires and the correct use a GM-approved liquid tire each ignition cycle until the problem
inflation pressure for the tires when sealant. Using non-approved tire is corrected. Some of the conditions
they are cold. See Vehicle Load sealants could damage the TPMS that can cause these to come
Limits on page 9‑12, for an example sensors. See Tire Sealant and on are:
of the Tire and Loading Information Compressor Kit on page 10‑72 for
information regarding the inflator kit
. One of the road tires has been
label and its location. Also see Tire replaced with the spare tire. The
Pressure on page 10‑56. materials and instructions.
spare tire does not have a
The TPMS can warn about a low TPMS sensor. The malfunction
tire pressure condition but it does light and DIC message should
not replace normal tire go off after the road tire is
maintenance. See Tire Inspection replaced and the sensor
on page 10‑62, Tire Rotation on matching process is performed
page 10‑63 and Tires on successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
page 10‑49. Matching Process" later in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-61

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or relearn tool, in the following order:
process was not done or not being near facilities using radio driver side front tire, passenger side
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the front tire, passenger side rear tire,
rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS and driver side rear. See your
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction. dealer for service or to purchase a
message should go off after If the TPMS is not functioning relearn tool.
successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a
sensor matching process. See There are two minutes to match the
low tire condition. See your dealer first tire/wheel position, and
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction
Process" later in this section. five minutes overall to match all four
light and DIC message come on tire/wheel positions. If it takes
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stay on. longer, the matching process stops
missing or damaged. The DIC and must be restarted.
message and the malfunction TPMS Sensor Matching
light should go off when the Process The TPMS sensor matching
TPMS sensors are installed and process is:
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake.
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off.
. Replacement tires or wheels do tires or replacing one or more of the
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor 3. Use the MENU button to select
not match the original equipment
matching process should also be the Vehicle Information menu in
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
performed after replacing a spare the Driver Information
other than those recommended
tire with a road tire containing the Center (DIC).
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying TPMS sensor. The malfunction light 4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to
New Tires on page 10‑65. and the DIC message should go off the Tire Pressure Menu item
at the next ignition cycle. The screen.
sensors are matched to the tire/
wheel positions, using a TPMS
10-62 Vehicle Care
5. Press the SET/CLR button to 10. Proceed to the passenger side Replace the tire if:
begin the sensor matching rear tire, and repeat the
process. procedure in Step 8.
. The indicators at three or
more places around the tire
A message requesting 11. Proceed to the driver side rear can be seen.
acceptance of the process tire, and repeat the procedure
should display. in Step 8. The horn sounds two . There is cord or fabric
6. Press the SET/CLR button again times to indicate the sensor showing through the tire's
to confirm the selection. identification code has been rubber.
matched to the driver side rear
The horn sounds twice to signal tire, and the TPMS sensor
. The tread or sidewall is
the receiver is in relearn mode matching process is no longer cracked, cut, or snagged
and the TIRE LEARNING active. The TIRE LEARNING deep enough to show cord or
ACTIVE message displays on ACTIVE message on the DIC fabric.
the DIC screen. display screen goes off. . The tire has a bump, bulge,
7. Start with the driver side 12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. or split.
front tire.
13. Set all four tires to the . The tire has a puncture, cut,
8. Place the relearn tool against recommended air pressure
the tire sidewall, near the valve or other damage that cannot
level as indicated on the Tire
stem. Then press the button to and Loading Information label. be repaired well because of
activate the TPMS sensor. the size or location of the
A horn chirp confirms that the Tire Inspection damage.
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and We recommend that the tires,
wheel position. including the spare tire, if the
9. Proceed to the passenger side vehicle has one, be inspected
front tire, and repeat the for signs of wear or damage at
procedure in Step 8. least once a month.
Vehicle Care 10-63
Tire Rotation position it is in. Directional tires

will have an arrow on the tire
If the vehicle has non-directional indicating the proper direction of
tires, they should be rotated rotation or will have “left” or
every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. See “right” molded on the sidewall.
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑2.
Tires are rotated to achieve a
uniform wear for all tires. The
first rotation is the most
important.
Anytime unusual wear is Use this rotation pattern when
noticed, rotate the tires as soon rotating tires of the same size
as possible, check for proper tire installed on all four wheel
inflation pressure, and check for positions.
damaged tires or wheels. If the
If the vehicle has a compact
unusual wear continues after the
spare tire, do not include it in the
rotation, check the wheel Use this rotation pattern if the tire rotation.
alignment. See When It Is Time vehicle has different size tires
for New Tires on page 10‑64 on the front and rear and they Adjust the front and rear tires to
and Wheel Replacement on are non-directional. the recommended inflation
page 10‑69. pressure on the Tire and
Different tire sizes should not be Loading Information label after
Directional tires should not be rotated front to rear. the tires have been rotated. See
rotated. Each tire and wheel
should be used only in the
10-64 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure on page 9‑12 and

Vehicle Load Limits on WARNING (Continued)
page 9‑12. towel can be used; however, use
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a scraper or wire brush later to
System. See Tire Pressure remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑59. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque” under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion
and Specifications on or rust build-up. Do not get
page 12‑2. grease on the flat wheel Treadwear indicators are one way to
mounting surface or on the tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
{ WARNING wheel nuts or bolts.
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the When It Is Time for New Inspection on page 10‑62 and Tire
parts to which it is fastened, can Tires Rotation on page 10‑63.
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come Factors such as maintenance, The rubber in tires ages over time.
off and cause an accident. When temperatures, driving speeds, This also applies to the spare tire,
changing a wheel, remove any vehicle loading, and road conditions if the vehicle has one, even if it is
affect the wear rate of the tires. never used. Multiple factors
rust or dirt from places where the
including temperatures, loading
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
conditions, and inflation pressure
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
maintenance affect how fast aging
(Continued) takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
Vehicle Care 10-65
equipped, be replaced after six at least a month, remove the tires or number is molded onto the tire's
years, regardless of tread wear. The raise the vehicle to reduce the sidewall near the tire size. If the
tire manufacturer date is the last weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread
four digits of the DOT Tire design, the TPC Spec number
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud
molded into one side of the tire
sidewall. The first two digits GM has developed and matched and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (01–52) and the specific tires for the vehicle. The Labeling on page 10‑51.
last two digits, the year. For original equipment tires installed GM recommends replacing worn
example, the third week of the year were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four.
2010 would have a four-digit DOT Motors Tire Performance Criteria Uniform tread depth on all tires
date of 0310. Specification (TPC Spec) will help to maintain the
Vehicle Storage system rating. When performance of the vehicle.
replacement tires are needed, Braking and handling
Tires age when stored normally GM strongly recommends
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park performance may be adversely
a vehicle that will be stored for at
buying tires with the same TPC affected if all the tires are not
least a month in a cool, dry, clean Spec rating. replaced at the same time.
area away from direct sunlight to GM's exclusive TPC Spec If proper rotation and
slow aging. This area should be free system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
of grease, gasoline, or other critical specifications that impact all four tires should wear out at
substances that can deteriorate the overall performance of the about the same time. See Tire
rubber. Rotation on page 10‑63 for
vehicle, including brake system
Parking for an extended period can performance, ride and handling, information on proper tire
cause flat spots on the tires that traction control, and tire rotation. However, if it is
may result in vibrations while pressure monitoring necessary to replace only one
driving. When storing a vehicle for axle set of worn tires, place the
performance. GM's TPC Spec
new tires on the rear axle.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Winter tires with the same speed sure they are the same size,
rating as the original equipment { WARNING load range, speed rating, and
tires may not be available for H, Mixing tires of different sizes, construction (radial) as the
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated brands, or types may cause original tires.
tires. Never exceed the winter loss of control of the vehicle, Vehicles that have a tire
tire's maximum speed capability resulting in a crash or other pressure monitoring system
when using winter tires with a vehicle damage. Use the could give an inaccurate
lower speed rating. correct size, brand, and type low-pressure warning if non-TPC
of tires on all wheels. Spec rated tires are installed.
{ WARNING See Tire Pressure Monitor
Tires could explode during System on page 10‑58.
improper service. Attempting { WARNING The Tire and Loading
to mount or dismount a tire Information label indicates the
could cause injury or death. Using bias-ply tires on the original equipment tires on the
Only your dealer or authorized vehicle may cause the wheel vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
tire service center should rim flanges to develop cracks on page 9‑12.
mount or dismount the tires. after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail Different Size Tires and
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
Wheels
the wheels on the vehicle. If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
If the vehicle tires must be performance, including its braking,
replaced with a tire that does not ride and handling characteristics,
have a TPC Spec number, make stability, and resistance to rollover
Vehicle Care 10-67
may be affected. If the vehicle has Uniform Tire Quality nominal rim diameters of
electronic systems such as antilock 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
Grading
or to some limited-production
control, electronic stability control, Quality grades can be found tires.
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance where applicable on the tire
of these systems can also be sidewall between tread shoulder While the tires available on
affected. and maximum section width. For General Motors passenger cars
example: and light trucks may vary with
{ WARNING respect to these grades, they
Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal
If different sized wheels are used, Temperature A safety requirements and
there may not be an acceptable additional General Motors Tire
level of performance and safety if The following information relates
to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
tires not recommended for those standards.
wheels are selected. This United States National Highway
increases the chance of a crash Traffic Safety Administration All Passenger Car Tires Must
and serious injury. Only use GM (NHTSA), which grades tires by Conform to Federal Safety
specific wheel and tire systems treadwear, traction, and Requirements In Addition To
developed for the vehicle, and temperature performance. This These Grades.
have them properly installed by a applies only to vehicles sold in
GM certified technician. the United States. The grades Treadwear
are molded on the sidewalls of The treadwear grade is a
See Buying New Tires on most passenger car tires. The comparative rating based on the
page 10‑65 and Accessories and Uniform Tire Quality Grading wear rate of the tire when tested
Modifications on page 10‑3. (UTQG) system does not apply under controlled conditions on a
to deep tread, winter tires, specified government test
compact spare tires, tires with course. For example, a tire
10-68 Vehicle Care
graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory
one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
performance of tires depends characteristics. established for a tire that is
upon the actual conditions of properly inflated and not
Temperature – A, B, C
their use, however, and may overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
differences in road to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor Balance
The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
provide the longest tire life and best
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and overall performance. Adjustments to
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead wheel alignment and tire balancing
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade will not be necessary on a regular
specified government test C corresponds to a level of basis. However, check the
surfaces of asphalt and performance which all alignment if there is unusual tire
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety one side or the other. If the vehicle
Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and vibrates when driving on a smooth
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
Vehicle Care 10-69
road, the tires and wheels might Used Replacement Wheels

need to be rebalanced. See your { WARNING
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Using the wrong replacement { WARNING
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Wheel Replacement nuts can be dangerous. It could
Replacing a wheel with a used
Replace any wheel that is bent, one is dangerous. How it has
affect the braking and handling of
cracked, or badly rusted or been used or how far it has been
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming driven may be unknown. It could
and cause loss of control, causing
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and fail suddenly and cause a crash.
a crash. Always use the correct
wheel nuts should be replaced. When replacing wheels, use a
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. new GM original equipment
nuts for replacement.
Some aluminum wheels can be wheel.
repaired. See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist. Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing Tire Chains
Your dealer will know the kind of life, brake cooling, speedometer
wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the
or odometer calibration, { WARNING
headlamp aim, rear differential,
same load-carrying capacity, bumper height, vehicle ground Do not use tire chains. There is
diameter, width, offset, and be clearance, and tire or tire chain not enough clearance. Tire chains
mounted the same way as the one it clearance to the body and used on a vehicle without the
replaces. chassis. proper amount of clearance can
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel See If a Tire Goes Flat on cause damage to the brakes,
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor page 10‑70 for more information. suspension, or other vehicle
System (TPMS) sensors with new parts. The area damaged by the
GM original equipment parts. tire chains could cause loss of
(Continued)
10-70 Vehicle Care
If a Tire Goes Flat

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
control and a crash. Use another while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause
type of traction device only if its are maintained properly. See Tires permanent damage to the tire.
manufacturer recommends it for on page 10‑49. If air goes out of a Re-inflating a tire after it has been
the vehicle's tire size combination tire, it is much more likely to leak driven on while severely
and road conditions. Follow that out slowly. But if there is ever a underinflated or flat may cause a
manufacturer's instructions. To blowout, here are a few tips about blowout and a serious crash.
avoid vehicle damage, drive what to expect and what to do: Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
slowly and readjust or remove the If a front tire fails, the flat tire that has been driven on while
traction device if it contacts the creates a drag that pulls the vehicle severely underinflated or flat.
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. toward that side. Take your foot off Have your dealer or an authorized
If traction devices are used, install the accelerator pedal and grip the tire service center repair or
them on the rear tires. steering wheel firmly. Steer to replace the flat tire as soon as
maintain lane position, and then possible.
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
{ WARNING
may require the same correction as Lifting a vehicle and getting under
used in a skid. Stop pressing the it to do maintenance or repairs is
accelerator pedal and steer to dangerous without the
straighten the vehicle. It may be appropriate safety equipment and
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake training. If a jack is provided with
to a stop, well off the road,
the vehicle, it is designed only for
if possible.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-71
and compressor kit, see Tire

WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑72.
changing a flat tire. If it is used for 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
anything else, you or others could When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
2. Put an automatic use the following example as a
be badly injured or killed if the transmission in P (Park) or a
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack guide to assist you in the placement
manual transmission in of wheel blocks (1).
is provided with the vehicle, only 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
use it for changing a flat tire.
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire is raised.
and wheel damage by driving slowly
4. Do not allow passengers to
to a level place, well off the road,
remain in the vehicle.
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard 5. Place wheel blocks on both
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
{ WARNING being changed. 1. Wheel Block
2. Flat Tire
Changing a tire can be This vehicle may come with a jack
dangerous. The vehicle can slip The following information explains
and spare tire or a tire sealant and how to repair or change a tire.
off the jack and roll over or fall compressor kit. To use the jacking
causing injury or death. Find a equipment to change a spare tire
level place to change the tire. To safely, follow the instructions below.
help prevent the vehicle from Then see Tire Changing on
moving: page 10‑79. To use the tire sealant
(Continued)
10-72 Vehicle Care
Tire Sealant and WARNING (Continued)

If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
Compressor Kit spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and compressor kit instructions and on some vehicles there may not
{ WARNING and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
be a place to store a tire.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed exceed the recommended The tire sealant and compressor
area with poor ventilation is pressure. can be used to temporarily seal
dangerous. Engine exhaust may punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in
the tread area of the tire. It can also
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
be used to inflate an under
contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. { WARNING inflated tire.
It can cause unconsciousness If the tire has been separated from
Storing the tire sealant and the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
and even death. Never run the compressor kit or other
engine in an enclosed area that or has a large puncture, the tire is
equipment in the passenger too severely damaged for the tire
has no fresh air ventilation. For compartment of the vehicle could
more information, see Engine sealant and compressor kit to be
cause injury. In a sudden stop or effective. See Roadside Assistance
Exhaust on page 9‑25. collision, loose equipment could Program (Mexico) on page 13‑7 or
strike someone. Store the tire Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
sealant and compressor kit in its and Canada) on page 13‑11.
{ WARNING original location.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
Overinflating a tire could cause Tire sealant may not completely instructions.
the tire to rupture and you or seal a 305/35ZR20 tire below
others could be injured. Be sure –18° C (0° F).
to read and follow the tire sealant
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-73
The kit includes: Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the compressor.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister. The
sealant canister should be replaced
before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
When using the tire sealant and
There is only enough sealant to seal compressor kit during cold
1. On/Off Button one tire. After usage, the sealant temperatures, warm the kit in a
2. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or canister and sealant/air hose heated environment for five minutes.
Air Only) assembly must be replaced. See This will help to inflate the tire
“Removal and Installation of the faster.
3. Pressure Relief Button Sealant Canister” following.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
4. Pressure Gauge Using the Tire Sealant and and wheel damage by driving slowly
5. Air Only Hose (Black) Compressor Kit to Temporarily to a level place. Turn on the hazard
6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) Seal and Inflate a warning flashers. See Hazard
Punctured Tire Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
7. Power Plug
Follow the directions closely for See If a Tire Goes Flat on
correct sealant usage. page 10‑70 for other important
safety warnings.
10-74 Vehicle Care
Do not remove any objects that 6. Plug the power plug (7) into the 9. Press the on/off button (1) to
have penetrated the tire. accessory power outlet in the turn the tire sealant and
1. Remove the tire sealant and vehicle. Unplug all items from compressor kit on.
compressor kit from its storage other accessory power outlets. The compressor will inject
location. See Storing the Tire See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. sealant and air into the tire.
Sealant and Compressor Kit on If the vehicle has an accessory The pressure gauge (4) will
page 10‑78. power outlet, do not use the initially show a high pressure
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6) cigarette lighter. while the compressor pushes the
and the power plug (7). If the vehicle only has a cigarette sealant into the tire. Once the
3. Place the kit on the ground. lighter, use the cigarette lighter. sealant is completely dispersed
Do not pinch the power plug into the tire, the pressure will
Make sure the tire valve stem is quickly drop and start to rise
positioned close to the ground cord in the door or window.
again as the tire inflates with
so the hose will reach it. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle air only.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from must be running while using the
air compressor. 10. Inflate the tire to the
the flat tire by turning it recommended inflation
counterclockwise. 8. Turn the selector switch (2) pressure using the pressure
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6) clockwise to the Sealant + Air gauge (4). The recommended
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it position. inflation pressure can be found
clockwise until it is tight. on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑56.
The pressure gauge (4) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
Vehicle Care 10-75
reading. The compressor may 11. Press the on/off button (1) to
be turned on/off until the turn the tire sealant and
correct pressure is reached. compressor kit off.
Notice: If the recommended The tire is not sealed and will
pressure cannot be reached after continue to leak air until the
approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle is driven and the
vehicle should not be driven sealant is distributed in the tire; 16. If the flat tire was able to inflate
farther. The tire is too severely therefore, Steps 12–18 must be to the recommended inflation
damaged and the tire sealant and done immediately after pressure, remove the
compressor kit cannot inflate the Step 11. maximum speed label from the
tire. Remove the power plug from sealant canister and place it in
Be careful while handling the
the accessory power outlet and a highly visible location. Do not
tire sealant and compressor kit
unscrew the inflating hose from exceed the speed on this label
as it could be warm after
the tire valve. See Roadside until the damaged tire is
usage.
Assistance Program (Mexico) on repaired or replaced.
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance 12. Unplug the power plug (7) from
17. Return the equipment to its
Program (U.S. and Canada) on the accessory power outlet in
original storage location in the
page 13‑11. the vehicle.
vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6)
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
counterclockwise to remove it
8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
from the tire valve stem.
sealant in the tire.
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
15. Return the sealant/air hose (6)
and the power plug (7) back in
their original locations.
10-76 Vehicle Care
19. Stop at a safe location and If the tire pressure has not Using the Tire Sealant and
check the tire pressure. Refer dropped more than 68 kPa Compressor Kit without
to Steps 1–11 under “Using the (10 psi) from the recommended Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Tire Sealant and Compressor inflation pressure, use the Punctured)
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a compressor kit to inflate the tire
Tire (Not Punctured).” to the recommended inflation To use the air compressor to inflate
pressure. a tire with air only and not sealant:
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi) 20. Wipe off any sealant from the
below the recommended wheel, tire, and vehicle.
inflation pressure, stop driving 21. Dispose of the used sealant
the vehicle. The tire is too canister and sealant/air hose
severely damaged and the tire (6) assembly at a local dealer
sealant cannot seal the tire. or in accordance with local
See Roadside Assistance state codes and practices.
Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑7 or Roadside 22. Replace it with a new canister
Assistance Program (U.S. and available from your dealer.
Canada) on page 13‑11. 23. After temporarily sealing a tire
using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
within 161 km (100 mi) of and wheel damage by driving slowly
driving to have the tire repaired to a level place. Turn on the hazard
or replaced. warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑70 for other important
safety warnings.
Vehicle Care 10-77
1. Remove the tire sealant and 6. Plug the power plug (7) into the 10. Inflate the tire to the
compressor kit from its storage accessory power outlet in the recommended inflation
location. See Storing the Tire vehicle. Unplug all items from pressure using the pressure
Sealant and Compressor Kit on other accessory power outlets. gauge (4). The recommended
page 10‑78. See Power Outlets on page 5‑5. inflation pressure can be found
2. Unwrap the air only hose (5) and If the vehicle has an accessory on the Tire and Loading
the power plug (7). power outlet, do not use the Information label. See Tire
cigarette lighter. Pressure on page 10‑56.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette The pressure gauge (4) may
Make sure the tire valve stem is read higher than the actual tire
positioned close to the ground lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
pressure while the compressor
so the hose will reach it. Do not pinch the power plug is on. Turn the compressor off
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap cord in the door or window. to get an accurate reading. The
from the flat tire by turning it 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle compressor may be turned on/
counterclockwise. must be running while using the off until the correct pressure is
air compressor. reached. If the tire is inflated
5. Attach the air only hose (5) onto higher than the recommended
the tire valve stem by turning it 8. Turn the selector switch (2) pressure, press the pressure
clockwise until it is tight. counterclockwise to the Air Only relief button (3), if equipped,
position. until the proper pressure
9. Press the on/off button (1) to reading is reached. This option
turn the compressor on. is only functional when using
the air only hose (5).
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
10-78 Vehicle Care
11. Press the on/off button (1) to Removal and Installation of the 6. Screw the connector (2) to the
turn the tire sealant and Sealant Canister canister (1).
compressor kit off. 7. Slide the plastic cover back on.
To remove the sealant canister:
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit Storing the Tire Sealant
as it could be warm after
usage.
and Compressor Kit
12. Unplug the power plug (7) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the air only
hose (5) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
14. Return the air only hose (5) 1. Remove the plastic cover.
and the power plug (7) back to
their original locations. 2. Unscrew the connector (2) from
the canister (1).
15. Return the equipment to its
3. Pull up on the canister (1) to The tire sealant and compressor kit
original storage location in the
remove it. is in a foam container in the trunk.
vehicle.
4. Replace with a new canister 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
which is available from your page 2‑8.
dealer. 2. Remove the carpet.
5. Push the new canister into
place.
Vehicle Care 10-79
3. Turn the center retainer

counterclockwise to remove the
cover.
4. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from the foam
container.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
3. Turn the center retainer Coin/Pierce Jack with Two-Piece
Tools
counterclockwise to remove the Wrench
Spare Tire spare tire cover. 1. Tool Container
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on 4. Remove the spare tire and place 2. Two-Piece Wrench
page 2‑8. it next to the tire being changed.
3. Strap
2. Remove the carpet. Tools
4. Jack Handle Extension
The jack and tools are stored below
the spare tire. 5. Coin/Pierce Jack
10-80 Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑70 for more
information.
2. If the vehicle has wheel bolt
caps, remove the caps. Store
the caps with the wheel cover.
Hex-Head Jack with Three-Piece 1. Tool Container

Wrench 2. Jack
1. Tool Container 3. End of the Jack
2. Three-Piece Wrench 1. Turn the end of the jack (3)
3. Strap counterclockwise to loosen it.
Remove the jack (2) from the
4. Hex Head Jack retaining bracket.
2. Remove the tool container (1).
3. Remove the tools and tire strap
from the tool container. 3. Use the fully extended wheel
4. Place the tools next to the tire wrench to loosen all the wheel
being changed. nuts one-half turn
counterclockwise. Do not
remove them yet.
Vehicle Care 10-81
Notice: Make sure that the jack

lift head is in the correct position { WARNING { WARNING
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered Getting under a vehicle when it is Raising the vehicle with the jack
by your warranty. lifted on a jack is dangerous. improperly positioned can
If the vehicle slips off the jack, damage the vehicle and even
you could be badly injured or make the vehicle fall. To help
killed. Never get under a vehicle avoid personal injury and vehicle
when it is supported only by damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
a jack. head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
{ WARNING 5. If you have a coin/pierce jack,

attach the jack handle extension
Lifting a vehicle and getting under to the jack by sliding the hook
it to do maintenance or repairs is through the end of the jack and
dangerous without the insert the other end of the jack
appropriate safety equipment and handle into the wrench.
4. Position the jack lift head at the training. If a jack is provided with If you have a hex head jack,
jack location nearest the flat tire. the vehicle, it is designed only for place the hex tube end of the
The location is indicated by a changing a flat tire. If it is used for wrench over the hex head of
mark on the bottom edge of the anything else, you or others could the jack.
vehicle. The jack must not be be badly injured or killed if the
used in any other position. vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
Raise the jack until it engages is provided with the vehicle, only
with the jacking point. use it for changing a flat tire.
10-82 Vehicle Care
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the

wrench clockwise until the { WARNING
vehicle is far enough off the
ground to allow enough room for Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
the compact spare tire to fit parts to which it is fastened, can
under the vehicle. make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
Keep the hook parallel to the off and cause an accident. When
ground. The wrench may need changing a wheel, remove any
to be removed and repositioned
rust or dirt from places where the
to continue turning it.
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Coin/Pierce Jack and Wrench towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
remove all rust or dirt.
7. Remove all of the wheel nuts

and place them in a dry, clean
Hex Head Jack and Wrench place to avoid getting dirt in the
threads.
Vehicle Care 10-83
10. Reinstall the wheel nuts with 12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
the rounded end of the nuts a crisscross sequence, as
toward the wheel. Tighten each shown.
nut as much as possible using
the wheel wrench until the
wheel is held firmly against
{ WARNING
the hub. Wheel nuts that are improperly or
Use your free hand to prevent incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheel from turning while the wheels to become loose or
you are tightening. come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
11. Lower the vehicle by turning
to the proper torque specification
the wrench counterclockwise.
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the after replacing. Follow the torque
Lower the jack completely.
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, specification supplied by the
and spare wheel. aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
9. Place the compact spare tire on
the wheel-mounting surface. nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
{ WARNING torque specifications.
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might Notice: Improperly tightened
come loose. The vehicle's wheel wheel nuts can lead to brake
could fall off, causing a crash. pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
10-84 Vehicle Care
proper torque specification. See 3. Install the retainer nut and turn it Compact Spare Tire
Capacities and Specifications on clockwise until tight.
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
4. Return the rear trunk carpet. { WARNING
5. Place the flat tire face up on the
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire Driving with more than one
load floor.
and Tools compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
{ WARNING crash and you or others could be
Storing a jack, a tire, or other injured. Use only one compact
equipment in the passenger spare tire at a time.
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or If this vehicle has a compact spare
collision, loose equipment could tire, it was fully inflated when new;
strike someone. Store all these in however, it can lose air over time.
the proper place. Check the inflation pressure
regularly. It should be 420 kPa
(60 psi).
To store a flat or spare tire and
tools: 6. Route the strap provided, as Stop as soon as possible and check
shown, to secure the flat tire. that the spare tire is correctly
1. Return the jack and tools as they
The compact spare tire is for inflated after being installed on the
were originally stored in the
temporary use only. Replace the vehicle. The compact spare tire is
trunk.
compact spare with a full-size tire as designed for temporary use only.
2. Return the spare tire cover as it soon as possible.
was in the trunk.
Vehicle Care 10-85
The vehicle will perform differently Do not use the compact spare on Jump Starting
with the spare tire installed and it is other vehicles.
recommended that the vehicle For more information about the
Do not mix the compact spare tire or
speed be limited to 80 km/h vehicle battery, see Battery on
wheel with other wheels or tires.
(50 mph). To conserve the tread of page 10‑33.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
the spare tire, have the standard tire and its wheel together. If the battery has run down, try to
repaired or replaced as soon as use another vehicle and some
convenient and return the spare tire Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
to the storage area. compact spare. Using them can
Be sure to use the following steps to
damage the vehicle and the
Notice: When the compact spare do it safely.
chains. Do not use tire chains on
is installed, do not take the the compact spare.
vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The
{ WARNING
compact spare can get caught on Batteries can hurt you. They can
the rails which can damage the be dangerous because:
tire, wheel, and other parts of the . They contain acid that can
vehicle.
burn you.
. They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
. They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Notice: Ignoring these steps These terminals are used instead of Notice: If any accessories are left
could result in costly damage to a direct connection to the battery. on or plugged in during the jump
the vehicle that would not be The positive jump start connection starting procedure, they could be
covered by the warranty. is covered by a red cap. Remove to damaged. The repairs would not
Trying to start the vehicle by expose the terminal. be covered by the vehicle
pushing or pulling it will not warranty. Whenever possible,
1. Check the other vehicle. It must turn off or unplug all accessories
work, and it could damage the have a 12-volt battery with a
vehicle. on either vehicle when jump
negative ground system. starting the vehicle.
Notice: Only use a vehicle that 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
has a 12-volt system with a and switch off all lights and
negative ground for jump accessories in both vehicles,
starting. If the other vehicle does except the hazard warning
not have a 12-volt system with a flashers if needed.
negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
{ WARNING
2. Position the two vehicles so that
they are not touching. An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
and can injure you. Keep hands,
Vehicles with an automatic
clothing and tools away from any
transmission should be in
1. Remote Positve (+) Terminal P (Park). See Shifting Into Park underhood electric fan.
2. Remote Negative (-) Terminal on page 9‑22. Vehicles with a
manual transmission should be
The jump start remote positive (1)
in Neutral. See Parking (Manual
and negative (2) terminals are in the
Transmission) on page 9‑24.
engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-87
10. Try to start the vehicle that had

{ WARNING { WARNING the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine probably needs service.
cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep
People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving Notice: If the jumper cables are
and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running. connected or removed in the
Use a flashlight if you need more wrong order, electrical shorting
light. may occur and damage the
5. Connect one end of the red vehicle. The repairs would not be
Be sure the battery has enough positive (+) cable to the jump covered by the vehicle warranty.
water. You do not need to add start positive (+) post. Always connect and remove the
water to the battery installed in 6. Connect the other end of the red jumper cables in the correct
your new vehicle. But if a battery positive (+) cable to the order, making sure that the
has filler caps, be sure the right positive (+) terminal of the good cables do not touch each other or
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, battery. other metal.
add water to take care of that Jumper Cable Removal
7. Connect one end of the black
first. If you do not, explosive gas negative (–) cable to the
could be present. Reverse the sequence exactly when
negative (–) terminal of the good removing the jumper cables.
Battery fluid contains acid that battery.
can burn you. Do not get it on 8. Connect the other end of the
you. If you accidentally get it in black negative (–) cable to the
your eyes or on your skin, flush negative (–) post.
the place with water and get
9. Start the engine in the vehicle
medical help immediately.
with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
10-88 Vehicle Care
Towing Recreational Vehicle

Towing
Towing the Vehicle Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy
Notice: Incorrectly towing a towing the vehicle may cause
disabled vehicle may cause damage because of reduced
damage. The damage would not ground clearance. Always put the
be covered by the vehicle vehicle on a flatbed truck or
warranty. trailer.
Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed The vehicle was neither designed
car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck nor intended to be towed with any of
could damage the vehicle. its wheels on the ground. If the
Due to low ramp angles on the ZL1, vehicle must be towed, see “Towing
use care when loading the vehicle the Vehicle” earlier in this section.
onto a flatbed carrier. Front spring
spacers are provided for lifting the
front suspension.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Appearance Care exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) cleaners that are marked safe for
can result in damage or removal painted surfaces to remove foreign
of paint and decals. matter.
Exterior Care
Rinse the vehicle well, before Occasional hand waxing or mild
Washing the Vehicle washing and after, to remove all polishing should be done to remove
To preserve the vehicle's finish, cleaning agents completely. If they residue from the paint finish. See
wash it often and out of direct are allowed to dry on the surface, your dealer for approved cleaning
sunlight. they could stain. products.
Notice: Do not use Dry the finish with a soft, clean Do not apply waxes or polishes to
petroleum-based, acidic, chamois or an all-cotton towel to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
or abrasive cleaning agents as avoid surface scratches and water decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
they can damage the vehicle's spotting. as damage can occur.
paint, metal, or plastic parts. Finish Care Notice: Machine compounding or
If damage occurs, it would not be aggressive polishing on a
covered by the vehicle's warranty. Application of aftermarket clearcoat basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
Approved cleaning products can sealant/wax materials is not may damage it. Use only
be obtained from your dealer. recommended. If painted surfaces non-abrasive waxes and polishes
Follow all manufacturer are damaged, see your dealer to that are made for a basecoat/
directions regarding correct have the damage assessed and clearcoat paint finish on the
product usage, necessary safety repaired. Foreign materials such as vehicle.
precautions, and appropriate calcium chloride and other salts, ice
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree To keep the paint finish looking new,
disposal of any vehicle care
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from keep the vehicle garaged or
product.
industrial chimneys, etc., can covered whenever possible.
Notice: Avoid using damage the vehicle's finish if they
high-pressure washes closer than remain on painted surfaces. Wash
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the the vehicle as soon as possible.
vehicle. Use of power washers If necessary, use non-abrasive
10-90 Vehicle Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal It is not recommended that the air Convertible Top care
Parts extractor on the ZL1 be waxed, as it
Frequently hand wash convertible
Regularly clean bright metal parts will change the gloss level of the
tops with mild car wash soap. Never
with water or chrome polish on surface. In addition, care must be
use a stiff brush, steam, bleach,
chrome or stainless steel trim, used when waxing around the air
or aggressive cleaners.
if necessary. extractor. If a small amount of wax
If necessary, a soft brush can be
is applied to the extractor it can
For aluminum, never use auto or used to remove dirt. When finished
create an irregular appearance in
chrome polish, steam, or caustic cleaning, thoroughly rinse the fabric.
the surface of the panel. If wax,
soap to clean. A coating of wax, Avoid automatic car washes with
debris, or other materials create
rubbed to high polish, is overhead brushes or very high
stains on the air extractor, see your
recommended for all bright metal pressure sprays as they can cause
dealer for the recommended
parts. damage and leaking.
cleaner.
Only lower the top when it is
Hood Air Extractor The air extractor has vent screens
completely dry and avoid leaving
in the openings. Keep leaves or
the top lowered for extended
other debris out of the vent screens.
periods of time to prevent excessive
Notice: Pushing on the vent interior weathering.
screens could damage them. Do
Avoid leaving large amounts of
not push on the screens when
snow on the top for extended
clearing.
periods of time as damage may also
There is a water deflector on the occur.
underside of the air extractor. Do
not remove it. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses and Emblems
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
Vehicle Care 10-91
emblems. Follow instructions under rubber material on painted surfaces driving on roads that have been
"Washing the Vehicle" in this can be removed by rubbing with a sprayed with magnesium,
section. clean cloth. See Recommended calcium, or sodium chloride.
Fluids and Lubricants on These chlorides are used on
Windshield and Wiper Blades page 11‑12. roads for conditions such as ice
Clean the outside of the windshield and dust. Always wash the
with glass cleaner.
Tires chrome with soap and water after
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to exposure.
Clean rubber blades using lint-free
cloth or paper towel soaked with clean the tires. Notice: To avoid surface damage,
windshield washer fluid or a mild Notice: Using petroleum-based do not use strong soaps,
detergent. Wash the windshield tire dressing products on the chemicals, abrasive polishes,
thoroughly when cleaning the vehicle may damage the paint cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and finish and/or tires. When applying that contain acid on aluminum or
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax a tire dressing, always wipe off chrome-plated wheels. Use only
treatments may cause wiper any overspray from all painted approved cleaners. Also, never
streaking. surfaces on the vehicle. drive a vehicle with aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels through an
Replace the wiper blades if they are Wheels and Trim — Aluminum automatic car wash that uses
worn or damaged. Damage can be or Chrome silicone carbide tire cleaning
caused by extreme dusty
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild brushes. Damage could occur
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
soap and water to clean the wheels. and the repairs would not be
snow and ice.
After rinsing thoroughly with clean covered by the vehicle warranty.
Weatherstrips water, dry with a soft, clean towel. Steering, Suspension, and
Apply silicone grease on A wax may then be applied. Chassis Components
weatherstrips to make them last Notice: Chrome wheels and other
longer, seal better, and not stick or Visually inspect front and rear
chrome trim may be damaged if
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips suspension and steering system for
the vehicle is not washed after
once a year. Black marks from damaged, loose, or missing parts or
10-92 Vehicle Care
signs of wear. Inspect the power Sheet Metal Damage discolorations, and small, irregular
steering for proper hook-up, binding, dark spots etched into the paint
If the vehicle is damaged and
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually surface.
requires sheet metal repair or
check constant velocity joints,
replacement, make sure the body
rubber boots, and axle seals for
repair shop applies anti-corrosion Interior Care
leaks.
material to parts repaired or To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
Body Component Lubrication replaced to restore corrosion regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
protection. Immediately remove any soils. Note
Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
Original manufacturer replacement that newspapers or dark garments
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and
parts will provide the corrosion that can transfer color to home
steel fuel door hinge unless the
components are plastic. Applying protection while maintaining the furnishings can also permanently
silicone grease on weatherstrips vehicle warranty. transfer color to the vehicle's
interior.
with a clean cloth will make them
Finish Damage Use a soft bristle brush to remove
last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak. Quickly repair minor chips and dust from knobs and crevices on the
scratches with touch-up materials instrument cluster. Using a mild
Underbody Maintenance available from your dealer to avoid soap solution, immediately remove
Use plain water to flush dirt and corrosion. Larger areas of finish hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
debris from the vehicle's underbody. damage can be corrected in your repellent from all interior surfaces or
Your dealer or an underbody car dealer's body and paint shop. permanent damage may result.
washing system can do this. If not Your dealer may have products for
removed, rust and corrosion can
Chemical Paint Spotting
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
develop. Airborne pollutants can fall upon specifically designed for the
and attack painted vehicle surfaces surfaces being cleaned to prevent
causing blotchy, ring-shaped permanent damage. Apply all
cleaners directly to the cleaning
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
Vehicle Care 10-93
on any switches or controls.

. Do not use laundry detergents or cleaners or aggressive cleaning
Cleaners should be removed dishwashing soaps with may damage the rear window
quickly. Never allow cleaners to degreasers. For liquid cleaners, defogger.
remain on the surface being use approximately 20 drops per
3.78 L (1 gal) of water. Notice: Cleaning the windshield
cleaned for extended periods with water during the first three to
of time. A concentrated soap solution will
leave a residue that creates six months of ownership will
Cleaners may contain solvents that streaks and attracts dirt. Do not reduce tendency to fog.
can become concentrated in the use solutions that contain strong
interior. Before using cleaners, read Speaker Covers
or caustic soap.
and adhere to all safety instructions Vacuum around a speaker cover
on the label. While cleaning the
. Do not heavily saturate the gently, so that the speaker will not
interior, maintain adequate upholstery when cleaning. be damaged. Clean spots with just
ventilation by opening the doors and . Do not use solvents or cleaners water and mild soap.
windows. containing solvents.
Coated Moldings
To prevent damage, do not clean Interior Glass
the interior using the following Coated moldings should be cleaned.
cleaners or techniques: To clean, use a terry cloth fabric . When lightly soiled, wipe with a
dampened with water. Wipe droplets sponge or soft lint-free cloth
. Never use a razor or any other left behind with a clean dry cloth.
sharp object to remove a soil dampened with water.
Commercial glass cleaners may be
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning
. When heavily soiled, use warm
. Never use a brush with stiff the interior glass with plain water. soapy water.
bristles. Notice: To prevent scratching,
. Never rub any surface never use abrasive cleaners on
aggressively or with excessive automotive glass. Abrasive
pressure.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and
Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays
using a soft brush attachment. If a
a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
following techniques: longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners
solution followed only by club or solvents. Periodically hand wash
. For solid soils, remove as much the microfiber cloth separately,
soda or plain water.
as possible prior to vacuuming. using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use.
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
colorfast cloth with water or club cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small Notice: Do not attach a device
soda. Microfiber cloth is hidden area for colorfastness before with a suction cup to the display.
recommended to prevent lint using a commercial upholstery This may cause damage and
transfer to the fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring would not be covered by the
formation occurs, clean the entire warranty.
2. Remove excess moisture by
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
Vehicle Care 10-95
Instrument Panel, Leather, Do not use cleaners that increase

Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces gloss, especially on the instrument { WARNING
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
Use a soft microfiber cloth visibility through the windshield Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
dampened with water to remove under certain conditions. It may severely weaken them. In
dust and loose dirt. For a more a crash, they might not be able to
thorough cleaning, use a soft Notice: Use of air fresheners may provide adequate protection.
microfiber cloth dampened with a cause permanent damage to Clean safety belts only with mild
mild soap solution. plastics and painted surfaces. soap and lukewarm water.
If an air freshener comes in
Notice: Soaking or saturating contact with any plastic or
leather, especially perforated
leather, as well as other interior
painted surface in the vehicle, Floor Mats
blot immediately and clean with a
surfaces, may cause permanent soft cloth dampened with a mild
damage. Wipe excess moisture soap solution. Damage caused by { WARNING
from these surfaces after air fresheners would not be
cleaning and allow them to dry If a floor mat is the wrong size or
covered by the vehicle warranty. is not properly installed, it can
naturally. Never use heat, steam,
spot lifters, or spot removers. Do Cargo Cover and interfere with the pedals.
not use cleaners that contain Convenience Net Interference with the pedals can
silicone or wax-based products. cause unintended acceleration
Cleaners containing these Wash with warm water and mild and/or increased stopping
solvents can permanently change detergent. Do not use chlorine distance which can cause a crash
the appearance and feel of leather bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
and injury. Make sure the floor
or soft trim and are not then dry completely.
mat does not interfere with the
recommended. Care of Safety Belts pedals.
Keep belts clean and dry.
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
10-96 Vehicle Care

. The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interefere with the pedals.
Always check that the floor mats
do not interfere with the pedals.
. Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over. Removing and Replacing the
. Do not place anything on top of Floor Mats
the driver side floor mat. 1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
. Use only a single floor mat on remove it from the hooks.
the driver side. 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
. Do not place one floor mat on mat retainer openings over the
top of another. carpet retainers and hook into
position.
Both floor mats are held in place by
two hook-type retainers. 3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
pedals.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Notice: Damage caused by
expenses resulting from neglect or
improper maintenance can lead to
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may
costly repairs and may not be
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Maintenance intervals, checks,
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application inspections, recommended fluids,
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 and lubricants are important to
Your dealer has trained technicians keep the vehicle in good working
Additional Maintenance who can perform required condition.
and Care maintenance using genuine
The Tire Rotation and Required
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have up‐to‐
Services are the responsibility of the
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 date tools and equipment for fast
vehicle owner. It is recommended to
and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids, have your dealer perform these
dealers have extended evening and
Lubricants, and Parts services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Saturday hours, courtesy
Recommended Fluids and Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
transportation, and online
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 keep the vehicle in good working
scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement condition, improves fuel economy,
needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 and reduces vehicle emissions.
Your dealer recognizes the
Maintenance Records importance of providing
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16 competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use

. Frequently towing a trailer.
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
Maintenance
. Used for high speed or
There may need to be more competitive driving. Schedule
frequent checks and services. The
Additional Required Services ‐
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery Owner Checks and Services
Normal are for vehicles that: service.
At Each Fuel Stop
. Carry passengers and cargo Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Check the engine oil level. See
within recommended limits on Engine Oil on page 10‑13.
the Tire and Loading Information Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Once a Month
on page 9‑12. { WARNING . Check the tire inflation
. Are driven on reasonable road Performing maintenance work can pressures. See Tire Pressure on
surfaces within legal driving page 10‑56.
be dangerous and can cause
limits. serious injury. Perform . Inspect the tires for wear. See
. Use the recommended fuel. See maintenance work only if the Tire Inspection on page 10‑62.
Recommended Fuel on required information, proper tools, . Check the windshield washer
page 9‑49. and equipment are available. fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
Refer to the information in the If they are not, see your dealer to page 10‑30.
Maintenance Schedule Additional have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own Engine Oil Change
Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
Service Work on page 10‑4. When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
The Additional Required Services ‐
SOON message displays, have the
Severe are for vehicles that are:
engine oil and filter changed within
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven
in hot weather. under the best conditions, the
. Mainly driven in hilly or engine oil life system might not
mountainous terrain. indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil

. Check engine coolant level. See . Visually inspect steering,
and filter must be changed at least Engine Coolant on page 10‑23. suspension, and chassis
once a year and the oil life system . Check windshield washer fluid components for damaged, loose,
must be reset. Your trained dealer level. See Washer Fluid on or missing parts or signs of
technician can perform this work. page 10‑30. wear. See Exterior Care on
If the engine oil life system is reset page 10‑89.
accidentally, service the vehicle
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
blades for wear, cracking,
. Check restraint system
within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the components. See Safety System
last service. Reset the oil life or contamination. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑89. Replace Check on page 3‑15.
system when the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on worn or damaged wiper blades. . Visually inspect fuel system for
page 10‑15. See Wiper Blade Replacement damage or leaks.
on page 10‑35. . Visually inspect exhaust system
Tire Rotation and Required . Check tire inflation pressures. and nearby heat shields for
Services Every 12 000 km/ See Tire Pressure on loose or damaged parts.
7,500 mi page 10‑56. . Lubricate body components. See
Rotate the tires, if recommended for . Inspect tire wear. See Tire Exterior Care on page 10‑89.
the vehicle, and perform the Inspection on page 10‑62.
following services. See Tire
. Check starter switch. See Starter
. Visually check for fluid leaks. Switch Check on page 10‑34.
Rotation on page 10‑63.
. Check engine oil level and oil
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. . Check automatic transmission
life percentage. If needed, See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter shift lock control function. See
change engine oil and filter, and (Except ZL1) on page 10‑17 or Automatic Transmission Shift
reset oil life system. See Engine Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1 Lock Control Function Check on
Oil on page 10‑13 and Engine Only) on page 10‑19. page 10‑34.
Oil Life System on page 10‑15. . Inspect brake system. . Check ignition transmission lock.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10‑35.

. Check parking brake and . Check tire sealant expiration
automatic transmission park date, if equipped. See Tire
mechanism. See Park Brake and Sealant and Compressor Kit on
P (Park) Mechanism Check on page 10‑72.
page 10‑35. . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
. Check accelerator pedal for if equipped. See Sunroof on
damage, high effort, or binding. page 2‑16.
Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.

Footnotes — Maintenance (3) Or every four years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first.
Services — Normal (4) Or every five years, whichever
(1) Or every two years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System
comes first. More frequent (Except ZL1 Engine) on page 10‑20
replacement may be needed if the or Cooling System (ZL1 Engine
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy Only) on page 10‑21 or Cooling
traffic, areas with poor air quality, System (Intercooler) on page 10‑22.
or areas with high dust levels. (5) Or every 10 years, whichever
Replacement may also be needed if comes first.
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors. (6) Inspect for fraying, excessive
cracking, or damage; replace,
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines if needed.
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.

Footnotes — Maintenance (3) Or every four years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first.
Services — Severe (4) Or every five years, whichever
Services
(1) Or every two years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System . Severe Commercial Use
comes first. More frequent (Except ZL1 Engine) on page 10‑20 Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
replacement may be needed if the or Cooling System (ZL1 Engine components every 5 000 km/
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy Only) on page 10‑21 or Cooling 3,000 mi.
traffic, areas with poor air quality, System (Intercooler) on page 10‑22. . Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels. (5) Or every 10 years, whichever performed once a year.
Replacement may also be needed if comes first.
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors. (6) Inspect for fraying, excessive
cracking, or damage; replace,
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines if needed.
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.

. To avoid break-down or failure to . Trained dealer technicians have
Additional start the vehicle, maintain a access to tools and equipment
Maintenance and Care battery with full cranking power. to inspect the brakes and
. Trained dealer technicians have recommend quality parts
Your vehicle is an important engineered for the vehicle.
investment and caring for it properly the diagnostic equipment to test
may help to avoid future costly the battery and ensure that the Fluids
repairs. To maintain vehicle connections and cables are
corrosion-free. Proper fluid levels and approved
performance, additional fluids protect the vehicle’s systems
maintenance services may be Belts and components. See
required. It is recommended that Recommended Fluids and
your dealer perform these services
. Belts may need replacing if they
squeak or show signs of Lubricants on page 11‑12 for GM
— their trained dealer technicians approved fluids.
know your vehicle best. Your dealer cracking or splitting.
can also perform a thorough . Trained dealer technicians have
. Engine oil and windshield
assessment with a multi-point access to tools and equipment washer fluid levels should be
inspection to recommend when your to inspect the belts and checked at every fuel fill.
vehicle may need attention. The recommend adjustment or . Instrument cluster lights may
following list is intended to explain replacement when necessary. come on to indicate that fluids
the services and conditions to look may be low and need to be
for that may indicate services are Brakes filled.
required. Brakes stop the vehicle and are
crucial to safe driving. Hoses
Battery
. Signs of brake wear may include Hoses transport fluids and should
The battery supplies power to start be regularly inspected to ensure
the engine and operate any chirping, grinding, or squealing
noises, or difficulty stopping. that there are no cracks or leaks.
additional electrical accessories. With a multi-point inspection, your
dealer can inspect the hoses and
advise if replacement is needed.
Lamps
. As part of the multi-point Vehicle Care
inspection, trained dealer
Properly working headlamps, technicians can visually inspect To help keep the vehicle looking like
taillamps, and brake lamps are the shocks and struts for signs new, vehicle care products are
important to see and be seen on of leaking, blown seals, available from your dealer. For
the road. or damage, and can advise information on how to clean and
. Signs that the headlamps need when service is needed. protect the vehicle’s interior and
attention include dimming, failure exterior, see Interior Care on
Tires page 10‑92 and Exterior Care on
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires need to be properly inflated, page 10‑89.
checked periodically to ensure rotated, and balanced. Maintaining Wheel Alignment
that they light when braking. the tires can save money, fuel, and
can reduce the risk of tire failure. Wheel alignment is critical for
. With a multi-point inspection, ensuring that the tires deliver
your dealer can check the lamps . Signs that the tires need to be optimal wear and performance.
and note any concerns. replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
. Signs that the alignment may
Shocks and Struts or fabric showing through the need to be adjusted include
Shocks and struts help aid in control rubber; cracks or cuts in the pulling, improper vehicle
for a smoother ride. tread or sidewall; or a bulge or handling, or unusual tire wear.
split in the tire. . Your dealer has the required
. Signs of wear may include
steering wheel vibration, bounce/ . Trained dealer technicians can equipment to ensure proper
sway while braking, longer inspect and recommend the right wheel alignment.
stopping distance, or uneven tires. Your dealer can also
tire wear. provide tire/wheel balancing
services to ensure smooth
vehicle operation at all speeds.
Your dealer sells and services
name brand tires.
Windshield Wiper Blades

For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
clean and clear. provide a clear view.
. Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
. Trained dealer technicians can and worn or split rubber.
inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
if needed. replace them when needed.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑13.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑23.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Canada 88862807).
Hydraulic Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89020661, in
Canada 89021186).
Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission (V6 Engine) SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil (GM Part No. 88862475, in
Canada 88862476).
Manual Transmission (V8 Engine) Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, in
Canada 88861801).
Rear Axle (V6 Engine with Automatic Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 (GM Part No. 88900401, in
Transmission) Canada 89021678).
Rear Axle (V6 Engine with Manual Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 Limited Slip (GM Part No. 88900401 and
Transmission) Limited Slip Additive 88900330, in Canada 89021678 and Limited Slip
Additive 00992694).
Rear Axle (SS) Rear Differential Fluid 75W-90 Limited Slip (GM Part No. 88900401 and
Limited Slip Additive 88900330, in Canada 89021678 and Limited Slip
Additive 00992694).
Rear Axle (ZL1) Rear Differential Fluid Dextron LS Gear 75W-90 (GM Part No. 88862624,
in Canada 88862625).
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (except ZL1) 92196275 A3137C
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (ZL1) 92229651 —
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L V6 Engine 25177917 PF2129
6.2L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 92234714 —
Spark Plugs
3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
6.2L V8 Engine (L99 or LS3) 12621258 41-110
6.2L V8 Engine (LSA) 12571165 41-104
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Wiper Blades
Driver Side 92231676 —
Passenger Side 92231677 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
2 NOTES
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-5 Identification Label
This label, in the trunk, has the
following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label under the hood.
See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
3.6L V6 Engine (LFX) Automatic Transmission 10.2 L 10.8 qt
3.6L V6 Engine (LFX) Manual Transmission 10.6 L 11.2 qt
6.2L V8 Engine (L99) Automatic Transmission 10.8 L 11.4 qt
6.2L V8 Engine (LS3) Manual Transmission 11.2 L 11.8 qt
6.2L V8 Engine (LSA) 10.9 L 11.5 qt
Cooling System — Intercooler (ZL1) 2.3 L 2.4 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L V6 Engine (LFX) 5.7 L 6.0 qt
6.2L V8 Engine 7.6 L 8.0 qt
Fuel Tank 71.0 L 18.8 gal
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Rear Axle Fluid
V6 Engine 6–Speed Automatic 0.9 L 1.0 qt
V6 Engine 6–Speed Manual* 0.9 L 1.0 qt
V8 Engine* (L99 or LS3) 0.9 L 1.0 qt
V8 Engine (LSA) 2.0 L 2.1 qt
Transmission Fluid
Automatic — V6 and V8 (Pan Removal and Filter 6.3 L 6.7 qt
Replacement)**
V6 Engine 6–Speed Manual 1.8 L 1.9 qt
V8 Engine SS 6–Speed Manual 3.9 L 4.2 qt
V8 Engine ZL1 6–Speed Manual 4.4 L 4.6 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 150 Y 110 lb ft
*Add 3.3 oz. (98 mL) of friction modifier to the specified quantity of axle lubricant.
**See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑16 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6 (LFX) 3 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)
Manual
6.2L V8 (L99) J Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.2L V8 (LS3) W Manual 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.2L V8 (LSA) P Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
Manual
Technical Data 12-5
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6.2L V8 Engines (L99 or LS3) 6.2L V8 Engines (LSA)

3.6L V6 Engine
12-6 Technical Data
2 NOTES
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Roadside Assistance Program Reporting Safety Defects

(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Reporting Safety Defects to
Information Roadside Assistance the United States
Program (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information Scheduling Service the Canadian
Customer Satisfaction Appointments (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Reporting Safety Defects to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Courtesy Transportation General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Satisfaction Program (U.S. and
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4 Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Collision Damage Repair Privacy
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14 Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Service Publications Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-17 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Assistance for Text OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S. Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-20
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Radio Frequency
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20
GM Mobility Reimbursement Radio Frequency
Program (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13-2 Customer Information
Customer Information STEP TWO: If after contacting a

member of dealership management,
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's
Customer Satisfaction resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest
Procedure (U.S. and further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first.
Canada) Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your
Your satisfaction and goodwill are Canada, call General Motors of
important to your dealer and to dealer are committed to making
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns 1-800-263-3777 (English),
with the sales transaction or the with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or We encourage you to call the after following the procedure
service departments. Sometimes, toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you
however, despite the best intentions inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business
of all concerned, misunderstandings following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
can occur. If your concern has not give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
been resolved to your satisfaction, representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an
the following steps should be taken: . Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
with a member of dealership from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive
management. Normally, concerns title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
can be quickly resolved at that level. the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle
If the matter has already been through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may
reviewed with the sales, service, . Dealership name and location. be required to resort to this informal
or parts manager, contact the owner dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the
of your dealership or the general
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
manager.
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning
decision given in your case, you Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
may reject it and proceed with any not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
other venue for relief available addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
to you. procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
You may contact the BBB Auto Line and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Program using the toll-free Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
telephone number or write them at participation in a no-charge or write to:
the following address: Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
BBB Auto Line Program has committed to binding arbitration
Council of Better Business Bureaus, General Motors of Canada Limited
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Inc. factory-related vehicle service
4200 Wilson Boulevard 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Suite 800 the review of the facts involved by
Arlington, VA 22203-1838 an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
designed so that the entire dispute
This program is available in all settlement process, from the time
50 states and the District of you file your complaint to the final
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by decision, should be completed in
vehicle age, mileage, and other about 70 days. We believe our
factors. General Motors reserves impartial program offers advantages
the right to change eligibility over courts in most jurisdictions
limitations and/or discontinue its because it is informal, quick, and
participation in this program. free of charge.
Customer Satisfaction the good intentions of all parties STEP THREE

involved, sometimes a
Procedure (Mexico) misunderstanding may occur.
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
If you have a problem that has not dealer, please call the General
been satisfactorily handled through Motors Customer Assistance
the normal means, we suggest the Center (CAC) and provide the
following steps: following information:
STEP ONE . Name
Explain your case to your dealer . Address
Did you get the Warranty Extension service agent, service manager, . Phone number
Plan? This plan is recommended by dealer sales agent, or sales
General Motors to supplement the manager, depending on your case.
. Model year
warranty included with the new . Brand
vehicle purchase. Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They are . Vehicle Identification
See your dealer for details. interested in your continual Number (VIN)
satisfaction.
Customer Assistance . Mileage
Procedure STEP TWO . Delivery date
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are If you are not satisfied, please . Description of the problem
very important to your dealer and contact the general manager or your
. Dealership name
General Motors. dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve . Dealership address
Normally, any problem with the
your case, ask them to contact the
transaction, sale, or usage of the See Customer Assistance Offices
right people at General Motors for
vehicle must be handled by your (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
support, if needed.
dealer sales or service departments. Customer Assistance Offices
However, we recognize that despite (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
Customer Assistance Canada All e-mail inquiries to the Customer

Assistance Center (CAC) should be
Offices (U.S. and Canada) General Motors of Canada Limited
sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com.
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
Chevrolet encourages customers to
CA1-163-005 Mexico
call the toll-free number for
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
assistance. However, if a customer From Mexico City
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
www.gm.ca 5329-0811
the letter should be addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English) From Other Mexico Locations
United States and Puerto Rico 1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text 01-800-466-0811
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Telephone devices (TTYs)) United States and Canada
Center Roadside Assistance:
P.O. Box 33170 1-800-268-6800 1-866-466-8190
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 Overseas Costa Rica
www.Chevrolet.com
Please contact the local General 00-800-052-1005
1-800-222-1020
Motors Business Unit. Guatemala
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) 1-800-999-5252
Roadside Assistance: Customer Assistance
1-800-243-8872 Offices (Mexico) Panama
From U.S. Virgin Islands: To contact the Customer Assistance 00-800-052-0001
1-800-496-9994 Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section. Dominican Republic
Customer assistance is available 1-888-751-5301
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
08:00 to 15:00 hours.
El Salvador Online Owner Center D (Preferred Dealer

800-6273 Information): Select a preferred
Online Owner Experience dealer and view dealer location,
Honduras (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com maps, phone numbers, and hours.
800-0122-6101 The Chevrolet online owner J (Warranty Tracking
experience is a one-stop resource Information): Track the vehicle’s
Customer Assistance for that allows interaction with warranty information.
Chevrolet and keeps important
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific information in one J (Recall Information): View
Users (U.S. and Canada) place. active recalls or search by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See
To assist customers who are deaf, Membership Benefits Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired on page 12‑1.
and who use Text Telephones E (Vehicle Information):
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY Download owner manuals and view H (Other Account Information):
equipment available at its Customer vehicle-specific how-to videos. View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in G (Maintenance Information): radio, and OnStar account
the U.S. can communicate with View maintenance schedules, information.
Chevrolet by dialing: required alerts, OnStar onboard F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in vehicle diagnostic information, and with online help representatives.
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. schedule service appointments. Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
I (Service History): View your vehicle.
printable dealer-recorded service
records and self-recorded service
records.
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Call
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner (U.S. and Canada) details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program (Mexico)
. Access third party enthusiast As a new owner, your vehicle is
sites and social media networks. automatically enrolled in the
. Locate owner resources such as Roadside Assistance program. The
This program is available to services are available at no cost
lease-end, financing, and qualified applicants for cost
warranty information. under the terms and conditions of
reimbursement of eligible the program. The Roadside
. Retrieve your favorite articles, aftermarket adaptive equipment Assistance program is not part of,
quizzes, tips, and multimedia required for the vehicle, such as or included, in the coverage
galleries organized into the hand controls or a wheelchair/ provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Features and Auto Care scooter lift for the vehicle. Warranty.
Sections. For more information on the limited Roadside Assistance provides
. Download the owner manual for offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or assistance to the driver and
your vehicle, quickly and easily. call the GM Mobility Assistance passengers while driving the vehicle
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text within your city of residence or on
. Find the Telephone (TTY) users, call
Chevrolet-recommended any passable road in Mexico, the
1-800-833-9935. United States, and Canada.
maintenance services for your
vehicle. Services are subject to the
limitations described in the following This service is limited to the

. Emergency Towing: Tow to the
pages. Program coverage varies by transfer of the vehicle to the nearest dealer for warranty
country. repair facility. service if the vehicle cannot be
driven.
Roadside Assistance is available . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
24 hours a day, 365 days of Delivery of enough fuel for the If the vehicle is involved in an
the year. vehicle to get to the nearest accident during the commission
service station. of a crime, administrative
This program expires two years violation, or breach of traffic
from the date of the invoice for the . Lock-Out Service: Service to regulations, Roadside
vehicle, regardless of vehicle unlock the vehicle if you are Assistance will not provide
mileage and changes in vehicle locked out. service. When the vehicle is not
ownership. . Battery Jump Start: Service to accessible to be towed, all
For more information about the jump start a dead battery. maneuvers required to access it
renewal of this program at the end will be at the owner's expense.
. *Emergency Messages:
of its term, contact the Chevrolet Transmission of urgent phone If the vehicle is in another city
Customer Assistance Center at messages. outside of your residence,
01-800-466-0800. Roadside Assistance is limited
. *Emergency Calls: Call for
Services Provided to moving the vehicle to the
emergency services.
nearest dealer. If you would like
. Flat Tire Change: If unable to . *Dealership Location the vehicle moved to a different
change a flat tire, Roadside Assistance: Information dealer, you will be asked to
Assistance will provide towing regarding addresses and cover the difference in cost at
service to the nearest authorized telephone numbers for Chevrolet the time of the move.
Chevrolet dealership. It is the dealers.
owner's responsibility for the
repair or replacement of the tire.
If the vehicle cannot be received

. *Trip Interruption: This service Roadside Assistance will
by the nearest Chevrolet dealer is provided if you are prevented coordinate hotel
due to scheduling conflicts, the from further usage of your accommodations for all vehicle
vehicle will be taken to a safe vehicle while traveling and it is travelers for up to two nights.
place where it will remain for up not possible for the nearest
Chevrolet dealership to repair A rental car will be provided for
to 48 hours until it can be taken up to two days and the vehicle
to the dealer. If the storage costs the vehicle the same day,
requiring the vehicle to stay at must be returned to its original
exceed the amount authorized, destination, excluding vehicles
the owner is responsible to pay the dealership for a night or
more. If this happens, in addition with a carrying capacity greater
the difference at the time of than 3.5 tons.
service. Contact Roadside to the previously listed services
Assistance for more information and prior to confirmation by the Complimentary Transportation: If
on authorized amounts. dealership, you are entitled to you prefer to continue your trip
choose one of the following to the intended destination or
alternatives, within the limits of return to your place of
existing Roadside Assistance residence, and the trip requires
program guidelines. If the costs more than eight hours driving on
exceed the amount authorized the road, transportation for the
for these services, you must pay driver and passengers by first
the difference at the time of class bus or coach commercial
service. airline will be provided to a
location chosen by Roadside
Assistance, depending on
availability at the chosen
destination. Restrictions apply
based on vehicle specifications.
If you are on the road, taxi Services Not Included in Roadside

. Food service, beverages,
service to the nearest bus Assistance telephone calls, or other extra
station or airport will be costs. Accommodation costs
Roadside Assistance does not apply only to Mexico per the
provided. cover or reimburse services for the terms and conditions of the
. *Complimentary following: Roadside Assistance program.
Transportation for Vehicle Pick . Events caused by fraud or bad
Up: Transportation to pick up
. Any damage to the vehicle
faith by the driver. without intent, derived from the
your vehicle after repairs are
complete. Once the dealer has . Vehicle immobilization situations services provided.
reported that the vehicle has due to a major force or . Cost of towing a trailer when
been repaired, Roadside unforeseen circumstances, such choosing a Chevrolet dealer that
Assistance will provide bus or as natural phenomena of an is nearest to the temporary
commercial airline one-way extraordinary nature, storage facility for the disabled
service (subject to availability) earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, vehicle.
for the person designated by you and other cyclonic storms.
to collect your vehicle at the
. Cost of all maneuvers required
. Vehicle immobilization situations to access the vehicle when it is
dealership's location if you or the arising from car accidents
designated person are not in the not available to be towed.
caused by the driver of the
same town or city as the vehicle or third parties. This
. Cost of fuel provided.
dealership. means any occurrence that Routine vehicle repair costs are not
*These services are not provided for causes physical injury to the covered by the Roadside
U.S. or Canada residents. All occupants and/or the vehicle Assistance program. For more
services provided in the U.S. and caused by external forces. information, see your new vehicle
Canada are at the owner's expense . Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar, warranty.
and will be reimbursed by Roadside armed forces or police actions
Assistance. which prevent timely delivery of
assistance services.

. Odometer reading, Vehicle
Contacting Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance Identification Number (VIN), and
Roadside Assistance services are of Program (U.S. and delivery date of the vehicle.
no cost to you and available Canada)
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
. Description of the problem.
Costs are only incurred in situations For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
Coverage
that exceed the limits of the 1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
program, some of which are listed (TTY): 1-888-889-2438). Services are provided up to 5 years/
previously in this section. 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
comes first.
To contact Roadside Assistance by call 1-800-268-6800.
phone, use the following numbers: In the U.S., anyone driving the
Service is available 24 hours a day,
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
Mexico 365 days a year.
person driving the vehicle without
01-800-466-0800 Calling for Assistance permission from the owner is not
covered.
United States When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information Roadside Assistance is not a part of
1-866-466-8901 the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ready:
Canada Chevrolet and General Motors of
. Your name, home address, and Canada Limited reserve the right to
1-800-268-6800 home telephone number. make any changes or discontinue
E-mail . Telephone number of your the Roadside Assistance program at
location. any time without notification.
asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com
. Location of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Chevrolet reserves the right to make Canada Limited reserve the right to
any changes or discontinue the . Model, year, color, and license
limit services or payment to an
Roadside Assistance program at plate number of the vehicle.
owner or driver if they decide the
any time without notification.
claims are made too often, or the must be in good condition and restricted. Propane and other
same type of claim is made many properly inflated. It is the owner's fuels are not provided through
times. responsibility for the repair or this service.
replacement of the tire if it is not . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
Services Provided covered by the warranty. registration is required.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Battery Jump Start: Service to
Delivery of enough fuel for the
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
jump start a dead battery. Assistance: Must be over
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. Services Not Included in 250 kilometers from where your
Roadside Assistance trip was started to qualify.
. Lock-Out Service: Service to General Motors of Canada
unlock the vehicle if you are . Impound towing caused by Limited requires
locked out. A remote unlock may violation of any laws. pre-authorization, original
be available if you have OnStar. detailed receipts, and a copy of
. Legal fines.
For security reasons, the driver the repair orders. Once
must present identification . Mounting, dismounting, authorization has been received,
before this service is given. or changing of snow tires, the Roadside Assistance advisor
chains, or other traction devices. will help to make arrangements
. Emergency Tow from a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the . Towing or services for vehicles and explain how to receive
nearest Chevrolet dealer for driven on a non-public road or payment.
warranty service, or if the vehicle highway. . Alternative Service: If
was in a crash and cannot be assistance cannot be provided
driven. Assistance is also given Services Specific to
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles right away, the Roadside
when the vehicle is stuck in the Assistance advisor may give
sand, mud, or snow. . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement permission to get local
. Flat Tire Change: Service to is approximately $5 Canadian. emergency road service. You will
change a flat tire with the spare Diesel fuel delivery may be receive payment, up to $100,
tire. The spare tire, if equipped, after sending the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance. If your dealer requests you to bring entitled “Limited Warranty and
Mechanical failures may be the vehicle for service, you are Owner Assistance Information”
covered, however any cost for urged to do so as early in the work furnished with each new vehicle
parts and labor for repairs not day as possible to allow for provides detailed warranty coverage
covered by the warranty are the same-day repair. information.
owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options
Scheduling Service Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally be
Appointments (U.S. and completed while you wait. However,
Canada) if you are unable to wait, GM helps
Canada) To enhance your ownership to minimize inconvenience by
When the vehicle requires warranty experience, we and our participating providing several transportation
service, contact your dealer and dealers are proud to offer Courtesy options. Depending on the
request an appointment. By Transportation, a customer support circumstances, your dealer can offer
scheduling a service appointment program for vehicles with the one of the following:
and advising the service consultant Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Shuttle Service
of your transportation needs, your Coverage period in Canada),
dealer can help minimize your extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle service is the preferred
inconvenience. hybrid-specific warranties in both means of offering Courtesy
the U.S. and Canada. Transportation. Dealers may provide
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled shuttle service to get you to your
into the service department Several Courtesy Transportation destination with minimal interruption
immediately, keep driving it until it options are available to assist in of your daily schedule. This includes
can be scheduled for service, reducing inconvenience when one-way or round-trip shuttle service
unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required. within reasonable time and distance
safety related. If it is, please call Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of your dealer's area.
your dealership, let them know this, part of the New Vehicle Limited
and ask for instructions. Warranty. A separate booklet
Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited General Motors reserves the right to
Reimbursement and must be supported by original unilaterally modify, change,
If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign or discontinue Courtesy
warranty repairs, and public and complete a rental agreement Transportation at any time and to
transportation is used instead of and meet state/provincial, local, and resolve all questions of claim
your dealer's shuttle service, the rental vehicle provider requirements. eligibility pursuant to the terms and
expense must be supported by Requirements vary and may include conditions described herein at its
original receipts and can only be up minimum age requirements, sole discretion.
to the maximum amount allowed by insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
GM for shuttle service. In addition, You are responsible for fuel usage Collision Damage Repair
charges and may also be
for U.S. customers, should you
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
(U.S. and Canada)
arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, limited fees, excessive mileage, or rental If the vehicle is involved in a
reimbursement for reasonable fuel usage beyond the completion of the collision and it is damaged, have the
repair. damage repaired by a qualified
expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs technician using the proper
It may not be possible to provide a
and be supported by original equipment and quality replacement
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
receipts. See your dealer for parts. Poorly performed collision
Additional Program repairs diminish the vehicle resale
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel Information value, and safety performance can
or other transportation costs. be compromised in subsequent
All program options, such as shuttle collisions.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your Collision Parts
Your dealer may arrange to provide dealer for specific information about
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or Genuine GM Collision parts are new
availability. All Courtesy parts made with the same materials
reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will be
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept and construction methods as the
administered by appropriate dealer parts with which the vehicle was
for an overnight warranty repair. personnel. originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation for
GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle damage repairs through the use of
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is not
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair company may require you to have
these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained insurance that ensures repairs with
are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable Genuine GM Original Equipment
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment. Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
related failures are not covered by Insuring the Vehicle Genuine Manufacturer replacement
that warranty. parts. Read the lease carefully, as
Protect your investment in the GM you may be charged at the end of
Aftermarket collision parts are also vehicle with comprehensive and
available. These are made by the lease for poor quality repairs.
collision insurance coverage. There
companies other than GM and may are significant differences in the
not have been tested for the vehicle. quality of coverage afforded by
As a result, these parts may fit
If a Crash Occurs
. Vehicle make, model, and be original equipment parts, either
model year. new Genuine GM parts or recycled
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification original GM parts. Remember,
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). recycled parts will not be covered by
leave the scene of a crash until all
the GM vehicle warranty.
matters have been taken care of. . Insurance company and policy
Move the vehicle only if its position number. Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
puts you in danger, or you are but you must live with the repair.
. General description of the Depending on your policy limits,
instructed to move it by a police
damage to the other vehicle. your insurance company may
officer.
Choose a reputable repair facility initially value the repair using
Give only the necessary information
that uses quality replacement parts. aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
to police and other parties involved
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this the repair professional, and insist on
in the crash.
section. Genuine GM parts. Remember,
For emergency towing see if the vehicle is leased, you may be
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Roadside Assistance Program obligated to have the vehicle
Will You See after an Airbag
(Mexico) on page 13‑7 or Roadside repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Inflates? on page 3‑22.
Assistance Program (U.S. and even if your insurance coverage
Canada) on page 13‑11. Managing the Vehicle Damage does not pay the full cost.
Gather the following information: Repair Process If another party's insurance
. Driver name, address, and In the event that the vehicle requires company is paying for the repairs,
telephone number. damage repairs, GM recommends you are not obligated to accept a
that you take an active role in its repair valuation based on that
. Driver license number. repair. If you have a pre-determined insurance company's collision policy
. Owner name, address, and repair facility of choice, take the repair limits, as you have no
telephone number. vehicle there, or have it towed there. contractual limits with that company.
Specify to the facility that any In such cases, you can have control
. Vehicle license plate number.
required replacement collision parts
of the repair and parts choices as Owner Information Current and Past Models
long as the cost stays within
Owner publications are written Technical Service Bulletins and
reasonable limits.
specifically for owners and intended Manuals are available for current
to provide basic operational and past model GM vehicles.
Service Publications information about the vehicle. The ORDER TOLL FREE:
Ordering Information Owner Manual includes the 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
Maintenance Schedule for all 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Service Manuals models.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis For Credit Card Orders Only
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
and repair information on the Owner Manual, and Warranty
engines, transmission, axle, Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Booklet.
suspension, brakes, electrical, Or write to:
steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Helm, Incorporated
Service Bulletins shipping fees. Attention: Customer Service
47911 Halyard Drive
Service Bulletins give additional Without Portfolio: Owner Plymouth, MI 48170
technical service information Manual only.
needed to knowledgeably service Prices are subject to change without
RETAIL SELL PRICE: notice and without incurring
General Motors cars and trucks.
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and obligation. Allow ample time for
Each bulletin contains instructions
shipping fees. delivery.
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of the vehicle. All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
Reporting Safety If NHTSA receives similar Reporting Safety Defects

complaints, it may open an to the Canadian
Defects investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
Government
Reporting Safety Defects of vehicles, it may order a recall If you live in Canada, and you
to the United States and remedy campaign. believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government However, NHTSA cannot
immediately, and notify General
become involved in individual
If you believe that your vehicle problems between you, your Motors of Canada Limited. Call
has a defect which could cause Transport Canada at
dealer, or General Motors. 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately To contact NHTSA, you may call Transport Canada
inform the National Highway the Vehicle Safety Hotline Road Safety Branch
Traffic Safety Administration toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 80 rue Noel
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying 1-800-424-9153); go to Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
General Motors. http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or event data recorder (EDR). The
Transport Canada) in a situation like
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to
this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of record, in certain crash or near
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: bag deployment or hitting a road
about the vehicle’s performance and
Chevrolet Motor Division how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in
Chevrolet Customer Assistance vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicle’s
Center monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is
P.O. Box 33170 transmission performance, to designed to record data related to
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time,
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 typically 30 seconds or less. The
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 crash, and, if equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver EDR in this vehicle is designed to
(French), or write: record such data as:
control the vehicle. These modules
General Motors of Canada Limited may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating;
CA1-163-005 Some modules may also store data
1908 Colonel Sam Drive about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 such as rate of fuel consumption or passenger safety belts were
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
retain personal preferences, such as . How far (if at all) the driver was
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
These data can help provide a GM will not access this data or speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
better understanding of the share it with others except: with the OnStar Terms and Conditions and
circumstances in which crashes and consent of the vehicle owner or, Privacy Statement on the OnStar
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are if the vehicle is leased, with the website.
recorded by your vehicle only if a consent of the lessee; in response
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no to an official request by police or Infotainment System
data are recorded by the EDR under similar government office; as part of
normal driving conditions and no GM's defense of litigation through If the vehicle is equipped with a
personal data (e.g., name, gender, the discovery process; or, as navigation system as part of the
age, and crash location) are required by law. Data that GM infotainment system, use of the
recorded. However, other parties, collects or receives may also be system may result in the storage of
such as law enforcement, could used for GM research needs or may destinations, addresses, telephone
combine the EDR data with the type be made available to others for numbers, and other trip information.
of personally identifying data research purposes, where a need is See the infotainment manual for
routinely acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a information on stored data and for
investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner. deletion instructions.
To read data recorded by an EDR, Radio Frequency
special equipment is required, and OnStar®
access to the vehicle or the EDR is If the vehicle is equipped with
Identification (RFID)
needed. In addition to the vehicle OnStar® and has an active RFID technology is used in some
manufacturer, other parties, such as subscription, additional data may be vehicles for functions such as tire
law enforcement, that have the collected through the OnStar pressure monitoring and ignition
special equipment, can read the system. This includes information system security, as well as in
information if they have access to about the vehicle’s operation; about connection with conveniences such
the vehicle or the EDR. collisions involving the vehicle; the as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
use of the vehicle and its features; transmitters for remote door locking/
and, in certain situations, the unlocking and starting, and
location and approximate GPS in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in Operation is subject to the following

GM vehicles does not use or record two conditions:
personal information or link with any 1. The device may not cause
other GM system containing harmful interference.
personal information.
2. The device must accept any
Radio Frequency interference received, including
interference that may cause
Statement undesired operation of the
This vehicle has systems that device.
operate on a radio frequency that Changes or modifications to any of
comply with Part 15 of the Federal these systems by other than an
Communications Commission (FCC) authorized service facility could void
rules and with Industry Canada authorization to use this equipment.
Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
2 NOTES
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Manual and Automatic

Dimming Rearview Mirrors
. Press the mirror controls.
OnStar Overview If OnStar does not respond,
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 adjust finger position or remove
any gloves.
OnStar Services
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 . Avoid touching the controls while
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Manual Rearview Mirror adjusting the mirror. To cancel a
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 command press Q.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
. Clean the mirror while the
vehicle is off to avoid making
OnStar Additional Information calls.
OnStar Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Status Indicator
Automatic Dimming Rearview The OnStar system status light is
Mirror next to the OnStar controls on the
manual rearview mirror.
If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system If the status light is:
that can connect to a live Advisor . Solid Green: System is ready.
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, . Flashing Green: On a call.
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services. . Red: Indicates a problem.
For the automatic dimming rearview
mirror, the status is provided
through the Display on Demand
Icons.
14-2 OnStar
. Three Color Icons: The system
Press | to connect to a live OnStar Services
is enabled and active.
Advisor to:
. No Icons: The vehicle is in
motion or the OnStar
. Verify account information or Emergency
update contact information. With Automatic Crash Response,
subscription is inactive
. Get driving directions. Requires the built-in system can automatically
. Blinking: Button has been
the available Directions and connect to help in most crashes,
pressed.
Connections service plan. even if help cannot be requested.
. Solid: On a call. . Receive On-Demand PressU to connect to an
. ~ (Fault Icon On): Indicates a Diagnostics for a check of the Emergency Advisor. GPS
problem. vehicle’s key operating systems. technology is used to identify the
. Receive Roadside Assistance. vehicle location and can provide
OnStar Commands
critical information to emergency
Press the OnStar Emergency button
Press | or call 1-888-4ONSTAR U to get a priority connection to an personnel. The Advisor is also
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an trained to offer critical assistance in
Emergency Advisor available 24/ emergency situations before first
Advisor. 7 to: responders arrive.
PressQ to: . Get help for an emergency.
. Make a call, end a call, . Be a Good Samaritan or Security
or answer an incoming call. respond to an AMBER Alert. OnStar provides services like Stolen
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling . Get crisis assistance and Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition
voice commands. evacuation routes. Block, and Roadside Assistance,
if the vehicle is equipped with these
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
services. OnStar can unlock the
Navigation voice commands.
vehicle doors remotely, if it is
Requires the available Directions
and Connections service plan.
OnStar 14-3
equipped with automatic door locks, Using Voice Commands 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
and can help police locate the During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then
vehicle if it is stolen. responds with “OnStar ready,”
Cancel Route then a tone.
Navigation 1. Press Q. System responds: 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
OnStar navigation requires the “OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say commands.
Directions and Connections “Cancel route.” System
Get My Destination
service plan. responds: “Do you want to
cancel directions?” 1. Press Q. System responds:
Press | to receive directions or “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
2. Say “Yes.” System responds:
have them sent to the vehicle
“OK, request completed, thank 2. Say “Get my destination.”
navigation screen, if equipped.
you, goodbye.” System responds with address
Destinations can also be forwarded
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com. Route Preview and the distance to the
The OnStar mapping database is destination, then responds with
continuously updated. Visit 1. Press Q. System responds: “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
www.onstar.com for coverage maps. “OnStar ready,” then a tone. 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
Turn-by-Turn Navigation 2. Say “Route preview.” System commands.
responds with the next three
1. Press | to connect to a live maneuvers. Other Navigation Services
Advisor.
Available from OnStar
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
2. Request directions. commands. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from
3. Directions are downloaded to the Repeat MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn
vehicle. Navigation or screen-based
1. Press Q. System responds:
4. Follow the voice-guided navigation system. When ready, the
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. directions will be downloaded to the
commands.
vehicle.
14-4 OnStar
Destination Download: Press |, 2. Say “Call.” System responds: End a Call

then request the Advisor to “Please say the name or number
to call.” PressQ. System responds: “Call
download directions to the
ended.”
navigation system in the vehicle. 3. Say the entire number without
After the call ends, press the “Go” pausing, including a “1” and the Store a Name Tag for Speed
button on the navigation screen to area code. System responds: Dialing
begin driving directions. “OK calling.”
Destinations can also be Calling 911 Emergency
downloaded on the go. For “OnStar ready.”
information about eNav, Destination 1. Press Q. The system responds 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
Download, and coverage maps visit “OnStar Ready,” followed by “Please say the number you
www.onstar.com. a tone. would like to store.”
2. Say “Call.” The system responds 3. Say the entire number without
Connections “Please say the name or number pausing. System responds:
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows to call.” “Please say the name tag.”
calls to be made and received from 3. Say “911” without pausing. The 4. Pick a name tag. System
the vehicle. The vehicle can also be system responds “911.” responds: “About to store <name
controlled from a cell phone through tag>. Does that sound OK?”
the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app. 4. Say “Call.” The system responds
See www.onstar.com for “OK, dialing 911.” 5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.
coverage maps. System responds: “OK, storing
Retrieve My Number <name tag>.”
Hands-Free Calling 1. Press Q. System responds: Place a Call Using a Stored
1. Press Q. System responds: “OnStar ready.” Number
“OnStar ready.” 2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar
Hands-Free Calling number is.” “OnStar ready.”
OnStar 14-5
2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System Diagnostics OnStar Additional

responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.” OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will Information
perform a vehicle check every
Verify Minutes and Expiration month. It will check the engine, Transferring Service
transmission, antilock brakes, and
PressQ and say “Minutes” then major vehicle systems. It also Press | to request account transfer
“Verify” to check how many minutes checks the tire pressures, if the eligibility information. The Advisor
remain and their expiration date. vehicle is equipped with the Tire can assist in canceling or removing
Pressure Monitoring System. If a account information. If OnStar
OnStar Mobile App receives information that vehicle
diagnostics check is needed
Download the OnStar RemoteLink ownership has changed, OnStar
between e-mails, press |, and an
mobile app to your iPhone, Android may send a voice message to the
Advisor can run a check. vehicle, requesting updated account
or BlackBerry smartphone to check
vehicle fuel level, oil life, or tire information.
pressure; to start the vehicle (if
equipped) or unlock it; or to connect Reactivation for Subsequent
to an OnStar Advisor. For OnStar Owners
RemoteLink information and Press | and follow the prompts to
compatibility, see www.onstar.com. speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar
service offers and options available.
14-6 OnStar
How OnStar Service Works OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on
your vehicle is in a place where page 13‑21 for information
Automatic Crash Response,
OnStar has an agreement with a regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
wireless service provider for service Communications Commission (FCC)
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
in that area, and the wireless rules and Industry Canada
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
service provider has coverage, Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
network capacity, reception, and
Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling Services for People with
technology compatible with OnStar
are available on most vehicles. Not Disabilities
service. Service involving location
all OnStar services are available
information about the vehicle cannot Advisors provide services to help
everywhere or on all vehicles. For
work unless GPS signals are subscribers with physical disabilities
more information, a full description
available, unobstructed, and and medical conditions.
of OnStar services, system
compatible with the OnStar
limitations, and OnStar terms and Press | for help with:
hardware. OnStar service may not
conditions, see www.onstar.com
work if the OnStar equipment is not . Locating a gas station with an
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
properly installed or it has not been attendant to pump gas.
contact OnStar at 1-888-4ONSTAR
properly maintained. If equipment or
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY . Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,
software is added, connected,
1-877-248-2080; or press | to or modified, OnStar service may not that meets accessibility needs.
speak with an Advisor. OnStar work. Other problems beyond the . Providing directions to the
services require a vehicle electrical control of OnStar may prevent closest hospital or pharmacy in
system, wireless service, and GPS service such as hills, tall buildings, urgent situations.
satellite technologies to be available tunnels, weather, electrical system
and operating for features to design and architecture of the TTY Users
function properly. These systems vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a OnStar has the ability to
may not operate if the battery is crash, or wireless phone network communicate to the deaf,
discharged or disconnected. congestion or jamming. hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired
customers while in the vehicle. The
OnStar 14-7
available dealer-installed TTY Warranty Global Positioning

system can provide in-vehicle System (GPS)
OnStar equipment may be
access to all of the OnStar services,
warranted as part of the New . Obstruction of the GPS can
except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The occur in a large city with tall
Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
manufacturer of the vehicle buildings; in parking garages;
OnStar.com furnishes detailed warranty around airports; in tunnels,
information. underpasses, or parking
The website provides access to
garages; or in an area with very
account information, manages the Languages dense trees. If GPS signals are
OnStar subscription, and allows
The vehicle can be programmed to not available, the OnStar system
viewing of videos of each service.
respond in French or Spanish. should still operate to call
Get subscription plan pricing and
sign up for OnStar Vehicle Press | and ask an Advisor. OnStar. However, OnStar could
Advisors can speak French or have difficulty identifying the
Diagnostics. Click on the “My
Spanish. exact location.
Account” tab on the home page.
. In emergency situations, OnStar
OnStar Personal Identification Potential Issues can use the last stored GPS
Number (PIN) Some OnStar services are disabled location to send to emergency
A PIN is needed to access some of after five days. OnStar cannot responders.
the OnStar services, like Remote perform Remote Door Unlock or . A temporary loss of GPS can
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the
cause loss of the ability to send
Assistance. You will be prompted to vehicle has been off continuously
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
change the PIN the first time when for five days. After five days, OnStar
The Advisor may give a verbal
speaking with an Advisor. To can contact Roadside Assistance
route or may ask for a call back
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar and a locksmith to help gain access
after the vehicle is driven into an
and provide the Advisor with the to the vehicle.
open area.
current number.
14-8 OnStar
Cellular and GPS Antennas Add-on Electrical Equipment OnStar - libcurl and unzip
Avoid placing items over or near the The OnStar system is integrated acknowledgments
antenna to prevent blocking cellular into the electrical architecture of the Certain OnStar components include
and GPS signal reception. Cellular vehicle. Do not add any electrical libcurl and unzip software. Below
reception is required for OnStar to equipment. See Add-On Electrical are the notices and licenses
send remote signals to the vehicle. Equipment on page 9‑59. Added associated with this software:
electrical equipment may interfere
Unable to Connect to OnStar with the operation of the OnStar libcurl:
Message system and cause it to not operate. COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION
If there is limited cellular coverage NOTICE
Privacy
or the cellular network has reached Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel
maximum capacity, this message The complete OnStar Privacy Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
may come on. Press | to try the Statement may be found at
www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive All rights reserved.
call again or try again after driving a
few miles into another cellular area. users of wireless communications Permission to use, copy, modify,
are cautioned that the privacy of any and distribute this software for any
Vehicle and Power Issues information sent via wireless cellular purpose with or without fee is
communications cannot be assured. hereby granted, provided that the
OnStar services require a vehicle
Third parties may unlawfully above copyright notice and this
electrical system, wireless service,
intercept or access transmissions permission notice appear in all
and GPS satellite technologies to be
and private communications without copies.
available and operating for features
consent.
to function properly. These systems THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
may not operate if the battery is “AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
discharged or disconnected. ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
OnStar 14-9
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE should be available at ftp:// Info-ZIP or its contributors be held
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ liable for any direct, indirect,
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO license.html indefinitely. incidental, special or consequential
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All damages arising out of the use of or
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE rights reserved. inability to use this software.
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, Permission is granted to anyone to
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, For the purposes of this copyright
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as use this software for any purpose,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF including commercial applications,
CONTRACT, TORT OR the following set of individuals:
and to alter it and redistribute it
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, freely, subject to the following
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, restrictions:
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris 1. Redistributions of source code
THE SOFTWARE. Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, must retain the above copyright
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, notice, definition, disclaimer, and
Except as contained in this notice, this list of conditions.
the name of a copyright holder shall Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,
not be used in advertising or Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, 2. Redistributions in binary form
otherwise to promote the sale, use Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, (compiled executables) must
or other dealings in this Software Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, reproduce the above copyright
without prior written authorization of George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai notice, definition, disclaimer, and
the copyright holder. Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, this list of conditions in
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, documentation and/or other
unzip: Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the
This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception
Info-ZIP copyright and license. The Rich Wales, Mike White to this condition is redistribution
definitive version of this document This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary
without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a
express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is
14-10 OnStar
permitted without inclusion of altered versions are further

this license, as long as the prohibited from
normal SFX banner has not misrepresentative use of the
been removed from the binary or Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
disabled. addresses or of the
3. Altered versions–including, but Info-ZIP URL(s).
not limited to, ports to new 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
operating systems, existing ports the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
with new graphical interfaces, “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
and dynamic, shared, or static “Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
library versions–must be plainly and “MacZip” for its own source
marked as such and must not be and binary releases.
misrepresented as being the
original source. Such altered
versions also must not be
misrepresented as being
Info-ZIP releases–including, but
not limited to, labeling of the
altered versions with the names
“Info-ZIP” (or any variation
thereof, including, but not limited
to, different capitalizations),
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP. Such
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

What Will You See after an Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Assistance Program,
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11
Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-24
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-18 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Add-On Electrical
Airbags CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Adding Equipment to the Audio System
Additional Information
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16 Diversity Antenna System . . . .7-13
Air Cleaner/Filter,
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17, 10-19
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Automatic
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Alarm Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Airbag System
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-16
How Does an Airbag
Antenna Automatic Transmission
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake Shift Lock Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
What Makes an Airbag
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Auxiliary
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont'd) Cautions, Danger, and

Headlamps, Front Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Turn Signal, and CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Parking Lamps . . . . . 10-37, 10-38 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
High Intensity Discharge Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17
Voltage and Charging
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-40 Check
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-35
and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Ignition
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-22, 7-25
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-35
Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Child Restraints
Brake
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20 C Infants and Young
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
California Lower Anchors and
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-50 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-37
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Perchlorate Materials Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43, 3-45
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Cleaning
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Capacities and Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Carbon Monoxide Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
INDEX i-3
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Cover Diagnostics

Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14 Tonneau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Door
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-39 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Competitive Driving, Racing Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
or Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Text Telephone (TTY) Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-5
Compressor Kit, Tire Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6 Driver Information
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Customer Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Connections Service Publications Driving
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-17 Characteristics and
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Customer Satisfaction Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4 Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 D Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-19
Coolant Danger, Warnings, and Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine Temperature Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Daytime Running Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cooling System . . . . . . . .10-20–10-22 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39, 6-2 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Courtesy Transportation Devices Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont'd) F
Cooling System . . . . . . 10-20–10-22
Electrical Equipment, Filter,
Cooling System Messages . . .5-35
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59 Engine Air
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Electrical System Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17, 10-19
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Engine Compartment Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Fuses and Circuit Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Instrument Panel Fuse Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Fluid
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-16
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Rear Compartment Fuse Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Power Steering . . . . . . 10-29, 10-30
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-26
Emergency Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Fog Lamps
Engine Oil
Engine Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-17, 10-19 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Check and Service Engine Front Fog Lamp
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Front Seats
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Coolant Temperature Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
INDEX i-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49 G General Information

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Filling a Portable Fuel Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Gasoline
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Gauges
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-50
Engine Coolant
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 H
Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Engine Oil Temperature . . . . . . .5-12
Requirements, California . . . . .9-50 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Fuses Headlamps
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine Compartment Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Transmission Temperature . . . .5-13
Fuses and Circuit Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Daytime Running
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Instrument Panel Fuse Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . 10-39, 6-2
Warning Lights and
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Rear Compartment Fuse High Intensity Discharge
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
i-6 INDEX
Heater J LATCH System

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Replacing Parts after a
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-57 K Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-37 Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-9 Keyless Entry Lighting
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
How to Wear Safety Belts L Lights
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-51 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Lamps Antilock Brake System
Daytime (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
I Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . 10-39, 6-2 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Ignition Transmission Lock Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Headlamps, Front Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Turn Signal, and Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Infants and Young Children, Parking Lamps . . . . . 10-37, 10-38 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Taillamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont'd) Messages Mirrors

Traction Control OFF/ Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Battery Voltage and Automatic Dimming
Traction Control System Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Locks Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-35 Monitor System, Tire
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 N
Lower Anchors and Tethers Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Navigation
for Children (LATCH Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Object Detection System . . . . .5-38 Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-38 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
M Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Maintenance
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 O
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 Object Detection System
Maintenance Schedule Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Recommended Fluids Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17 Off-Road
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
i-8 INDEX
Oil Overview, Infotainment Power

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-15 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Engine Oil Pressure P Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Park Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-21
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . 10-29, 10-30
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
OnStar® Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 Pregnancy, Using Safety
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Brake and P (Park) Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
OnStar® Additional Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-35 Privacy
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-24 Radio Frequency
OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Passenger Airbag Status Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20
OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Program
OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Passenger Compartment Air Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13
OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Proposition 65 Warning,
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Perchlorate Materials
Operation, Infotainment Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 R
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Personalization Racing or Other Competitive
Ordering Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-17 Phone Radio Frequency
Outlets Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-22, 7-25 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
INDEX i-9
Radios Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-5
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Running the Vehicle While
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-29 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Replacing LATCH System
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 S
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Replacing Safety Belt Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-15 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-47 Reporting Safety Defects Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18 How to Wear Safety Belts
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Recommended Restraints Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-15
Recommended Fluids and Retained Accessory Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-14
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Safety Defects Reporting
Records Ride Control Systems Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-42 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Recreational Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Selective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Reimbursement Program, Roads Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13
Remote Keyless Entry Roadside Assistance Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11 Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Roof
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
i-10 INDEX
Seats Service (cont'd) Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Publications Ordering Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . 10-29, 10-30
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Storage
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Shift Lock Control Function Storage Areas
Securing Child Check, Automatic Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43, 3-45 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Security Shifting Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Storing the Tire Sealant
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Signals, Turn and Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Spare Tire Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Service Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Accessories and Specifications and System
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20, 7-1
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 StabiliTrak T
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16 OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Maintenance, General System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . . . 5-24
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Taillamps
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Turn Signal and
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
INDEX i-11
Theater Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Tires (cont'd) Trailer

Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-11 Uniform Tire Quality Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57, 9-58
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Transmission
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Wheel Alignment and Tire Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Tires Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-69 Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 When It Is Time for New Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Transportation Program,
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Towing Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-54 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-59 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Turn and Lane-Change
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-88
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57, 9-58 U
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-46
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-58 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Uniform Tire Quality
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Control OFF/StabiliTrak Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Sealant and OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-46
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-37 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Sealant and Compressor Control System (TCS)/ Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-42
Terminology and Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . .9-43
i-12 INDEX
V W Windshield
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Vehicle Warning
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Winter
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Identification Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-35
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Wheels
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Alignment and Tire
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 When It Is Time for New
Vehicle Care Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Storing the Tire Sealant Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-78 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual - 2013 - CRC 2nd Edition - 9/12/12 Black plate (1,1)

2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2013 Chevrolet Camaro Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart I : Cruise Control }: Power

In Brief Vehicle Features Performance and Maintenance

Press Q to lock all doors.

Starting the Vehicle

Seat Adjustment Power Seats See Power Seat Adjustment on

To adjust the seat, if equipped:

Interior Steering Wheel

See: Windshield Wiper/Washer

Climate Controls Transmission

1. Fan Control 5. Air Conditioning Electronic Range Select

instrument cluster. When using the Manual Transmission Vehicle Features

2. Press the plus/minus buttons on RADIO/BAND: Press to choose

Storing a Favorite Station 5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob Satellite Radio

Portable Audio Devices Steering Wheel Controls $ / i : Press to silence the

Cruise Control SET/−: Move the thumbwheel down

8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible Universal Remote System Sunroof

Express-open: Press and release Performance and StabiliTrak® System

of the car wash that the vehicle will

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

With an active OnStar subscription,

Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Doors WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Emergency Trunk Release 2. Pull the cushion to the side, then

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors 3. Adjust each outside mirror so

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming Windows

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Express Window Anti-Pinch To program each front window:

{ WARNING Programming the Power

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Roof Vent: Press and release the rear of

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

P (Park) or a manual transmission

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

vehicle's battery. Under certain 1. Park on a level surface. Place

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21

2-22 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Safety Belt Use During Adding Equipment to the

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Seats and Restraints 3-3